You are on page 1of 286

User Manual

Viper 4040

























ACES Systems/TEC Aviation Division
Document Number 4040-OM-01
Revision 3.02
Oct 2012

Part Number 75-900-4040


10737 Lexington Drive Knoxville, TN 37932-3294 USA Telephone 865-671-2003 Fax 865-675-1241 Web www.acessystems.com





Copyright Notice
Copyright by TEC, 2000 - 2012. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be
reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any
language in any form by any means without the express written permission of TEC.
Disclaimer
This documentation is provided for information purposes. TEC makes no warranty of any
kind with regard to this material, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. TEC shall not be liable for errors,
omissions, or inconsistencies which may be contained herein or for incidental or
consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this
material. Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not
represent a commitment on the part of TEC.


Table of Contents (Revision 3.02, Oct 2012)
Preface (Revision 3, Oct 2012)
Contact ACES Systems 1
Warranty 2
Calibration and Certification 3

1 Introduction (Revision 2, Oct 2012)
1.1 Notes, Cautions, and Warnings 1-2
1.2 Conventions 1-2

2 Anal yzer Description (Revision 3, Oct 2012)
2.1 Keypad 2-2
2.2 Screen 2-5
2.3 Input and Output Ports 2-6
2.3.1 CHANNEL Ports 2-6
2.3.2 TACH Ports 2-6
2.3.3 AUX/COMM Port 2-6
2.3.4 STROBE Port 2-7
2.3.5 USB Port 2-7
2.3.6 BATT CHG Port 2-7
2.4 Additional Standard Equipment 2-8
2.4.1 Battery 2-8
2.4.1.1 Nickel Cadmium (NiCd) equipped analyzers 2-8
2.4.1.2 Nickel Metal Hydride (NiMH) equipped analyzers 2-8
2.4.2 Battery Charger 2-9
2.4.2.1 Nickel Cadmium (NiCd) equipped analyzers 2-9
2.4.2.2 Nickel Metal Hydride (NiMH) equipped analyzers 2-10
2.4.3 USB Communications Cable 2-11
2.4.4 Carrying Case 2-11
2.4.5 User Manual 2-12
2.5 Optional Equipment 2-12
2.5.1 Propeller Balancing Kit 2-12
2.5.1.1 Manual, ACES Systems Guide to Propeller Balancing 2-12
2.5.1.2 991D-1 Accelerometer 2-13
2.5.1.3 991D-1 Sensor Cable 2-13
2.5.1.4 Phototach 2-14
2.5.1.5 Tachometer Sensor Cable 2-14
2.5.1.6 Propeller Protractor 2-15
2.5.1.6.1 Using the Propeller Protractor 2-15
2.5.1.7 Case Bolt Adapter Set 2-16
2.5.1.8 Tackle Box 2-16
2.5.1.9 Right-Angle Sensor Mount 2-17
2.5.1.10 Gram Scale 2-17
2.5.1.11 Reflective Tape 2-17
2.5.1.12 ACES Systems Balance Placard 2-18
2.5.2 Serial Communications Cable 2-18

2 Table of Contents Revision 3.02, Oct 2012


3 Using the VIPER 4040 (Revision 2, Aug 2007)
3.1 Entering Data 3-1
3.1.1 Using the Keys 3-1
3.1.2 Filling in Fields 3-2
3.2 Loading a Setup 3-2
3.3 Main Menu 3-3

4 Propell er Balance (Revisi on 2, Oct 2012)
4.1 Start J ob 4-2
4.1.1 Prop Balance Setup 4-3
4.1.1.1 Prop Balance Setup Screen 4-4
4.1.1.2 Edit ICF 4-6
4.1.1.3 Sensor Setup 4-7
4.1.1.4 Prop Hole Layout Setup 4-8
4.1.2 J ob Identification 4-10
4.1.3 Engine Information 4-11
4.1.4 Connect Sensors 4-11
4.1.4.1 Connect Sensors 4-12
4.1.4.2 Tachometer Setup 4-12
4.1.5 Start Aircraft 4-13
4.1.6 Acquiring Data 4-14
4.1.7 Review J ob 4-14
4.1.8 Balance Solution 4-15
4.1.8.1 Set Split Weights 4-17
4.1.8.2 Record Split Weights 4-17
4.2 Resume J ob 4-19
4.3 Manage J obs 4-19
4.3.1 Review 4-20
4.3.2 Delete 4-20
4.3.3 Delete All 4-20
4.4 Manage Setups 4-21
4.4.1 Edit 4-21
4.4.2 New 4-21
4.4.3 Delete 4-21

5 Main Rotor Track & Balance (Revision 3, Oct 2012)
5.1 Analyzer Chart Forms 5-1
5.1.1 Regular Chart Forms 5-1
5.1.1.1 Regular Main Rotor Chart Setup 5-2
5.1.2 Irregular Chart Forms 5-3
5.1.2.1 Irregular Main Rotor Chart Setup 5-4
5.1.3 Tracking Influence Setup 5-6
5.2 Setup Process 5-7
5.2.1 Main Rotor Setup 5-7
5.2.1.1 Main Rotor Setup Screen 5-7
5.2.1.2 Tracking Setup Screen 5-9
5.2.1.3 Main Rotor Condition Setup Screen 5-10
5.2.1.3.1 Conditions Setup Screen, Example 2 5-11
5.2.1.3.2 Conditions Setup Screen, Example 3 5-12
VIPER 4040 User Manual
Revision 3.02, Oct 2012 Table of Contents 3

5.2.1.4 Main Rotor Adjustment Symbol Setup and Solution Logic
Setup Screen
5-13
5.2.1.5 Chart Definition 5-13
5.2.1.6 Main Rotor Setup Example 5-14
5.2.1.6.1 Main Rotor Setup Screen 5-15
5.2.1.6.2 Tracking Setup Screen 5-16
5.2.1.6.3 Main Rotor Conditions Setup 5-16
5.2.1.6.4 Main Rotor Adjustment Symbol and Solution Logic Setup 5-17
5.2.1.6.5 Vertical: Hover Chart Definition 5-17
5.2.1.6.6 Vertical: FLT 80 FLT 120 Chart Definition Example 1 5-18
5.2.1.6.7 Lateral Hover Chart 5-19
5.3 Main Rotor Balance Process 5-20
5.3.1 Starting a New J ob 5-21
5.3.2 Setup List 5-22
5.3.3 J ob Identification 5-22
5.3.4 Tracking Selections 5-23
5.3.5 Connect Sensors 5-24
5.3.5.1 Optical Tachometer Setup (Optional) 5-24
5.3.6 Start Aircraft 5-25
5.3.7 Select Aircraft Condition 5-26
5.3.8 Data Acquisition 5-27
5.3.9 Review Data 5-28
5.3.9.1 Track Measurement 5-28
5.3.9.2 Check Track - Results 5-29
5.3.10 Shut Down Engines 5-30
5.3.11 Review Prior Run(s) Data 5-30
5.3.12 Solution Screens 5-31
5.3.12.1 Example Solution Screen #1 5-32
5.3.12.2 Example Solution Screen #2 5-33
5.3.12.3 Example Solution Screen #3 5-33
5.4 Main Rotor Manage Data Functions 5-34
5.4.1 Main Rotor Review J ob 5-34
5.4.2 View Main Rotor Track and Balance 5-35
5.4.3 View Main Rotor Chart 5-36
5.4.4 View Main Rotor Chart ICFs 5-37

6 Tail Rotor Balance (Revision 3, Oct 2012)
6.1 Analyzer Chart Forms 6-1
6.1.1 Regular Chart Forms 6-1
6.1.1.1 Regular Tail Rotor Chart Setup 6-2
6.1.2 Irregular Chart Forms 6-3
6.1.2.1 Irregular Tail Rotor Chart Setup 6-3
6.2 Tail Rotor Setup 6-5
6.2.1 Tail Rotor Setup Screen 6-5
6.2.2 Tail Rotor Chart Setup 6-7
6.3 Multiple Condition Setup 6-8
6.3.1 Tail Rotor Setup Screen 6-8
6.3.2 Tail Rotor Condition Setup Screen 6-10
6.3.3 First Condition Tail Rotor Chart Setup Screen 6-11
6.3.4 Second Condition Tail Rotor Chart Setup Screen 6-12
6.4 Tail Rotor Balance Process 6-14
6.4.1 Starting a New J ob 6-14

4 Table of Contents Revision 3.02, Oct 2012
6.4.2 Setup List 6-15
6.4.3 J ob Identification 6-16
6.4.4 Connect Sensors 6-16
6.4.5 Start Aircraft 6-17
6.4.6 Select Tail Rotor Condition Screen 6-18
6.4.7 Data Acquisition 6-18
6.4.8 Shut Down Engines 6-20
6.4.9 Review Prior Run(s) Data 6-21
6.4.10 Tail Rotor Suggested/Installed Weights Screen 6-21
6.4.11 Tail Rotor Re-Solve Feature 6-22
6.5 Tail Rotor Manage Data Functions 6-25
6.5.1 View Tail Rotor Balance 6-25
6.5.2 View Tail Rotor Chart 6-25

7 Fan/Turbine Balance and Fan Blade Optimizer
(Revision 3.02, Oct 2012)

7.1 Fan/Turbine Balance 7-1
7.1.1 Start J ob 7-1
7.1.2 Setup List 7-2
7.1.3 Fan/Turbine Balance Setup Screen 7-2
7.1.4 Incomplete J ob 7-3
7.1.5 Fan/Turbine Balance Setup - General 7-3
7.1.6 Complete the Fan/Turbine Balance Setup 7-4
7.1.7 Define Class Weights 7-8
7.1.8 Balance Plane Information Setup 7-10
7.1.9 Label Detail Wt Holes - Setup 7-14
7.1.10 Sensor Information Screen 7-14
7.1.11 Define Fan/Turbine Balance ICFs 7-16
7.1.12 J ob Identification Screen 7-16
7.1.13 Engine Information Screen 7-17
7.1.14 Label Detail Wt Holes - J ob 7-17
7.1.15 Fan/Turbine Balance Equipment Setup 7-18
7.1.16 Test Tach Power 7-19
7.1.17 Start Aircraft 7-19
7.1.18 Set Engine Speed 7-20
7.1.19 Data Acquisition 7-21
7.1.20 Shut Down Engines 7-22
7.1.21 Review Prior Run(s) Data 7-22
7.1.22 Fan/Turbine Suggested/Installed Weights 7-23
7.1.23 Function Key Set Number 2 7-25
7.1.24 Start Aircraft 7-25
7.1.25 Quit J ob 7-25
7.2 Fan Blade Optimizer 7-26
7.2.1 Start J ob 7-26
7.2.2 Select Setup List 7-27
7.2.3 Fan Blade Optimizer Setup 7-27
7.2.4 J ob Identification Screen 7-28
7.2.5 Engine Information Screen 7-29
7.2.6 Fan Blade Optimizer J ob Screen 7-29
7.2.7 Fan Blade Optimizer Result screen 7-30
7.2.8 Complete Blade Placement 7-31

VIPER 4040 User Manual
Revision 3.02, Oct 2012 Table of Contents 5
8 TFE731 Performance (Revision 3, Oct 2012) 8-1
8.1 TFE731 Performance EMS 8-1
8.1.1 Necessary Equipment 8-1
8.1.1.1 Datalogger (J EDA) 8-3
8.1.1.2 ACES AvTrend Software 8-3
8.1.1.3 RS232-to-RS422 Communications Cable 8-3
8.1.1.4 EEC, N2 DEEC, and N1 DEEC Comm Cable(s) 8-3
8.1.1.5 Ambient Temperature Probe and Cable 8-4
8.1.1.6 Optional sensors and cables 8-4
8.1.2 Analyzer Operation 8-4
8.1.3 Information Screens 8-13
8.1.4 Getting the latest software 8-17

9 Vibration Spectrum Survey (Revision 3.01, Oct 2012)
9.1 Start J ob 9-2
9.1.1 Spectra Setup 9-4
9.1.1.1 Spectra Setup 9-4
9.1.1.2 Edit Conditions 9-7
9.1.1.3 Speeds 9-7
9.1.1.4 Limits 9-9
9.1.2 J ob Identification 9-10
9.1.3 Engine Information 9-11
9.1.4 Microphone Calibration 9-12
9.1.5 Select Aircraft Condition 9-15
9.1.6 Start Component 9-15
9.1.7 Collecting Data 9-15
9.1.8 Storing Data 9-19
9.2 Resume J ob 9-21
9.3 Manage J obs 9-22
9.3.1 Review 9-22
9.3.2 Delete 9-22
9.3.3 Delete All 9-22
9.4 Manage Setups 9-23
9.4.1 Edit 9-23
9.4.2 New 9-23
9.4.3 Delete 9-23

10 Overall Vibration Surveys (Revision 3.01, Oct 2012)
10.1 Start J ob 10-2
10.1.1 Overall Vibration Setup 10-4
10.1.1.1 To Complete the Overall Vibration Setup Screen 10-4
10.1.1.2 Conditions 10-6
10.1.1.3 Speeds 10-7
10.1.2 J ob Identification 10-8
10.1.3 Engine Information 10-9
10.1.4 Select Aircraft Condition 10-9
10.1.5 Start Component 10-9
10.1.6 Collecting Data 10-10
10.2 Resume J ob 10-11
10.3 Manage J obs 10-11
10.3.1 Review 10-12
10.3.2 Delete 10-12

6 Table of Contents Revision 3.02, Oct 2012
10.3.3 Delete All 10-12
10.4 Manage Setups 10-13
10.4.1 Edit 10-13
10.4.2 New 10-13
10.4.3 Delete 10-13

11 Transient Vibration Surveys (Revision 3, Oct 2012)
11.1 Start J ob 11-2
11.1.1 Transient Survey Setup 11-4
11.1.1.1 Config 11-7
11.1.1.2 Speeds 11-8
11.1.1.3 Parameters (Parms) 11-9
11.1.1.4 Plots 11-11
11.1.1.5 Limits 11-11
11.1.2 J ob Identification 11-14
11.1.3 Engine Information 11-14
11.1.4 Start Engine 11-15
11.1.5 Microphone Calibration 11-15
11.1.6 Select Aircraft Condition 11-19
11.1.7 Collecting Data 11-19
11.1.8 Storing Data 11-23
11.2 Resume J ob 11-25
11.3 Manage J obs 11-25
11.3.1 Review 11-26
11.3.2 Delete 11-26
11.3.3 Delete All 11-26
11.4 Manage Setups 11-27
11.4.1 Edit 11-27
11.4.2 New 11-27
11.4.3 Delete 11-27
11.4.4 Select Setup for Remote J ob 11-28

12 Monitor Spectrum (Revisi on 3, Oct 2012)
12.1 Spectra Setup 12-1
12.1.1 Monitor Spectrum Setup Screen 12-1
12.1.2 Speeds 12-4
12.1.3 Monitor 12-6

13 Monitor Magnitude and Clock (Revision 1, Aug 2007)

14 Monitor Magnitude and Phase (Revision 1, Aug 2007)

15 Monitor Overall (Revision 2, Aug 2007)
15.1.1 Overall Vibration Setup Screen 15-1
15.1.2 Speeds 15-4
15.1.3 Monitor 15-5

16 Check Track (Revision 3, Oct 2012)

17 Transfer Data with PC (Revision 1, Aug 2007)

18 Miscellaneous Items (Revision 3.01, Oct 2012)
VIPER 4040 User Manual
Revision 3.02, Oct 2012 Table of Contents 7
18.1 Miscellaneous Items 18-1
18.1.1 Setup Sensors 18-2
18.1.2 Set Date and Time 18-5
18.1.3 Set Power-Off Timeout 18-7
18.1.4 Set J ob Count Limit 18-8
18.1.5 Check Battery 18-9
18.1.6 Analyzer Information 18-10
18.1.7 Database Information 18-12
18.1.8 Erase Entire Database 18-13
18.1.9 USB Information 18-13
18.1.10 Erase Orphaned Transient Spectra 18-13
18.1.11 Bus Test 18-14
18.1.12 EMS Comm Test 18-14
18.1.13 Show Welcome Screen 18-14
18.1.14 Enable Memory Leak Tests 18-14

19 Equipment and Accessory Setup and Troubleshooting
(Revision 3, Aug 2007)

19.1 Battery Charger and Battery 19-1
19.2 Cables 19-5
19.3 LaseTach 19-6
19.4 Phototach 19-6
19.5 Propeller Protractor 19-6
19.6 Reflective Tape (3M Tape, Type 7610) 19-7
19.7 Vibration Sensors 19-8
19.8 Optical Tachometer 19-8
19.9 Reinitializing the Analyzer 19-8
19.10 Troubleshooting Ground Loop Issues 19-9

20 Reading Spectrum and Scales (Revision 2, Oct 2012)
20.1 Reading the X and Y Plotted Vibration Spectrum 20-1
20.2 Reading the Converging Vibration Indicator Scale 20-2

21 Printing (Revision 3, Oct 2012)

22 Specifi cations for Model 4040 Viper (Revision 3, Oct
2012)




Preface
(REVISION 3, OCT 2012)

Contact ACES Systems
General
For general information regarding ACES Systems products and services, contact one of the
international representatives listed at: http://www.acessystems.com/worldreps.htm.
Technical Support
For technical support please use the contact information found at:
http://www.acessystems.com/contact.htm. If you require assistance with an operational
problem with the analyzer, please have as much detailed information as possible available
before contacting ACES Systems. The support staff will answer questions about the operation
and care of your equipment, assist you in troubleshooting a problem, and help you overcome
common application difficulties whenever possible. If it becomes necessary for your
equipment to be returned to us for any reason, you will be issued a return number during the
technical support contact.
Feedback
ACES Systems depends on information from our customers to continue the attributes of
quality, dependability and simplicity associated with our products. We invite you to contact
our Technical Support office using the information found at:
http://www.acessystems.com/contact.htm to express your opinions, comments and
suggestions concerning the design and capability of your analyzer.

2 - Preface
Warranty
The ACES Systems Viper Model 4040 Analyzer is warranted to be free of defects in
material and workmanship for a period of 60 months (5 years) following the purchase date.
Warranty does not cover the analyzer unless it is properly used, stored, and maintained in
accordance with the provisions of this manual. Accessories are warranted for a period of 12
months (1 year). The original manufacturer may cover individual accessories not
manufactured or assembled by TEC for longer periods.
The required annual calibration must be complied with to validate the terms of this
warranty. Warranty replacement and / or repair will not be honored on any unit which is
overdue an annual calibration at the time of the warranty claim. If your calibration is overdue
and no warranty claim is being made, you need only have your overdue calibration completed
to re-validate your warranty. Warranty is limited to supplying Purchaser with replacement or
repair of any unit or accessory item which, in TEC's opinion, is defective. All repaired or
replacement parts will be warranted only for the unexpired period of the basic warranty. All
warranty work will be on a return-to-the-factory basis. Shipping cost to the factory will be
borne by the Purchaser. Warranty shall not apply to any product that, in the judgment of TEC,
has been subjected to misuse or neglect, or has been repaired or altered outside the TEC
factory in any way, which may have impaired its safety, operation, or efficiency, or to any
product that has been subjected to accidental damage.
Warranty does not cover any cost incurred by Purchaser as the result of the purchase of TEC
products. Nor does Warranty cover cost incurred by Purchaser for labor charges for
replacement of parts, adjustments, or repairs or any other work performed by the Purchaser or
his agents on, or connected with, TEC-supplied products. Warranty is expressly in lieu of any
and all other warranties or representations, expressed or implied, and of any obligations or
liabilities of TEC to the Purchaser arising from the use of said products, and no agreement or
understanding varying or extending the same will be binding upon TEC unless in writing,
signed by an authorized representative of TEC. TEC reserves the right to make changes in
design or additions to, or improvements in, products at any time without imposing any
liability on itself to install the same in any product manufactured or supplied prior thereto.
Viper 4040 User Manual
3 - Preface
Calibration and Certification
Your ACES Systems equipment is calibrated and certified per NIST standards, effective the
date of shipment. TEC requires the unit to be calibrated by TEC or a TEC authorized service
facility on an annual basis to insure accuracy and currency of installed electronic
components. In addition, the vibration sensors, pressure and temperature transducers (if
applicable) should also be calibrated on an annual basis or when dropped, damaged or suspect
of improper operation. The analyzer will be identified as calibrated by a sticker stating the
date of calibration and next due date of calibration. A certificate of calibration will be
provided to you to verify compliance to inspectors. A permanent record of your calibration is
maintained by TEC. You may obtain a copy of your calibration by contacting ACES
Systems. A calibration reminder letter will be sent to you approximately 30 days prior to the
expiration of your calibration. For information about calibration services please visit:
http://www.acessystems.com/returnprocess.htm and/or
http://www.acessystems.com/servicecenters.htm.
NOTE
The annual calibration is required in order to compl y with the terms of the
5-year warranty. See Warranty in this section for details.



Chapter 1
Introduction
(Revision 2, Oct 2012)
The ACES Systems Viper 4040 Analyzer is a versatile tool that automates the task of turbine
fan trim balance, propeller balance, provides automated rotor track and balancing adjustments
or provides raw data for use with polar charts, performs vibration surveys, TFE731
Performance runs, (in conjunction with the ACES 1752B J EDA) and transient analysis.
Engine, airframe, propeller, or rotor-specific setups can be loaded and stored into the analyzer
by the user, then recalled to automatically configure the analyzer for the task at hand. These
Setups store influence coefficients for balancing functions, which the analyzer updates with
each balance job to minimize the number of required runs for balancing fans, propellers,
rotors, or shafts.
The analyzer is capable of true, four-channel simultaneous data acquisition and provides full
graphic-spectrum capabilities including on screen display of limits and component
identification taken from an installed fault frequency database.
The Viper 4040 allows you to print spectra and balance jobs directly to a serial printer, and
with the use of a serial-to-parallel converter, to a parallel printer for inclusion in aircraft
records or as file copies. (See chapter 21 of this manual for details on printing.) The analyzer
also has a USB port if your PC is so equipped. Survey spectra and balance reports can be
transferred directly to a personal computer for storage, trending, or manipulation for
inspection or troubleshooting purposes via the companion software ACES AvTrend.
Overall, the analyzer is designed as a lightweight, portable unit with accuracy and ease of use
as primary design goals.
The subsequent chapters of this manual explain the functions and features of the analyzer,
supporting information, and troubleshooting. The remainder of this chapter presents tips on
effectively using the manual.

1-2 Introduction 1
1.1 - Notes, Cautions, and Warnings
Throughout this manual you will encounter notes, cautions, and warnings. They will be in
BOLD capital print centered above a short paragraph. The information in the paragraph is
defined as follows for each of the three categories.
NOTE
Information considered essential to emphasize for clarity or to ensure the related
procedure is correctl y accomplished.
CAUTION
Information that if not heeded, may result in the damage or faulty operation
of equipment.
WARNING
Information that if not heeded, may result in damage or destruction of equi pment
and/or injury to personnel.
1.2 - Conventions
The following are writing conventions used throughout the manual to describe certain
concepts.
1. This manual indicates keys/keystrokes in square brackets. For example: [ENTER],
[CLR], [5], [F1].
2. The term select, as used in this manual, means to highlight the item on the current
menu by using the arrow keys, then pressing the [ENTER] key.
3. The term Setup, as used in this manual, means the complete set of information entered
into the analyzer or created with AvTrend and electronically stored in the analyzers
memory or in the AvTrend software files for the purpose of completing a balance,
vibration analysis, or track function. This stored information may then be downloaded
from AvTrend to the analyzer, or if stored in the analyzer already, recalled from a
Setup menu presented for the various functions to rapidly configure the analyzer based
on the information contained in the Setup.
4. The term J ob, as used in this manual, means the stored Setup information plus the
collected balance, vibration, track, and/or spectral data, and recorded corrective action
taken (if applicable) to correct an undesirable condition. In other words, it is a record of
the analyzer configuration, acquired data, computed data, and user entered data used in
the course of completing the maintenance task.
Viper 4040 User Manual
1 Introduction 1-3
5. The Banner is the uppermost portion of the screen display, which defines its
relationship to the currently-running analyzer function. The Highlight Bar is the
darkened bar (controlled by the use of the arrow keys, [] and []) used to identify and
select the current menu item. (See figure below.) These screens and their selection
options are referred to as banner screen menus throughout the text of this manual. The
example screen below, for instance, is the Main Menu banner screen.

6. The term field as used in this manual refers to an area that requires input. Fields appear
on various screens as areas delineated by boxes with either pointed ends (<>) or square
ends ([ ]). Data is entered into the field in one of two ways, either by using the keypad to
type data or by using the [] key to toggle or move among the selections that are
preset for the field.
7. The term Tracker, as used in this manual refers to the ACES Systems Model 540, the
Model 540-2 Optical Tracker, or the Model 550 TraX
TM
.


Chapter 2
Analyzer Description
(Revision 3, Oct 2012)
This chapter gives you a brief tour of the analyzer. It describes the various keys and their
functions, the input and output ports, and the standard accessories supplied with the analyzer.
Optional accessories are discussed later in the chapter in Section 2.5.
1
ABC
S Y S T E MS
ACES
2
DEF
3
GHI
4
J KL
5
MNO
6
PQR
7
STU
8
VWX
9
YZ*
1
ABC
Model 4040
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5
CLEAR
HELP
PRINT
B
A
C
K
U
P
E
N
T
E
R
SPACE
+/ -
.
@ % #
ON/
OFF
MAIN
MENU
A B C D 1 2 3 4
COMM

2-2 - Analyzer Description 2 Revision 3, Oct 2012
2.1. Keypad
The analyzer keypad consists of 31 function keys. (See Chapter 3, Using the Viper 4040
Analyzer for keypad operation.)


2.1.1. Located at the top left of the analyzer keypad, the [ON/OFF] key, when pressed once
and released, turns the analyzer power on or off. The analyzer incorporates a power
conservation function. If no activity (keystroke) occurs within ten minutes following
the on keystroke, the analyzer will automatically shut off. If activity does occur
within ten minutes, the analyzer remains on for thirty minutes with no activity before
automatically shutting off. As long as a keystroke is detected at least once every
thirty minutes thereafter, the analyzer remains powered until the [ON/OFF] key is
pressed to turn power off, or the batterys charge expires.


2.1.2. The [MAIN MENU] key is used as a means to quickly return to the main menu (the
first menu that appears when the analyzer is powered on) without the necessity of
multiple steps. When pressed momentarily then released, this key produces the same
action as turning the analyzer power off, then back on. The key may be used to
escape screens where [BACKUP] will consume too much time for the user. Pressing
the [MAIN MENU] key causes all in-progress functions to cease and incomplete
balance or survey data to be lost in whole or in part. Holding the [MAIN MENU] key
down for more than two seconds will turn the analyzer off.

2.1.3. The [BACKUP] key allows the user to back up one step in the current running
procedure to make corrections or immediate changes. The [BACKUP] key is also
used to escape an active screen where no other options for exit are available.
MAIN
MENU
ON/
OFF
ON/
OFF
B
A
C
K
U
P
4040 Viper User Manual
Revision 3, Oct 2012 2 Analyzer Description 2-3

2.1.4. Five function keys ([F1], [F2], [F3], [F4], and [F5]) are located directly below the
analyzers screen. Five small rectangular boxes on the screen directly above the keys
define their use as it corresponds to each screen. The purpose of each key may
change from screen to screen. If any of the screen boxes are blank, the boxs
corresponding key has no function in that screen.

2.1.5. Two contrast keys are located to the left and right of the main body of keys above the
[BACKUP] and [ENTER] keys. The left or decrease key is used to lower the screen
contrast and the right key (shown above) which is visually opposite, to increase the
screen contrast. These keys are fully functional for all phases of operation when the
analyzer is powered. Each key press will produce an incremental increase or decrease
in the screen contrast.

2.1.6. The [PRINT] key is inoperative at this time.

2.1.7. The [BACKLIGHT] key, when pressed once, turns the LCD backlight on or off.
F1 F1
F1
F1 PRINT
F1

2-4 - Analyzer Description 2 Revision 3, Oct 2012
E
N
T
E
R

2.1.8. The [ENTER] key is pressed to accept data or a menu selection and set that selection
into motion. The key is used in survey and balance procedures to proceed to the next
step.

2.1.9. Pressing the [HELP] key allows you to access guidance and/or examples of
information that can be entered into the current field.

2.1.10. The ten alphanumeric keys (0 through 9 / A through ?) are used to input
alphanumeric values into the analyzer. A single press followed by a one-second delay
returns the numeric value (first character) of the key. Two rapid presses followed by
a one second delay returns the second character (first of the three alpha characters) of
the key. Three or four rapid presses followed by a one-second delay, returns the third
or fourth (second or third alpha) characters of the key, respectively. For example, if
you want to type the letter N which is the third character on its corresponding key,
press the key three times rapidly, and then stop for one second. The letter N should
appear on the screen.

2.1.11. The [CLR] key is used to clear input in the current field.

2.1.12. The four arrow keys ([UP], [DOWN], [LEFT], and [RIGHT) are used to select, move
between fields and positions within a field, or highlight menu items on screen. They
are also used in various functions to "toggle" between choices, to increase or decrease
screen values and graphic display sizes, and to change the field value or cursor
position.
HELP
CLR
5
MNO
4040 Viper User Manual
Revision 3, Oct 2012 2 Analyzer Description 2-5

2.1.13. The symbols key ([. @%&]) has multiple functions. The . is used for placement of
a decimal in fractional numbers such as 98.6. The other characters on this key are
used as they would be in normal text such as 54 grams @ 230 degrees or 3%
error, or Left & Right propellers. To type any of the symbols on this key, follow
the same procedure described in the preceding paragraphs that are used for the
alphanumeric keys.


2.1.14. The [SPACE] key is used to enter a separating space in a text line. When entering
numeric values the plus (+) and minus (-) portions of the key are used to change a
positive number to a negative value or a negative number to a positive value.

2.2. - Screen
The full graphics Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) screen is how the analyzer communicates
with the user. In computer terminology, the screen is the graphical user interface. The
screen displays messages, menus, selection lists, graphic illustrations, and survey plots. The
display is 2.9 inches high by 3.85 inches wide. It is an adjustable-contrast, backlit LCD with a
320 x 240 dot-matrix display. Although the screen displays various font sizes dependent on
the current function, a typical screen such as the main menu it is capable of displaying 40
columns and 20 lines of text at one time. The backlight is turned on automatically when the
analyzer is powered up and can be turned off and on using the backlight key. Screen contrast
is controlled by pressing one of the two contrast keys to the left and right sides of the main
body of keys.
NOTE
If the anal yzer is exposed to extremes in temperature, either heat or cold, the LCD may
darken or lighten to a poi nt that it cannot be clearl y read. If this occurs, adj ust the
contrast to compensate for the change. If this fai ls to return the LCD to a viewable
state, remove the unit to an ambient room temperature of 65 85 degrees F. The LCD
should return to its previ ous state in approximatel y 30 minutes.

.
@%#
SPACE
+/ -

2-6 - Analyzer Description 2 Revision 3, Oct 2012
2.3. - Input and Output Ports
C
H
A
N
N
E
L

D
C
H
A
N
N
E
L

C
A
U
X
/
C
O
M
M
C
H
A
N
N
E
L

A
C
H
A
N
N
E
L

B
T
A
C
H

4
T
A
C
H

3
T
A
C
H

2
T
A
C
H

1

There are nine input/output ports on the top end panel of the analyzer, as shown in the figure
above: four CHANNEL (vibration channel) inputs, four TACH (tachometer) inputs, and
one AUX/COMM (auxiliary/communication) input/output port.
2.3.1. CHANNEL Ports
The four vibration CHANNEL inputs will accept acceleration, velocity, or displacement
sensor signals. All vibration CHANNEL inputs are six-pin MS socket connectors. The default
configuration for a two-plane balance on a single engine is CHANNEL A for the front
sensor and CHANNEL B for the rear sensor. For a two engine, dual plane balance, the
default configuration is the same for engine one and engine two defaults to CHANNEL C
for the front sensor and CHANNEL D for the rear sensor. The user within the SETUP
function can change these default values as necessary. Any of the four channels may be
specified in the SETUP function as the input for a single plane balance job. The six-pin
connector enables the analyzer to provide sensor power as required to the sensor being used.
2.3.2. TACH Ports
The four TACH inputs are three-pin female receptacle connectors. They will accept either a
raw tachometer speed reference signal or a Transistor-Transistor Logic (TTL) level speed
signal. Power (+12V) is provided on one pin of the tachometer connector to power optical
speed sensors such as the Phototach or LASETACH. The inputs will also accept a variable
configuration (low tooth, high tooth, offset tooth) monopole input and use the odd tooth as a
once-per-rev for balancing and speed indication purposes. The tach inputs will also accept
tachometer generator and magnetic pickups.
2.3.3. AUX/COMM Port
The AUX/COMM or Auxiliary and Communications port is a 6-pin MS type male
connection used for serial communications between the analyzer and a personal computer or
4040 Viper User Manual
Revision 3, Oct 2012 2 Analyzer Description 2-7
modem. This port is also used to connect an ACES Systems Model 550 TraX
TM
or Model
540 Series Optical Trackers.
Three additional input / output ports are provided on the left side panel of the analyzer. They
are the STROBE, USB and BATT/CHG ports.
2.3.4. STROBE Port
The STROBE port is for connection of a strobe light for manual, visual tracking of rotor or
propeller blades. The analyzer provides a trigger for the strobe through this port. Power (28V
DC) for the strobe must be provided from outside the analyzer, usually from a ships power
source. The strobe and necessary cables are available as optional equipment from ACES
Systems.
2.3.5. USB Port
The USB port is provided for USB applications and future development. The port is a 4-pin
MS connector. Interface cables to standard USB applications are available from ACES
Systems.
2.3.6. BATT CHG Port
The BATT CHG (Battery Charge) port is used in conjunction with the battery charger
supplied with the analyzer. Your analyzer will come with either a 110V or 220V charger
according to your geographical requirements.

WARNING
When using the Nickel Cadmium (NiCd) battery charger, do not l eave the battery
attached (on charge) for a period of more than 14 hours. To do so may result in
damage to the battery and/or anal yzer.
STROBE USB BATT / CHG

2-8 - Analyzer Description 2 Revision 3, Oct 2012
WARNING
The protective cap on the BATT CHG port must remain in pl ace during periods when
the charging unit i s not connected. The two pins of the charging input are active at all
times and may be shorted by unintentional contact with a conductor if the cap is
not in place.
2.4. Additional Standard Equipment
When you purchase a Viper Model 4040 Analyzer, several accessories come with the
analyzer as standard equipment. These items are described in the following paragraphs.
2.4.1. Battery
The primary power source for the analyzer is its internal battery. There are two power supply
configurations available.
2.4.1.1. Nickel Cadmium (NiCd) equipped analyzers
For analyzers S/N 01xxx the original power source is a custom designed 12-volt nickel
cadmium (NiCd) battery rated at 2.3 Amp hours. This means that a fully charged battery will
supply power at the rate of 2.3 Amps for one hour or at the rate of 1 Amp for 2.3 hours.
Typically, a fully charged battery will provide power for 6 hours of continuous analyzer
operation while powering all four available sensors. Power is proportionally increased with
the use of fewer sensors and accessories. A minimum of 8 hours charging time is required for
a full charge. As with any battery, age, usage, and environmental conditions may eventually
necessitate battery replacement. We do not recommend you change the battery yourself
because of the possibility of damage to other components. Contact ACES Systems for details
about return and replacement of the internal battery.
2.4.1.2. Nickel Metal Hydride (NiMH) equipped analyzers
For analyzers S/N 02xxx the internal battery is a custom designed 12-volt nickel metal
hydride (NiMH) battery rated at 2.7 Amp hours. This means that a fully charged battery will
supply power at the rate of 2.7 Amps for one hour or at the rate of 1Amp for 2.7 hours. The
difference in battery technology removes the "memory effect" associated with NiCd batteries.
The analyzers in this serial number group also have integrated "smart-charger" technology.
The battery can be fully cycled (charged and discharged), or partially discharged prior to re-
charge, or any combination of the two methods and the smart-charging circuit combined with
the NiMH chemistry will result in having 100% battery capacity available. This removes the
need for periodic deep discharge/re-charge cycles associated with properly maintaining NiCd
batteries. The NiMH batteries, combined with the proper charger, require just 4 hours for a
full charge, but can be left on charge indefinitely. After a 4-hour (or less) full charge, the
charger switches to "top-off" mode for another 2 hours to ensure that the battery is fully
charged to 100% capacity. At the end of the top-off period, the charger switches to trickle-
charge mode which is simply counter-acting the self-discharge of the battery pack.
For analyzers S/N 03xxx the internal battery is a custom designed 12-volt nickel metal
hydride (NiMH) battery rated at 4.5 Amp hours. This means that a fully charged battery will
4040 Viper User Manual
Revision 3, Oct 2012 2 Analyzer Description 2-9
supply power at the rate of 4.5 Amps for one hour or at the rate of 1Amp for 4.5 hours. The
difference in battery technology removes the "memory effect" associated with NiCd batteries.
The analyzers in this serial number group also have integrated "smart-charger" technology.
The battery can be fully cycled (charged and discharged), or partially discharged prior to re-
charge, or any combination of the two methods and the smart-charging circuit combined with
the NiMH chemistry will result in having 100% battery capacity available. This removes the
need for periodic deep discharge/re-charge cycles associated with properly maintaining NiCd
batteries. The NiMH batteries, combined with the proper charger, require just 4 hours for a
full charge, but can be left on charge indefinitely. After a 4-hour (or less) full charge, the
charger switches to "top-off" mode for another 2 hours to ensure that the battery is fully
charged to 100% capacity. At the end of the top-off period, the charger switches to trickle-
charge mode which is simply counter-acting the self-discharge of the battery pack.
2.4.2. Battery Charger
WARNING
The Viper was not intended to be operated during the charging cycl e. Indivi dual power
requirements must be examined on a case by case basi s. Operation of the Viper with
the charger energized and connected may affect acquired readings.
Each power supply configuration described above has a specific battery charger available to
recharge the internal battery.
2.4.2.1. Nickel Cadmium (NiCd) equipped analyzers
The analyzers internal battery must be charged periodically. This is accomplished using the
battery charger included as standard equipment with your analyzer and shown in the
photograph below. The 12-Volt DC battery charger is used to charge the 4040s nickel
cadmium batteries. The charger has an input of 100-240VAC, 50-60Hz. The output is
18VDC, 670mA. The charger has a two-prong outlet connector and cord that plugs into the
charging unit and into a wall outlet. The cord is a standard, 16-gage electrical appliance cord
and is 6 feet long. The analyzer connector end is an MS, three-pin female, quarter turn lock
type connector, constructed of aluminum alloy and coated with olive drab chromate for
corrosion protection.

2-10 - Analyzer Description 2 Revision 3, Oct 2012



2.4.2.2. Nickel Metal Hydride (NiMH) equipped analyzers
The analyzers internal battery must be charged periodically. This is accomplished using the
battery charger included as standard equipment with your analyzer and shown in the
photograph below. The 12-Volt DC battery charger is used to charge the 4040s Nickel Metal
Hydride batteries. The charger has an input of 100-240VAC, 50-60Hz. The output is
19VDC, 3.1A. Depending on the available voltage, the charger will be configured with either
an 110VAC or 220VAC input cord to allow the charging unit to be plugged into a wall outlet.
The cord is a standard, 16-gage electrical appliance cord and is 6 feet long. The analyzer
connector end is an MS, three-pin female, threaded type connector, constructed of aluminum
alloy and coated with olive drab chromate for corrosion protection.
4040 Viper User Manual
Revision 3, Oct 2012 2 Analyzer Description 2-11

2.4.3. USB Communications Cable
An optional USB Communications cable is available for use with the Model 4040 Viper. The
cable has a standard USB Type A connector at one end and an MS 4-socket connector at the
other. This cable is configured to connect directly to your analyzer at the 4-pin USB port at
one end and to a standard USB Type A connection to a computer on the other end.
Once connected to a personal computer, you can transfer data to and from the analyzer for
use with AvTrend software, which is supplied with the analyzer.
NOTE
The Viper cannot directl y communicate with peripheral s, such as a printer, because
the anal yzer lacks the necessary driver for proper communication.
2.4.4. Carrying Case
The analyzer carrying case is constructed of expanded ABS plastic. The case is durable and
protects its contents from the elements when closed and latched. Clean the case with a mild
soap solution and coat with an ARMOR ALL type protectant to preserve appearance. The
case has a limited lifetime warranty from the original manufacturer. (ARMOR ALL is a registered
trademark of the Clorox Company.) The case is airtight when the purge valve is closed (turned
clockwise to its limits). If the case is transported between the varying pressure altitudes, such

2-12 - Analyzer Description 2 Revision 3, Oct 2012
as those that occur during air travel, the case may be difficult to open due to pressure
differential. If there is a pressure differential between the exterior and interior of the case,
open the purge valve by turning it counterclockwise. This will allow the pressure to equalize
and ease the task of opening the case.
2.4.5. User Manual
This user manual is current when you receive it with the analyzer. To verify that your manual
is current, visit our web site at www.acessystems.com or call ACES Systems at the number
listed at the front of this manual.
2.5. Optional Equipment
Because the Viper Model 4040 Analyzer is so diverse in its capability, many accessories such
as helicopter-specific sensor mounts, blade tracking devices, airframe interface cables, and
numerous vibration sensors are available for use with it.
For various Turbofan, Rotary Wing and Engine applications, contact ACES Systems directly
to inquire about available accessories for your particular needs. Because of the diversity of
this application, many accessories are available that are too numerous to list concisely in this
manual.
Unlike turbofan or rotary wing applications, most propeller balancing applications use
common accessories, so ACES Systems has assembled a propeller balancing kit, described
below, which can be purchased with the Viper 4040 Analyzer.
2.5.1. Propeller Balancing Kit
The propeller balancing kit contains all the necessary items to complete a single-engine,
single-plane propeller balance. If your requirements are multiple-plane balance on a single-
engine or multiple-engines balancing, additional equipment will be required. The items in the
propeller balancing kit are described below.
2.5.1.1. Manual, ACES Systems Guide to Propeller Balancing
The ACES Systems Guide to Propeller Balancing provides FAA approved procedures and
practices for completing a propeller balance job in lieu of airframe or propeller
manufacturers written instructions. The guide includes instructions on installing vibration
sensors, photo tachometers, and reflective tape; information on selecting the proper trim
weights, attaching trial weights, attaching permanent weights; and other hints for simplifying
the balance job. The guide does not provide information on using the analyzer. Review this
users manual for detailed information on the analyzers operation.

4040 Viper User Manual
Revision 3, Oct 2012 2 Analyzer Description 2-13

2.5.1.2. 991D-1 Accelerometer
Although the Model 4040 will support a full range of vibration sensors, the 991D-1
accelerometer (see the illustration above) was selected as the standard for use with the
propeller balance kit due to its rugged construction, accuracy, cost, and range of operation. A
single sensor is supplied with the propeller balancing kit. Additional sensors may be
purchased separately.
The output of the 991D-1 accelerometer is 20 mV per g. The 991D-1 is pre-programmed in
the analyzers sensor setup list. The operating temperature range is -50 to +120 degrees C.
The three-pin connector is a MIL-C -26482, and the mating connector is a Bendix PT06-8-
3S. The mounting stud is 1/4 x 28. Although the sensor is rugged, it can be damaged when
dropped on hard surfaces. Use care when installing the sensor, as you would with other
electronic components.

2.5.1.3. 991D-1 Sensor Cable
The 991D -1 sensor cable, shown above, is a 25-foot (50-foot optional) shielded and Teflon-
coated four-conductor cable. The three-pin MS female connector on one end of the cable
mates to the 991D -1 sensor. The six-pin MS male connector mates to one of the four
(CHANNEL A, B, C, or D) available vibration-input ports on the analyzer. Contact ACES
Systems for other sensor, cable, or adapter options.

2-14 - Analyzer Description 2 Revision 3, Oct 2012
2.5.1.4. Phototach
The Phototach is a short-range optical sensor used in acquiring speed and phase angle data.
Its optimum range is 12 to 18 inches from the target (reflective tape, 3M 7610). It is supplied
with a three-inch by three-inch base. An optional camera type swivel mount is available from
ACES Systems.
Hardware (screw, nut, and washers) for assembly of the supplied mount is contained in the
tackle box which is also supplied with the propeller balance kit. The three-pin MS connector
attaches directly to the Phototach cable. Other speed/phase sensors that can be used with the
analyzer can be purchased separately. They include the ACES Systems LASETACH,
Magnetic Interrupter, or specific-application speed interfaces. Call ACES Systems for further
information.

2.5.1.5. Tachometer Sensor Cable
The tachometer sensor cable connects the analyzer to a Phototach, an ACES Systems
LASETACH, or an interface for optional speed sensors such as a magnetic pickup or pulse
generator. The cable is a three-wire shielded cable, insulated in a bright yellow, petroleum-
resistant jacket. Attached to one end of the cable is a female three-pin bulkhead type socket
connector. On the opposite end of the cable is a male three-pin, quarter-turn-locking MS
connector. The connectors are constructed of aluminum alloy with olive drab chromate
coating for corrosion resistance. The male end connects to the tach input of any ACES
Systems analyzer/balancer or to the female end of another cable of the same type. The
opposite (female, bulkhead) end will accept another 10-320-0126 cable for extension or
connect to an aircraft or sensor interface. There is a 50-ft. and a 25-ft. variant of this cable.
The 25-ft. cable was built generally for propeller balancing applications, which normally
require less distance to the sensors. When using this cable to connect to older versions of the
Phototach, LASETACH, or to any other speed-sensing device, an interface appropriate to
the application may be required. New-design LASETACHs with the part number 10-100-
4040 Viper User Manual
Revision 3, Oct 2012 2 Analyzer Description 2-15
1300 and new-design Phototachs with part number 10-100-1773 have a socket connector that
connects directly to the bulkhead connector end of this cable.

2.5.1.6. Propeller Protractor
The propeller protractor is designed to measure angles in a typical propeller/spinner
assembly. As illustrated in the figure above left, each of the seven circles on the protractor
contains four angles. The angle at each circle location can be determined by reading the
upright number (for example the 30 degree location in the illustration). The circles are located
at 30-degree increments with unmarked 15-degree incremental lines between them. Since the
analyzer can be configured to calculate solution angles relative to the vibration sensor or
reflective tape, both methods are presented here.
The propeller protractor pictured above right is a complete circle. This is divided into five-
degree increments. Every 30 degrees, the angle is identified by text. Every 45 degrees, the
angle is printed in a circular identifier. Place the propeller protractor over the spinner with
the proper direction of rotation side facing you as indicated by the text and an arrow. Since
the analyzer can be configured to calculate solution angles relative to the vibration sensor or
reflective tape, both methods are described in more detail below.
2.5.1.6.1. Using the Propeller Protractor
For correct use of the protractor when measuring relative to the vibration sensor, do the
following:
WARNING
Always ensure mag switches are off prior to any movement of the propeller

2-16 - Analyzer Description 2 Revision 3, Oct 2012
1. Rotate the propeller with the reflective tape until it is directly in front of the Phototach.
2. With the propeller in this position, place the protractor over the spinner with the Rotation
indicator pointing in the direction of rotation (forward looking aft) and one of the 360
degree points aligned with the position of the vibration sensor.
3. Read the upright numbers in the circles, and then interpolate values of the unmarked
incremental lines to locate the desired angle.

For correct use of the protractor when measuring relative to the reflective tape:
1. Place the protractor over the spinner with the Rotation indicator pointing in the direction
of rotation (forward looking aft) and one of the 360 degree points aligned with the
position of the reflective tape.
2. Read the upright numbers in the circles, and then interpolate values of the unmarked
incremental lines to locate the desired angle.
NOTE
If the angle i s out of range for the position of the protractor, rotate the protractor 90
degrees (right or left as appropriate) at a time until you can read the correct angle.

2.5.1.7. - Case Bolt Adapter Set
An eight-piece case bolt adapter set with nut sizes 1/4 to 7/16 NF and NC threads is included
in the propeller balancing kit. The stud portion is a 1/4 x 28 thread. To use the bolts/nuts
during a typical propeller balance, select the adapter from the set to match the case bolts of a
typical opposed engine. Attach the adapter nut end to the exposed case bolt threads then slide
the right angle mount over the stud end and secure with the supplied nut. You will require
two sets of the adapters for dual-engine balancing.
2.5.1.8. Tackle Box
A multi-compartment, high impact plastic, tackle box is included with the propeller balancing
kit. The box has ample storage space for vibration sensors, vibration sensor mounts, and the
case bolt adapter set. It may also serve as storage for AN washers used as balance weights.

4040 Viper User Manual
Revision 3, Oct 2012 2 Analyzer Description 2-17


2.5.1.9. Right-Angle Sensor Mount
The right-angle sensor mount shown in the left portion of the illustration above is made of
anodized aluminum and designed to be mounted directly on the engine case bolt or to the
case bolt adapter, shown in the right portion of the illustration above. The mount has a 1/4 x
28-threaded hole for the vibration sensor and a 5/16 unthreaded hole for the case bolt adapter
stud.
2.5.1.10. Gram Scale
A 150-gram capacity scale is included with the propeller balancing kit for weighing the
washers or trim weights used in balancing. Read the operating instructions enclosed with the
scale carefully prior to its use.
2.5.1.11. Reflective Tape
The reflective tape supplied with the propeller balancing kit is used as a tachometer trigger
for the Phototach to generate a once-per-rev pulse used in speed readings and balancing
calculations. The reflective tape (3M 7610) supplied with the propeller balancing kit was
selected because of its excellent reflective quality and performance under varied operating
conditions. Using a lower quality tape will cause inaccurate tachometer readings or unreliable
phase information. The tape is manufactured by the 3M Company and is the only tape we
recommend for use with the system. Contact ACES Systems for replacement tape. (See
Chapter 15, Equipment and Accessory Setup and Troubleshooting for additional
information for high RPM)


2-18 - Analyzer Description 2 Revision 3, Oct 2012
2.5.1.12. ACES Systems Balance Placard
A placard similar to the one shown above is included in the propeller balancing kit. This or a
similar placard should be attached to the spinner bulkhead upon completion of balancing to
show that the propeller has been dynamically balanced and is indexed to the crankshaft of the
engine.
2.5.2. Serial Communications Cable
An optional serial communications cable for data transfer with a personal computer is
available for use with the analyzer. The cable has both a standard DB25F and a DB9F
connector at one end and an MS 6-pin socket connector at the other. This cable is configured
to connect directly to your analyzer at the 6-pin COMM port at one end and to a standard
DB25M or DB9M pin for connection on the other end.
Once connected to a personal computer, you can transfer data to and from the analyzer for
use with the AvTrend software, which is supplied with the analyzer.

NOTICE: This aircraft's power train rotating
components compose an indexed assembly.
The propeller was dynamically balanced
using:



Chapter 3
Using the Viper
4040 Analyzer
(Revision 2, Aug 2007)
3.1. Entering Data
Data is entered into the analyzer in one of three ways: by typing data using the keypad,
transferring data from a personal computer using AvTrend software, or indirectly by selecting
from preset options. The methods of inputting data are described in the following sections.
3.1.1. - Using the Keys
The analyzer keypad has 25 function keys, 12 of which are multiple-character,
alphanumerically labeled. The multiple-character labeled keys, 1ABC through SPACE +/-
will generate each of the characters on the label and insert it into the current field position of
the analyzer screen.
To generate the first character, on an alphanumeric key, use the arrow keys to place the
cursor in the desired field. Press the key one time, and then pause for two seconds. The first
character of the key should appear in the active field To generate the second character on an
alphanumeric key, press the key twice rapidly, then pause for two seconds. The second
character should appear on the screen. Repeat this process for each letter on the key, with the
number of times you press the key equivalent to the characters position on the key. Note
that some fields are formatted to accept numeric values only. Multiple presses of a key while
the cursor is in such a field will produce multiples of the numeric key value only.

3-2 Using the Model 2020 ProBalancer Analyzer 3 Revision 2, Aug 2007

5
MNO

For example, to type the number 5, press the key once, wait for two seconds. The number
5 should appear on the screen. To type the letter N, press the key three times rapidly, and
then wait for two seconds. The letter N should appear on the screen.
The insert position of the character being typed is indicated on screen by the cursor. The
cursor may be moved to any position in the current field using the left or right arrow keys. If
placed in an existing text string, a key stroke of any alpha numeric character key will insert
the character into the string at the current cursor position and move existing text to the right
one character position.
3.1.2. - Filling in Fields
Data is entered into areas of the screen called fields.
Some fields are represented by boxes with pointed ends (<>). These fields are called toggle
fields because you must use the [ ] keys to toggle, or move, between several preset
selections available in the field.
Some of the fields are represented by boxes that have square-ends ([ ]). The square-end boxes
are text entry boxes. You must enter or edit text in these boxes using the keys as described in
the previous section. If you wish to change text already in place in these fields, place the
cursor in the field you wish to change then press the [CLR] key once for each character in the
field you wish to remove and replace.
Use the [ ] and [] keys to move from field to field.
3.2. - Loading a Setup
A Setup is a group of instructions defined by you, the user, downloaded from the ACES
web site, or acquired from another user and stored in the analyzers memory for rapid
analyzer configuration. This group of instructions combined with certain optional information
and analyzer-calculated data allows the analyzer to be custom-configured for virtually any
engine/airframe combination in a matter of seconds following initial entry of the information.
See the ACES AvTrend User Manual for specific instruction on downloading setups from the
ACES web site.
Steps in the process of loading and using various setups are explained throughout Chapters 4
through 14 of this manual which address each of the main categories of the analyzers
functions. All of the main categories of the analyzers functions are accessed from the
analyzers main menu and directly correspond to selections on this menu.
Viper 4040 User Manual
Revision 2, Aug 2007 3 Using the Model 2020 ProBalancer Analyzer 3-3
3.3. - Main Menu
The main menu is the first menu to be displayed when the analyzer is turned on. (See the
following figure.) From this menu you may access all functions of the analyzer by using the
available menu choices. Chapters 4 thorough 19 of this manual describe each main menu item
selection, the function of each item, and the general steps necessary to perform each function.
The Main Menu banner section has the added ability to display the current state of the
database. This is an approximate representation of how much of the analyzers memory is
currently occupied. Your analyzer may not show all items displayed in the screen below if
you do not have a license number for certain functions. Consult your ACES sales
representative for optional Viper functions and attaining a license number for them.



Chapter 4
Propeller Balance
(Revision 2, Oct 2012)
Propeller Balance is an analyzer function that is accessed from the analyzers Main Menu
banner screen as shown in the illustration below. Selecting this function from the main menu
brings up the Propeller Balance banner screen menu (also shown below). Each of the
listings on this banner screen menu is an option within the function. Descriptions of each of
these options follow, along with the information required to complete the menu screens
within the options, and the steps necessary to perform propeller balance function.


4-2 Propeller Balance 4

4.1. - Start Job
Selecting Start J ob from the Propeller Balance banner screen allows you to begin a new
propeller balance job. When you select this option, one of three screens will appear
depending on whether you are: 1) Starting a new job with no setups previously defined in the
analyzers memory; 2) Starting a new job with previously defined setups available in the
analyzers memory; or 3) Resuming an incomplete job being held in the analyzers memory.
If you are starting a new job with no setups previously defined in the analyzers memory, the
screen will automatically display the Prop Balance Setup banner screen shown below. See
section 4.1.1. for step-by-step instructions on completing the Prop Balance Setup.

If you are starting a new job with previously defined setups available in the analyzers
memory, the screen will automatically display the Select Setup List banner screen similar to
Viper 4040 User Manual
4 Propeller Balance 4-3
the one shown below. The actual setup names will be those, which you have entered into your
analyzer.

If you are resuming an incomplete job being held in the analyzers memory, the opportunity
to do so is presented immediately following the Start J ob selection. The screen displays the
message as shown below. If you press the [F1] Yes key, the analyzer will return you to the
last logical in-progress step of the job. If you press the [F5] No key, the analyzer will
proceed as described in the two examples above, depending on your circumstances.

4.1.1. - Prop Balance Setup
The Prop Balance Setup banner screen allows you to define and store a propeller balance
Setup. The Prop Balance Setup banner screen displays fill-in and selection type fields. The
fill-in fields have squared off ends ([ ]). These fields are filled in using inputs from the
analyzer keypad. The selection fields have pointed ends (< >). These fields have two or more
preset values that are selected by using the [] and [] keys. Navigate between the fields on

4-4 Propeller Balance 4
this screen using the [] and [] keys. (Refer to Chapter 3, Using the Model 4040 Viper
Analyzer if you are unfamiliar with using the keypad or inputting data.)
Complete the Prop Balance Setup screen per the following example.
4.1.1.1. Propeller Balance Setup Screen
To complete the Prop Balance Setup banner screen (as shown below), do the following:

4.1.1.1.1. In the Name field, enter a name for this setup using the keypad. (Refer to
Chapter 3, Using the Model 4040 Viper Analyzer if you are unfamiliar with
using the keypad.)

The name you choose will aid you in differentiating this setup from other stored
setups should you choose to review it at a later time. The name should be one of
your choosing which you will be easily recognized and associated with this setup
such as Cessna 150, King Air, or T-6 TEXAN II.
4.1.1.1.2. Using the [] key, move down to the Eng HP field. Enter the rated horsepower
of the engine using the keypad. The valid range of values for this field is 0 to
5000.
4.1.1.1.3. Using the [] key, move to the Max Baln.Wts field. Enter the maximum total
trim balance weight (in grams) allowed for this installation. If the manufacturer
does not specify a maximum weight, refer to the ACES Systems Guide to
Propeller Balancing. The valid range of values for this field is 1 to 9999.
4.1.1.1.4. Move to the Balance RPM field using the [] key. Using the keypad, enter the
actual propeller RPM at which you intend to balance. If no manufacturer
recommendation is available, refer to the ACES Systems Guide to Propeller
Balancing included with the Propeller Balance option. A low cruise RPM is
usually best. The valid range of values for this field is 50 to 32767.
Viper 4040 User Manual
4 Propeller Balance 4-5
4.1.1.1.5. Using the [] key, move to the Relative to field. Select Tape or Sensor
using the [] key. If using predetermined weight locations, select Tape. Decide
if you wish to measure weight placement phase angles relative to the reflective
tape or the vibration sensor as an index point.
4.1.1.1.6. Move to the Holes: filed and select either Yes or No using the [] key. Yes
indicates that the propeller assembly has predetermined locations, or holes where
trim balance weights can be added. If you select Yes a page for defining the
location of each hole will be provided. You may also download setups with these
predefined locations from the ACES Systems web site and load the setups into
your analyzer. The No answer indicates that no predetermined locations are
available and that you will be drilling holes for the permanent mounting of the
final trim balance weights.
4.1.1.1.7. Move to the Vib: field and use the [] key to choose the vibration engineering
units for this balance job. The choices are IPS (inches per second velocity),
mm/sec (millimeters per second velocity), cm/sec (centimeters per second
velocity), Mils (1000ths of an inch displacement), Microns, and Gs (equivalent
gravities).
4.1.1.1.8. The field to the immediate right of the Vib: filed is unmarked. It is a select field
also and is the modifiers to be used with the units of vibration (Vib:). The
selections are Peak, Pk-Pk (Peak-to-Peak, may also be called double amplitude),
Avg. (Average), and RMS (Route Mean Square).
4.1.1.1.9. Move to the FSR field and use the [] key to select the Full Scale Range for
the vibration amplitude you reasonable expect to encounter on this job. For a
propeller balance conducted using IPS, a normal selection would be 1. You should
make your selection to accommodate the highest vibration as an overload of the
analyzer caused by higher values than that selected might delay or lengthen the
job.
4.1.1.1.10. Move down to the Rotation (#1) field using the [] key. Using the [] key,
Select CW (Clockwise) or CCW (Counter-Clockwise) for the rotation of the
propeller as viewed standing Forward of the propeller Looking Aft toward the tail
of the airplane (FLA).
4.1.1.1.11. Using the [] key, move to the Tach Type field. Using the [] key, select the
type of tachometer you are using.

Tach Type selections for this field include:

Optical - Includes the PhotoTach and LaseTach. This is the only selection that
will provide power to the Tach device.

Mag (Lo) - A magnetic interrupter with an output of 120mV or greater. This
selection is used for clean Tach signals with a low noise floor.

Mag (Hi) - A magnetic interrupter with an output of greater than 3 volts and less
than 5 volts. This selection provides isolation from erratic signals containing
electrical noise above 120 mV but less than 3 volts.

4-6 Propeller Balance 4

Monopole - A monopole type pickup with an output of 120mV or greater.

Tach Gen - A one to three pole tachometer generator with an output of 390mV
or more. (This type of input is normally used for synchronous vibration surveys
and not for a once per rev signal used to calculate phase angles in balancing.)
4.1.1.1.12. Using the [] key, move to the Tach Chan field. Using the [] key, select
TACH 1, TACH 2, TACH 3, or TACH 4 according to the analyzers tach input
channel(s) you intend to use. The default for single sensor input is TACH 1.
4.1.1.1.13. Using the [] key, move to the Tach Pos (FLA) field. Using the [] key, select
the tach position. The tach position is determined by standing Forward of the
propeller Looking Aft (FLA) toward the tail of the aircraft. From this viewpoint,
determine the approximate clock position (1:00 to 12:00) of the tachometer
pickup.
CAUTION
Sensors connected to Channel A and Channel B or Channel C and Channel D must be
of the same type. Using different sensors during the same job will cause erroneous
readings and problems achieving good balance results.
4.1.1.1.14. Move down to the Sens Type field using the [] key. Select the sensor type
from the available options using the [] key. If your sensor type is not listed, see
the section of this manual entitled Sensor Setup.
4.1.1.1.15. Move to the next field, Sens Chan using the [] key. Select sensor channel A,
B, C, or D according to which of the analyzers input channels you intend to use.
The default for single-sensor input is Channel A. Use the [] key to make the
selection. If you are conducting a two plane balance, the default for the second
sensor is Channel B.
4.1.1.1.16. Using the [] key, move to the Sens Pos (FLA) field. Using the [] key, select
the vibration sensor position. The sensor position is determined by standing
Forward of the propeller Looking Aft (FLA) toward the tail of the aircraft. From
this viewpoint, determine the approximate clock position (1:00 to 12:00) of the
vibration sensor.
4.1.1.2. - Edit ICF
The Edit ICF (which corresponds to the [F1] key) selection appears at the bottom left of the
Prop Balance Setup banner screen. Press the [F1] key if you wish to define the Influence
Coefficients for this setup. The following Edit ICF banner screen is displayed.
Viper 4040 User Manual
4 Propeller Balance 4-7

4.1.1.2.1. If you do not have ICF information for the balance setup, press the [BACKUP]
key. This sets the ICF at the default for the known conditions. The ICF default
value is added automatically when the Setup is created. The user may use this key
at any time to reset the ICF to default. If an ICF has been calculated by the
analyzer and stored from previous runs, the Samples field displays the number
of samples included in the calculation. (The Samples field is a display-only field
and cannot be edited by the user.) When satisfied with the displayed ICF, press
[ENTER] to return to the Prop Balance Setup banner screen.
4.1.1.3. - Sensor Setup
Pressing the [F5] Sensor key from the Prop Balance Setup banner screen displays the
Sensor Setup banner screen shown below. The information on this screen should
correspond to the sensor you selected for this setup in step 4.1.1.1.14 above.


4-8 Propeller Balance 4
4.1.1.3.1. This is an information-only screen for use in verifying the parameters of the
vibration sensor you have chosen. You may not edit or otherwise enter
information on this screen. If this sensor does not possess the specifications you
require for this setup, you may enter a new sensor in the Sensor Setup screen, or
choose another sensor from the existing list. Press [BACKUP] or [ENTER] to exit
this screen and return to the Prop Balance Setup banner screen. When all fields
are completed to your satisfaction, press the [ENTER] key to accept the inputs and
continue to the Prop Hole Layout Setup.
4.1.1.4. Prop Hole Layout Setup


4.1.1.4.1. If Yes was selected under the Holes: entry in step 4.1.1.1.6 the Prop Hole
Layout Setup banner screen is the next screen displayed. The Name field is
automatically filled in from the name you entered in the previous Prop Balance
Setup screen. Complete the fields on the screen by doing the following:
Viper 4040 User Manual
4 Propeller Balance 4-9
4.1.1.4.2. Use the [] key to move to the No. of Holes field. Enter the number of holes
that correspond to the total number of trim weight mounting locations. The valid
range of values for this field is 1 to 36.
4.1.1.4.3. Move to the Space field using the [] key and then use the [] key to select
Even or Uneven from the available selections. Even indicates that all trim
weight mounting locations are evenly spaced. The analyzer will automatically
calculate the number of degrees between holes in this case. If you select
Uneven, and then use the [] key to move away from the field, several fields
(Ang and No.) appear at the bottom of the screen. You will complete these
fields later in the process at step 4.1.1.4.6.
4.1.1.4.4. Use the [] key to move to the next field, Dir (FLA). Complete this field by
using the [] key, select CW for clockwise or CCW for counter-clockwise to
indicate the direction of increasing hole numbers as viewed from forward looking
aft.
4.1.1.4.5. Move to the Max H. Wt field using the [] key. Using the keypad, enter the
maximum allowable weight (in grams) for any single hole. Use the [] key to
move to the next field.
4.1.1.4.6. Complete the next fields differently depending on data you input in step 4.1.1.4.3
above.

If you selected Even in step 4.1.1.4.3 - The Enter the Angle of No. 1 Hole
field is displayed. Use the keypad to enter the angle of hole number 1 as viewed
from the front of the engine looking aft. To determine this angle, do the
following. With mag switches OFF, rotate the propeller to align the tachometer
pickup and its triggering device (magnetic interrupter, reflective tape, etc.). With
the propeller in this position, use the 12:00 position as the 0 or 360 degrees
(index point) and measure opposite the direction of rotation to the angle of hole
number 1. For example, if the #1 hole is at the 3:00 position (simply as viewed on
the face of a clock from in front of the engine, disregarding propeller direction of
rotation) and the engine rotates counterclockwise, the angle would be 90 degrees.
If the #1 hole is at the 3:00 position and the engine rotates clockwise it would be
270 degrees. The measurement to hole #1 must always be measured opposite the
direction of rotation.

If you selected Uneven in step 4.1.1.4.3 Multiple angle/hole number fields are
displayed. Each hole angle must be defined individually. Using the keypad,
complete each field by entering a hole number (No.) and its corresponding
angular (Ang) location as measured opposite the direction of propeller rotation.
Use the [] and [] keys to move between these fields. To determine these
values, do the following. With mag switches OFF, rotate the propeller to align the
tachometer pickup and its triggering device (magnetic interrupter, reflective tape,
etc.). With the propeller in this position, use the 12:00 position as the 0 or 360
degrees (index point) and measure opposite the direction of rotation to the angle
of each hole number and record that angle adjacent to the hole number. (See the
example Prop Hole Layout Setup screen shown at the beginning of the section.)
For example, if the number 1 hole is near the 6:00 position, the angle may be

4-10 Propeller Balance 4
measured as 174 degrees. On the screen, use the keypad to enter the angle of hole
number 1 as 174. Then, using the [] key to move to the adjacent field (No.),
input the number 1. Next, measure to hole number 2. If hole number two is
measured as 156 degrees, enter that value and 2 in the adjacent field. Continue
this process until all angles for all holes are defined. The measurement must
always be opposite the direction of rotation of the propeller.
4.1.1.4.7. When all fields are complete, press [ENTER] to accept the settings and continue.

The analyzer will display the message, Store this new setup? If you choose to
store this new setup in the analyzers memory, press the [F1] key for Yes,
otherwise press [F2] for No.
4.1.2. Job Identification

4.1.2.1. At this point in the Propeller Balance process, you should have completed the
following steps: selected Propeller Balance from the Main Menu; selected Start
J ob; and completed the Prop Balance Setup screen which included editing ICF
and sensor setup, or you selected a setup from a list of predefined setups. Depending
on whether or not you made use of predetermined hole locations, you may have also
defined values for a number of trim weight mounting holes. If these steps have been
completed, then the J ob Identification banner screen will be displayed. J ob
information is optional but will appear on the job printout if entered and will assist
you in identifying this job when stored in memory. Complete the information fields
using the keypad. Press [ENTER] to continue.
NOTE
If a name is not entered on the Job Identification screen, the job will be commonly
labeled Unnamed in the resume and manage job lists. This will complicate finding a
specific job, as multiple j obs are stored. We recommended you enter a name.
Viper 4040 User Manual
4 Propeller Balance 4-11
4.1.3. Engine Information

4.1.3.1. The Engine Information banner screen is displayed. This information is optional
but will appear on the job printout if entered and will assist you in identifying this job
when stored in memory. Complete the information fields using the keypad. When
finished, press [ENTER] to continue.
4.1.4. Connect Sensors


4-12 Propeller Balance 4
4.1.4.1. The Connect Sensors banner screen will be displayed as shown above. Messages
that appear on this screen prompt you to perform the physical installation and
connection of the tach and vibration sensors to the input ports you specified in the
setup.
4.1.4.2. - Tachometer Setup
To install the tachometer, do the following:
1. Install the Phototach at the position specified in the setup. The Phototach should be not
less than 4 inches but no greater than 18 inches from the back surface of the target blade.
Use speed tape or duct tape to secure the 3x3 base mount to the cowling surface. An
angle of approximately 5 degrees from perpendicular to the target blade will produce the
best results.
2. Connect the tachometer cable to the Phototach connector. Route the cable away from hot
areas and electrical equipment back to the cockpit and attach to the tach channel specified
in the setup you are using. Secure the cable along its route with duct tape or tie wraps.
3. Near the bottom of the analyzer screen, ensure that the message, Tach Power is Off is
displayed and that the Block directly below this statement and corresponding to the [F1]
key is labeled Tach Pwr. Press the [F1] key once to change the statement at the bottom
of the screen to read Tach Power is On. This will energize the tach for proper tape
alignment.
WARNING
Insure mag switches are off prior to any movement of the propeller.
4. Rotate the propeller to visually align the Phototach with a point on the backside of the
target blade where you intend to place the reflective tape. Clean this area thoroughly to
insure adhesion of the tape.
5. Cut a strip of reflective tape (3M Tape, Model 7610 is recommended) approximately 1.5
to 2 inches long. With the tape backing still in place, hold the tape in position on the
propeller blade and move the propeller blade back and forth in front of the Phototach
beam.
NOTE
To insure quality reflective action back to the Phototach, use 3M 7610
reflective tape. Use of other reflective tape or devices may result in poor
signals back to the Phototach.
NOTE
If balancing l arge-di ameter or high-speed propellers, refer to Chapter 19,
Equipment and Accessory Setup and Troubleshooting for information on
reflective tape width requirements for these applications.
6. With an inspection mirror, watch the red LED gate indicator light on the aft end of the
Phototach illuminate and extinguish as the tape crosses the beam. This indicates the
position of the tape is correct.
Viper 4040 User Manual
4 Propeller Balance 4-13
7. Remove the tape backing and attach the reflective tape to the propeller at that location.
Be sure to smooth out any wrinkles or bubbles in the tape. Ensure the edges are smoothed
and firmly attached.
8. Connect the vibration sensor cable to the sensor connector. Route the cable away from
hot areas and electrical equipment back to the cockpit and attach to the sensor channel
specified in the setup you are using. Secure the cable along its route with duct tape or tie
wraps.
NOTE
Al l trim balance weights installed during previous dynamic balance procedures
should be removed before proceeding beyond this point. Refer to the ACES
Systems Guide to Propel ler Balancing (included with your Model 4040) for a full
list of FAA-approved inspection requi rements.
4.1.5. Start Aircraft
When you have completed the physical equipment setup tasks, press [ENTER] on the
analyzer to continue with the propeller balance job.

The analyzer will then display the Start Aircraft banner screen (shown above). Two
information lines are shown on the screen. The first: Remove all trim weights and the
second: Perform a FOD check and start engine(s) per flight manual.
Removing previously installed trim balance weights is necessary to prevent stack ups, or
attempts to counterbalance installed weights. Follow the instructions in the ACES Systems
Guide to Propeller Balancing included with your analyzer for inspections prior to balancing.
The document is FAA approved and provides guidelines for the selection and installation of
balance weights. When balance weights are removed and inspections are complete, Press
[ENTER] to start prop balance.
The [F2] Swap J ob key allows you to return to the Main Menu without rebooting the
analyzer. You can then switch between multiple propeller balance jobs to perform balances
on several propellers during a single maintenance run.

4-14 Propeller Balance 4
4.1.6. - Acquiring Data
After starting the aircraft, the Set Engine Speed banner screen is displayed. At the top left
of the screen, the run number is displayed. Directly below the run number, is the message,
Set eng #x RPM to: xxxx (where xxxx is the balance speed entered in the setup being used.
This is your target RPM for balancing. The next line, Current RPM: xxxx. indicates the
RPM the propeller is turning currently. Attempt to match the two as closely as possible with
throttle/prop lever adjustments. The next line, Difference: xx gives the current difference
between the Target and the Current RPM. When the target speed and current speed are
matched as closely as possible, press [ENTER] to continue.
The screen changes to display the Engine: x Run: x banner screen. (See the figure below.)

The converging vibration indicator shows the average amplitude. (See Chapter 20, Reading
Spectrum and Scales, for information on how to read the data contained on this screen.) The
sensor location (Front) is indicated at the top of the text, right side of the screen. The current
and average frequency, amplitude, and phase are also displayed along with the percentage of
error (Error) in the averaging. When the error is at its lowest point and no longer decreasing,
press [ENTER] to stop the data collection process. If you wish to reset the averaging and take
new data, press the [F1] Reset key.
4.1.7. Review Job
When you are finished acquiring data, the Review J ob banner screen (shown below) is
displayed next. The amplitude and phase (Mag/DEG.) are displayed for each sensor input
channel. Data is displayed for only the input channels that were used for the job; others are
left blank.
Viper 4040 User Manual
4 Propeller Balance 4-15

If you are satisfied with the results of the run and are ready for a solution, press [ENTER] to
accept the data and continue.
If you want to retake data for this run, press the [F1] Retake #1 key. This option returns
you to the Set Engine Speed banner screen (see section 4.1.6 above).
An information screen will appear prompting you to Shut down the engine(s) per manual
instructions. If you are performing a balance on more than one propeller, use the [F2]
Swap J ob key to return to the Main Menu and switch jobs. Press the [F5] Continue key
to progress to the Review J ob screen as shown in section 4.1.7.

4.1.8. - Balance Solution
The Balance Solution banner screen shown below is displayed. The screen is identified at
the top left as being Run: 1. Vibration amplitude and phase angle are displayed for each

4-16 Propeller Balance 4
channel being used (Channel A only in the example screen shown) and a solution for the first
run.
In this example screen shown below, the Solution is 45.1 GMS @ 276 which means to
place 45.1 grams (g) of weight at 276 degrees from the index point. (see Chapter 2, Analyzer
Description on how to use the Propeller Protractor to locate the phase angle.)

In the lower portion of the screen you see an information line stating Remove previous trim
weights. Since all previously installed trim weights were removed prior to the start of the
first run; this is only a reminder for Run 1. This same information line in following runs
means to remove the trim weights installed on the previous run. In other words, the balance
solution and resulting weight installed here after Run 1 may change in Run 2. The weights
installed after Run 1 would be removed and new weights added at another location to refine
the balance solution.
NOTE
In subsequent runs, al l installed weights from each previous run must be removed.
The remove weight message will be repeated for every run and solution. Each new
solution dictates that the previousl y appli ed soluti on (installed weight) be totall y
replaced. In some cases this may mean removing and reappl ying weight at the same
or near the same location. Failure to remove previousl y installed weight prior to
appl ying the new solution weight will result in failure of the propell er balance function.
The next line of text states Enter Actual Weight Installed. In the weight and angle fields
directly below this line, enter the exact amount of weight and the angle, as near as possible,
where it was installed. If you are unable to install the exact amount of weight in the
recommended solution, install a weight as near the suggested solution weight as possible. The
important point is whatever the actual amount of weight is, enter it here. If the solution
exceeds the single location limits of the propeller or spinner assembly (refer to ACES
Systems Guide to Propeller Balancing included with your analyzer) you may split the weight
across two locations. If you do not wish to split the weights, press [ENTER] to continue and
then move to the end of this section, to continue with the instructions at the Start Aircraft
screen.
Viper 4040 User Manual
4 Propeller Balance 4-17
4.1.8.1. Set Split Weights
To use the split weight option, press the [F1] Split Weight key from the Balance Solution
banner screen. The Set Split Weights banner screen below is displayed.
The single location solution (in this case 46.1 g @ 16 degrees) is displayed at the top of the
screen. The next line states Enter New Locations. Use the keypad to complete the next two
fields, Angle 1 and Angle 2. Locate the two available weight installation locations (one
on each side of the 16-degree location) and enter them in the two fields. Use the [] key to
move between the fields. Press [ENTER] to continue.
4.1.8.2. - Record Split Weights
The screen displays the Record Split weights banner screen like the one shown below.

The New Solution is given for the two new angles you specified as available for weight
application. Match the new weight solution as near as possible to the recommended solution

4-18 Propeller Balance 4
and install it at the new angles. Weigh the test weights carefully and enter the exact amount
of weight in the Actual Weight Installed fields.
If you discover a problem with the split weight locations you specified, press the [F1] Re-
split and [BACKUP] key and enter the two new angles. When the Actual Weight Installed
fields are completed, press [ENTER] to continue.
The screen will return to the Balance Solution banner screen with the combined split-
weight solution being displayed for the user. Press [ENTER] to continue.
The screen will display the Start Aircraft banner screen shown below.
The Start Aircraft banner screen indicates the upcoming run number and directs you to
Perform FOD check and start engine(s) per flight manual. Press [ENTER] to start prop
balance. Then repeat the procedures described above starting with item, 4.1.5 until the level
of vibration is at or better than an acceptable level. See the ACES Systems Guide to Propeller
Balancing for details of vibration levels and weight installation procedures.
NOTE
If the engine/propeller assembl y is mechanicall y sound, a normal balance j ob should
take no more than three runs to complete. The anal yzer will onl y al low you to complete
6 runs in attempts to bal ance. If the balance job is not completed by the sixth run you
should suspect possible problems with your technique or mechanical faults with the
engine and/or propell er assembl y. Mechanical faul ts may also be indicated by drasti c
changes in suggested weight or angle from one sol ution to the next.
Viper 4040 User Manual
4 Propeller Balance 4-19
4.2. - Resume Job

Selecting Resume J ob from the Propeller Balance banner screen menu allows you to
select a job to resume. Only jobs that are left unfinished will appear in the list. Using the []
key, highlight the job you wish to complete from the list of incomplete jobs, and press
[ENTER]. You will be taken to the last step completed in the job process.
NOTE
If you did not enter information in the optional Job Identification fields when starting
a job, that job will be stored by the name, Unnamed . If several Unnamed Jobs are
listed, you may wish to review the data for each in order to ensure you are resuming
the job you intended. See section 4.3.1 for specific guidelines on the Review function.
4.3. - Manage Jobs


4-20 Propeller Balance 4
Selecting Manage J obs from the Propeller Balance banner screen menu presents several
sub-menu choices to choose from. These choices allow you to manage previously
completed job data you have stored in the analyzer.
4.3.1. - Review
Selecting the Review option presents a list of stored jobs on the J ob List banner screen.
You can select one job for on-screen viewing. When viewing is complete, press the
[BACKUP] key to exit the screen. The analyzer will then return you to the "Manage J obs"
menu screen to select another function.
4.3.2. - Delete
The Delete option presents a list of stored jobs on the J ob List banner screen. From the
list, you may select one job for deletion. After making your selection, the Delete J ob
banner screen will appear, asking you to verify your intent to delete the selected job by
pressing the [F1] key for Yes or the [F5] key for No. You may wish to download the job
for reference or permanent record prior to deleting. Once deleted, the job cannot be retrieved
from the analyzer.
4.3.3. - Delete All
The Delete All option will delete all currently stored jobs. After selecting this option, the
Delete All J obs banner screen will appear, asking you to verify your intent to delete all the
jobs by pressing the [F1] key for Yes or the [F5] key for No. You may wish to download
the jobs for reference or permanent record prior to deleting. Once deleted, the jobs cannot be
retrieved from the analyzer.
Viper 4040 User Manual
4 Propeller Balance 4-21
4.4. - Manage Setups

Selecting Manage Setups from the Propeller Balance banner screen menu presents
several sub-menu choices to choose from. These choices allow you to manage setups you
have stored previously in the analyzer.
4.4.1. - Edit
Selecting the Edit function displays the Setup List screen. Select the setup you wish to
edit. The screen will display the Propeller Balance Setup screen. Edit the setup as necessary
and press [ENTER] to store and exit the edited setup screen. Refer to section 4.1.1 for
detailed instructions on how to complete/edit the fields in the Propeller Balance Setup
screen.
4.4.2. New
Selecting New will allow you to build a new propeller setup. After selecting New, the
screen will display the fields necessary for building the new setup. Refer to section 4.1.1.
4.4.3. - Delete
The Delete option presents you with a list of stored setups. From the list, you may select
one setup for deletion. If you wish to delete all stored setups, you must delete them
individually. After making your selection, you will be asked to verify your intent to delete the
selected job by pressing the [F1] key for Yes, or the [F5] key for No. We highly
recommend you download the setup for reference or permanent record prior to deleting them.
Once deleted, the setups cannot be retrieved from the analyzer.


Chapter 5
Main Rotor Track & Balance
(Revision 3, Oct 2012)
This section is intended to familiarize you with the various electronic chart forms and setup
screens used with the Viper 4040. First by looking at each of the chart forms found in both
the main and tail rotor sections, then by using these forms to create an actual setup.
5.1. Analyzer Chart Forms
J ust as in the case with polar balance charts, there are two types of analyzer chart forms
used with the 4040 Viper, and one tracking influence setup screen. The chart forms are also
categorized as either Regular or Irregular. The selection of setup type is made within the
chart form itself by using either the [] or [] keys to toggle between Regular and
Irregular in the Chart Type field, then pressing the [] key to move to the next field. The
remaining fields in the screen will automatically change if necessary. The tracking influence
setup screen is separate from the chart forms and allows entry of the amount of adjustment
required to move the blade a specified distance. The paragraphs below describe these forms
in detail.
5.1.1. Regular Chart Forms
A Regular chart is one that has all weight positions spaced equally around the chart, all
adjustments are of the same type, and all adjustments carry the same ICF. The next
paragraphs detail the process for defining both a main rotor and tail rotor Regular chart
setup. There are slight differences between the two functions that will be noted in the text.


5-2 Main Rotor Track & Balance 5 Revision 3, Oct 2012
5.1.1.1. Regular Main Rotor Chart
Setup
The main rotor balance chart shown to
the right depicts three weight positions,
Red, Yellow, and Blue. The move line
for each position has been indicated
with an arrow, the type of adjustment
given below the chart is Plates. The
ICF is approximately 8 plates per 1.0
IPS. This chart meets all criteria to
place it in the Regular chart type
category; all weight positions have the
same ICF and type of adjustment, and
all move lines are equally spaced
around the chart. Using this chart,
follow the example below to properly
define a Regular main rotor chart
setup in the analyzer.


Name: The name of the chart will be automatically inserted from the Main Rotor Condition
Setup screen and is not editable.
Chart Type: Using the [] or [] key, select the chart type. For this example, the chart type
is Regular.
Sweep Only: This field is used when defining a chart that utilizes blade sweep only as a
means of adjustment. If the chart you are defining uses only sweep moves, select YES
using either the [] or [] keys. Otherwise, leave this field set to NO.
No Adjustment Bld/Pos.: This field is used to designate a main rotor blade as a no
adjustment blade. This feature is used when the OEM suggests that no adjustments be
Viper 4040 User Manual
Revision 3, Oct 2012 5 Main Rotor Track & Balance 5-3
applied to a particular blade during a track and balance job. An optimized solution is
provided by the analyzer that requires no adjustments to the designated No Adjustment
Blade.
Max ICF Update: This field is used to limit the learning ability for move-line length. The
example above uses 100%. With 100% selected any move that exceeds 100% of the
expected length for a given adjustment will be ignored by the analyzer for ICF (Influence
Coefficient) updates. Using the keypad, enter the desired parameter to be placed in the setup.
R() (Rotation in Degrees): This field is used to limit the learning ability for move-line
direction. The example uses 45 degrees. With 45 degrees selected, any move line that falls
more than 45 degrees outside of the expected vector for a given adjustment will be ignored by
the analyzer and will not update the ICF. Using the keypad, enter the desired parameter to be
placed in the setup.
Adj. Unit: Using the keypad, enter a three-letter designator for the type of adjustment utilized
by the chart. In this case, PLT has been entered to represent plates. The designator used in
this screen will also be used when the analyzer recommends a solution.
Adj. / IPS: Using the keypad, enter the influence from the chart. This is the amount of
adjustment required to reduce a one IPS (Inch-Per-Second) vibration. The ICF for this
example is approximately 8 plates per 1.0 IPS, therefore, 8 has been entered in to the Adj /
IPS field.
Bld/Pos and MoveLine: The lower portion of the screen provides fields for entry of the blade
position names and Move Line clock angles. Because this is a Regular chart setup, you
need only enter the move lines for the first two blade positions; the analyzer will determine
the remaining angles.
Starting with any of the blade positions listed on the chart; enter a name of up to six
characters in the first field as shown.
Press the [] key and move one field to the right, now enter the angle (in hours) of the
move line for this position. If the move line contains an angle in minutes, press the []
key and move to the next field to enter the minutes.
Repeat the name and move line process for the second blade position, then enter the
remaining blade position names and this chart is complete.
NOTE
Blade position names must be entered sequentiall y in either clockwise or counter
clockwise order. It does not matter what direction i s chosen.
5.1.2. Irregular Chart Forms
Any polar chart that does not fit the Regular category must use the Irregular chart form.
The next paragraphs detail the setup for both main rotor and tail rotor Irregular chart
setups.

5-4 Main Rotor Track & Balance 5 Revision 3, Oct 2012
5.1.2.1. Irregular Main Rotor Chart Setup
The main rotor balance chart shown to the right
presents two different types of adjustments: the
addition of weight to target or blank, and
sweeping either the target or blank blade aft.
The ICF is different for each set of adjustments,
220 grams of weight per 1.0 IPS and 2 points of
aft sweep per 1.0 IPS. The move lines for these
adjustments are equally spaced, however since
the ICF and adjustment types are different, this
chart must use the Irregular chart form. Using
this chart, follow the examples below to
properly define an Irregular main rotor chart
setup in the analyzer.



Name: The name of the chart will be automatically inserted from the Main Rotor Condition
Setup screen and is not editable.
Chart Type: Press either the [] or [] keys to select the chart type. For this example, select
Irregular.
Sweep Only: This field is used when defining a chart that incorporates sweeping of the blades
as the only means of adjustment. If the chart you are defining uses only sweep moves, select
YES using either the [] or [] keys. Otherwise, leave this field set to NO.
No Adjustment Bld/Pos.: This field is used to select one of the main rotor blades where the
OEM suggests that no adjustments be used. An optimized solution is provided by the
analyzer that requires no adjustments to the designated No Adjustment Blade.
Viper 4040 User Manual
Revision 3, Oct 2012 5 Main Rotor Track & Balance 5-5
Max ICF Update: This field is used to restrict the learning criteria for move-line length. The
example uses 100%. With 100% selected, any move line over 100% of the expected length
for a given adjustment, and the analyzer will not update the ICF. Using the keypad, enter the
desired parameter to be placed in the setup.
R() (Rotation): This field is used to restrict the learning criteria for move line direction. The
example uses 45 degrees. With 45 degrees selected, any move line that falls more than 45
degrees outside of the expected vector for a given adjustment, and the analyzer will not
update the ICF. Using the keypad, enter the desired parameter to be placed in the setup.
BLD/Pos, UNIT, ADJ, IPS, and MoveLn:
Starting with any of the correction points on the chart, enter up to six characters for the
blade position name in the first field. This example will use positions TARGET, T
AFT, BLANK, and B AFT.
Press the [] key and move to the Unit field, enter a three character abbreviation for the
type of correction this position uses. This example will use the abbreviations GMS to
represent grams and PTS to represent points of sweep.
Press the [] key and move to the next field. Enter the adjustment amount portion of the
ICF in the Adj field. The two amounts of adjustment in our example are 200.00
grams and 2 points of sweep.
Press the [] key and enter the amplitude reference for the amount of adjustment just
entered. For this example, the ICF for weight is 220 gram per 1.0 IPS, the ICF for sweep
is 2 points per 1.0 IPS, and therefore 1.0 is entered in this field.
Press the [] key to move to the MoveLn field and enter the clock angle move line for
this point. For the Add to TARGET move line, the hour angle is 2, and the minute
angle is 30. Perform this for each adjustment point shown on the chart and the setup is
complete. The move line for the T AFT position will be 5:30. The move line for the
BLANK position will be 8:30. B AFT will have the move line at 11:30.
NOTE
Blade position names must be entered sequentiall y in either clockwise or counter
clockwise order. It does not matter what direction i s chosen.

5-6 Main Rotor Track & Balance 5 Revision 3, Oct 2012
5.1.3. Tracking Influence Setup

The tracking influence setup screen is used to define the type and number of adjustment units
used to move a blade 1.0 unit of measure at the condition listed.
Conditions: The condition name will be automatically entered and is not editable.
Adjustment Name: Using the keypad, enter a three-character identifier for the adjustment
type. Example =PCL (Pitch Change Link), SWP (Sweep), WGT (Weight), and TAB (Tab).
Unit: Using the keypad, enter a three-character identifier for the unit of adjustment type.
Example =FLT (Flat), PTS (Points), GMS (Grams), DEG (Degrees), and THO
(Thousandths).
Adjustments / in (mm): Enter the number of adjustment units to move the blade 1.0 unit of
measure. This will either be requested in Adj/in or Adj/mm depending on the measurement
units selected in the initial setup screen. In this example, it will take an adjustment of 6 flats
to move the blade tip one inch in ground or hover conditions.
Max ICF Update: This field is used to restrict the learning criteria for track adjustments. The
example uses 50%. With 50% selected, any movement over 50% of the expected result for a
given adjustment, and the analyzer will not update the ICF. Using the keypad, enter the
desired parameter to be placed in the setup.
No Adjustment Bld/Pos.: This field is used to designate a main rotor blade as a no
adjustment blade. This feature is used when the OEM suggests that no adjustments be
applied to a particular blade during a track and balance job. An optimized solution is
provided by the analyzer that requires no adjustments to the designated No Adjustment
Blade.
Tracking Planes: This field is used to designate the number of planes in which the main rotor
blades fly. If all blades fly in the same plane, select <1>. If there are two distinct planes for
the blade path select <2>.
Viper 4040 User Manual
Revision 3, Oct 2012 5 Main Rotor Track & Balance 5-7
Offset: This field will only appear after Tracking Planes above is set to 2 and the field is
exited. This field is used to define the optimum distance between multiple blade planes. The
analyzer will use this distance to properly position the groups of blades.
Blades: The blade names will default to those defined previously in the setup. If a change is
required, change the blade name to reflect the blades in passing order staring with the blade
that is over the nose when the tach and interrupter are aligned. This will be the name used in
the track display and when viewing available adjustments.
Plane: This field will only appear after Tracking Planes above is set to 2 and the field is
exited. This field is used to identify how the blades will be grouped. Blades flying in the
same plane require identical Plane entries.
Press [ENTER] to save the setup.
5.2. Setup Process
This section covers the complete setup process in the 4040 Viper for the main rotor balance
functions.
5.2.1. Main Rotor Setup
The following paragraphs illustrate each of the screens necessary to define and store an
enhanced main rotor setup.
5.2.1.1. Main Rotor Setup Screen

The first screen to complete is the Main Rotor Setup banner screen. As shown in the
example below, some fields in this screen have default values that appear automatically. You
can use this information if appropriate or input your own specific setup information using the

5-8 Main Rotor Track & Balance 5 Revision 3, Oct 2012
keypad. (Refer to Chapter 3, Using the Model 4040 Viper if you are unfamiliar with using
the keypad.) Follow the directions below to complete the Main Rotor Setup screen.
1. In the Name field, enter a name for the setup using the keypad. The field will accept up
to 20 alphanumeric characters.
CAUTION
Sensors connected to Channel A, Channel B, Channel C and Channel D must be of the
same type. Using different sensors during the same job will cause erroneous readings
and problems achi eving good balance results.
2. Use the [] key to move to the Vertical Chan (Channel) field. Use the [] key to
toggle between the selections in this field, either A, B, C, D, A+B, or
None. The value selected for this field determines which analyzer channel will be used
to measure and display the vertical vibration.
3. Use the [] key to move to the Lateral Chan field. Use the [] key to toggle
between the selections in this field, either A, B, C, D, A-B, or None. The
value selected for this field determines which analyzer channel will be used to measure
and display the lateral vibration.
4. Move to the Sensor field using the [] key. Use the [] key to toggle between the
options and select a sensor. If the sensor you are using does not appear as an optional
selection, you must input a new sensor setup into the analyzers memory. (See Chapter 18
of the Model 4040 Analyzer User Manual, Section titled Setup Sensors for instructions
on how to perform this function.)
5. Move to the Tach Type field by pressing the [] key. The selection in the Tach Type
field identifies which tachometer sensor you are using as a once-per-revolution source.
For main rotors, this will most often be Mag (Hi). Use the [] key to make the
selection. The choices are Mag (Hi), Monopole, Tach Gen, Dbl Intr, Optical,
and Mag (Lo).
6. Press the [] key to move to the Tach Chan field. Use the [] key to select and
identify which analyzer tachometer input port you are using to acquire tachometer data.
Available channels are 1, 2, 3, or 4.
7. Press the [] key to move to the Number of Weight Positions field. Using the [] key,
select the total number of lateral balance weight positions as determined from the lateral
balance chart. The maximum number of positions equals 6.
8. Move to the Blades field pressing the [] key. Using the [] key, select the number of
blades of the main rotor system you are balancing. The maximum number of blades
equals 6.
9. Use the [] key to move to the Relative to field. This selection will determine the
reference blade for tracking displays. Selecting AVG will present rotor blade positions
relative to the average of all blades. Selecting a specific blade number will present all
other blade positions relative to the blade number selected. (For more information on
tracking, refer to Chapter 16 of the Model 4040 Analyzer User Manual.)
Viper 4040 User Manual
Revision 3, Oct 2012 5 Main Rotor Track & Balance 5-9
10. Move to the RPM field using [] key. Using the keypad, enter the approximate
maximum expected RPM of the rotor system.
11. Press the [] key and move to the Trk Units. Use the [] key to select the desired unit
of measure to be used by the analyzer when presenting tracking data. Selectable options
are either inches or millimeters. (For more information on tracking, refer to Chapter 16 of
the Model 4040 Analyzer User Manual.)
12. Using the [] key, move to the first field in the grouping of Conditions. The fields
allow you to define up to six different conditions under which to measure and store data.
Each condition name may be a maximum of six characters long and should represent a
flight regime at which you wish to record data. Directly to the right of each condition
name box is a toggle selection for the type of measurement desired for that specific
condition. In each of the measurement type fields, use the [] key to select from the
following:
Both =measurement and storage of both vibration and track for the listed condition
Vib =measurement and storage of vibration only for the listed condition
Trk =measurement and storage of track only for the listed condition
When all conditions and measurement types desired have been input to your satisfaction,
press [ENTER] to continue.
5.2.1.2. Tracking Setup Screen
English Metric

The Tracking Setup screen appears. The purpose of this screen is to allow the user to input
the relevant dimensions of the rotor being balanced. This information will be required to
obtain accurate measurements. Additional, device specific, instructions can be found in either
the Model 550 TraX
TM
Operational Supplement (ACES P/N 75-900-4043) or the Model
540/540-2 Operational Supplement (ACES P/N 75-900-2021).
1. In the Rotor Diameter block, use the keypad to enter a number between 1 and 999999
to include a decimal point.

5-10 Main Rotor Track & Balance 5 Revision 3, Oct 2012
2. Press the [] key to proceed to the unit label field. This is the unit of measure used to
identify the diameter described in the above block. The available choices are: ft, in,
mm, or m. Use the [] key to select the appropriate unit. This field is independent
of the other unit fields required in the setup.
3. Use the [] key to move to the Lead/Lag Units block. This will define the units that
the lead/lag measurements are displayed in. Available choices are in and mm. Use
the [] key to select the appropriate unit.
4. Use the [] key to move to the Blade 1 Offset block. This will define the angular
distance between the Tach event and the passage of the first blade over the tracking
device. Use the keypad to enter a number between 30 and 90 degrees.
5. Use the [] key to move to the In. from Mast CL block. This will define the linear
distance, as measured in the same plane as the tracker is mounted, from the tracker to the
extended centerline of the mast. This value will always be in inches regardless of any
other units used in the setup. Use the keypad to enter a value between 1 and 999 to
include a decimal point.
6. Use the [] key to move to the Trkr Inclination block. This field will record the
angular relationship between the horizon and the centerline of the tracking device as
aimed at the main rotor blades. Use the keypad to enter a number between 30 and 90
degrees.
5.2.1.3. Main Rotor Condition Setup Screen

The Main Rotor Conds. Setup screen appears. The purpose of this screen is to allow the
user to enter an ID number for each polar chart or tracking influence to be used by the
analyzer when determining if a solution is required.
To the left of the screen is a column of fields containing the conditions as entered in the
main rotor setup screen. The names are automatically entered and are non-editable.
Viper 4040 User Manual
Revision 3, Oct 2012 5 Main Rotor Track & Balance 5-11
To the right of each condition name is a chart ID field for each measurement type. If a
0 is entered in an ID field, the measurement obtained will be for reference only and
will not be used as a basis for correction. If a number is entered in an ID field, the setup
will require an electronic chart be defined and will result in corrections being given for
that measurement vs. condition. If the same ID number is given to more than one
condition for the same measurement type, the data for each of the conditions will be
averaged together and a solution presented for the average. Different adjustment types
(for example, PCL and TAB) for the same measurement type (i.e. vertical vibration),
would require different ID numbers for the conditions applicable to each adjustment
type.
The Limit fields allow input of a maximum acceptable vibe (for vertical and lateral
measurements) and maximum acceptable total track split (when using a tracking
influence vs. blade position for corrections). Simply enter the value you wish to use. If
the measurements recorded during a job are above this value, the analyzer will present
corrections, if the measurements are below, the analyzer will not give an adjustment.
Looking at the example main rotor conditions setup screen above, three charts will be used,
two vertical and one lateral. One tracking influence definition will also need to be created.
The first chart is for vertical measurements at hover only. The second chart is for the
averaged vertical measurements from both FLT 80 and FLT 120. The last chart is for the
average lateral measurement from both Ground and Hover. The tracking influence will use
track readings from Hover measurements. No other measurements will be used to produce
corrections for this setup. Both vertical and lateral vibrations must be 0.20 IPS or greater for
the analyzer to present solutions. Track splits must be 0.25 inches or greater for the analyzer
to present a solution.
For more Main Rotor Conditions Setup screen examples, see paragraphs 5.2.1.3.1, and
5.2.1.3.2.
When you have completed the conditions setup screen, press [ENTER] to accept and
continue. Proceed to paragraph 5.2.1.4. for the next main rotor setup screen.
5.2.1.3.1. Conditions Setup Screen, Example 2


5-12 Main Rotor Track & Balance 5 Revision 3, Oct 2012
In the example main rotor condition setup screen above, only one vertical chart ID, one
lateral chart ID, and one tracking adjustment ID have been entered. Based on the ID numbers
entered, all of the vertical measurements for Hover, FLT 80, and FLT 120 will be averaged
and the solution based on this average. The lateral measurement for both Ground and Hover
will also be averaged, with the lateral solution based on this average. Finally, a tracking
adjustment based on the recorded track split on the ground will be presented. This type of
setup would be used with a ship that requires a pitch change link adjustment on ground based
on visual track and a trim tab adjustment based on the vertical vibration in flight.
5.2.1.3.2. Conditions Setup Screen, Example 3

The last example shows one lateral chart and two track adjustment ID entries. The lateral
measurements for both Ground and Hover will be averaged, with the solution based on this
average. The recorded track split for Ground and Hover will be averaged with one solution
based on this average. The recorded track split for FLT 80 and FLT 120 will also be averaged
with a second solution based on this average. This is an example of a setup for use on an
aircraft that requires pitch change link adjustment for ground and hover visual track, then trim
tab adjustment based on visual track in forward flight.
Viper 4040 User Manual
Revision 3, Oct 2012 5 Main Rotor Track & Balance 5-13
5.2.1.4. Main Rotor Adjustment Symbol and Solution Logic Setup Screen

The M/R Adjustment Symbol Setup screen appears as shown. This screen is used to
establish the direction of move for a positive adjustment as determined by the charts. For
example, if the selection of Sweep (AFT) is made, when the analyzer gives an adjustment
for blade sweep to move a blade 4 flats, the actual movement of the blade is 4 flats aft. A
movement of this same blade forward would be a negative move (-4.0 flats). Look at the
polar charts you are using to determine the primary direction of move according to the chart.
Use the [] or [] keys to select the field and the [] or [] key to select the option for each
of the movement types.
Weight: Weight adjustments should always be entered as the addition of weight.
Sweep: Select FWD or AFT for the direction of blade movement if adjusting lateral
balance using sweep in accordance with a polar chart. If the aircraft does not utilize blade
sweep for lateral balance, this field is not applicable.
Blade: Select UP or DOWN for the direction of blade movement if adjusting pitch
change links in accordance with a polar chart.
Tab: Select UP or DOWN for the direction of blade movement if adjusting trim tabs
in accordance with a polar chart.
Soln: The two solution options are Max and All. When solving for Max, the
analyzer will present the solution for the highest vibration reading attained for the vertical
and lateral sensors. When solving for All, the analyzer will present all of the available
solutions for vertical, lateral and track readings.
When completed, press [ENTER].
5.2.1.5. Chart Definition
The final step in the setup process is to define the electronic chart forms as described in
section 5.1, Analyzer Chart Forms. Vertical chart(s) will be defined first, followed by the

5-14 Main Rotor Track & Balance 5 Revision 3, Oct 2012
lateral chart(s), then any track adjustment influences required. When all charts have been
completed, press [ENTER] to save the setup and return to the Main Rotor Manage Setups
menu. Follow paragraphs 5.2.1.6 through 5.2.1.6.7 for a complete example of a typical main
rotor setup.
5.2.1.6. Main Rotor Setup Example
This setup example is applicable to a helicopter type that utilizes pitch change link
adjustments to correct for vertical vibration in a hover, weight and blade sweep adjustments
for lateral vibration in a hover, and blade trim tab adjustments for vertical vibrations in
forward flight regimes. The polar charts used for this example are illustrated below.

Rotor diameter: 37.0 Feet. Lead/lag units are read in inches.
Rotor speed: 385 RPM/
Viper 4040 User Manual
Revision 3, Oct 2012 5 Main Rotor Track & Balance 5-15
5.2.1.6.1. Main Rotor Setup Screen

1. The name of the setup has been labeled as EXAMPLE 1.
2. Vertical vibration will be measured on channel A.
3. Lateral vibration will be measured on channel B.
4. The type of vibration sensor chosen for this setup is the 991D-1.
5. The type of tachometer source for this setup is the Mag(Hi).
6. The tachometer channel for this setup is channel 1.
7. Looking at the lateral balance chart presented in paragraph 5.2.1.6, four weight positions
have been identified, Target Blank sweep and Target Blank weight.
8. The main rotor is a two bladed system.
9. Tracking will be displayed relative to blade number 1.
10. Rotor speed is 385 RPM.
11. Track measurements will be displayed in inches.
12. Four conditions have been entered for this job, GROUND, HOVER, FLT80, and
FLT120. Both track and vibration will be measured and recorded for this setup.
Press [ENTER] to proceed to the next screen.

5-16 Main Rotor Track & Balance 5 Revision 3, Oct 2012
5.2.1.6.2. Tracking Setup Screen

1. Enter 37.00 in the first block using the keypad.
2. Select ft for units of rotor diameter.
3. Select in for the display units of lead/lag data.
5.2.1.6.3. Main Rotor Conditions Setup

Use the sample polar charts in section 5.2.1.6. In the Main Rotor Conditions Setup screen
above, two vertical charts and one lateral chart have been identified. The first vertical chart,
ID number 1, will be used for a vertical measurement in hover only, while the second
vertical chart, ID number 2, is for the average vertical measurement of both FLT 80 and
FLT120. One lateral chart has been identified for the lateral measurement in Hover only.
The vibration limit for both the vertical and lateral measurements has been set at 0.20 IPS.
This main rotor setup will not use the tracking information measured by the analyzer for any
corrections; it will be for user reference only.
Viper 4040 User Manual
Revision 3, Oct 2012 5 Main Rotor Track & Balance 5-17
When completed, press [ENTER] to continue.
5.2.1.6.4. Main Rotor Adjustment Symbol and Solution Logic Setup

In the Main Rotor Adjustment Symbol and Solution Logic setup screen above, the positive
numeric value in a solution screen has been identified as the addition of weight, sweeping a
blade aft, moving a blade upwards using either pitch change links or tabs. The solution logic
has been set to MAX and will present the solution related to the highest vibration readings
attained for the vertical and lateral sensors.
Press [ENTER] to continue.
5.2.1.6.5. Vertical: Hover Chart Definition

The Vertical: HOVER chart setup screen appears first. Use the vertical vibration chart in
paragraph 5.2.1.6, to complete the steps below and properly define this chart.

5-18 Main Rotor Track & Balance 5 Revision 3, Oct 2012
1. The name of the chart, Vert: HOVER, has been automatically entered from the Main
Rotor Conditions Setup screen and is non-editable.
2. The chart type is Regular.
3. This chart uses no sweep adjustments, and is therefore left as No.
4. No Adjustment Blade/Pos. is left as None.
5. Max ICF Update is 50%.
6. Rotation is 45 degrees.
7. The type of adjustment applied in accordance with this chart is pitch change link in flats;
therefore FLT has been entered.
8. The influence co-efficient for the pitch change links is 5.0 flats per 1.0 IPS vibration.
9. The Bld/Pos names entered from the chart are TARGET and BLANK.
10. The MoveLine for moving the TARGET blade up is 12:45.
11. The MoveLine for moving the BLANK blade up is 6:45.

When completed, press [ENTER] to continued.
5.2.1.6.6. Vertical: FLT 80 FLT120 Chart Definition, Example 1

The Vertical: FLT 80 FLT120 chart setup screen appears next. Use the vertical vibration
chart in paragraph 5.2.1.6, to complete the steps below and properly define this chart.
1. The name of the chart, Vert: FLT 80 FLT120, has been automatically entered from
the Main Rotor Conditions Setup screen and is non-editable.
2. The chart type is Regular.
3. This chart uses no sweep adjustments, and is therefore left as No.
4. No Adjustment Blade/Pos. is left as None.
Viper 4040 User Manual
Revision 3, Oct 2012 5 Main Rotor Track & Balance 5-19
5. Max ICF Update is 50%.
6. Rotation is 45 degrees.
7. The type of adjustment applied in accordance with this chart is trim tab in degrees;
therefore DEG has been entered.
8. The influence co-efficient for trim tab adjustment is 10.0 degrees per 1.0 IPS
vibration.
9. The Bld/Pos names entered from the chart are TARGET and BLANK.
10. The MoveLine for moving the TARGET blade up is 12:45.
11. The MoveLine for moving the BLANK blade up is 6:45.
When completed, press [ENTER] to continued.
5.2.1.6.7. Lateral Hover Chart

The last chart defined will be Lateral: HOVER. Use the lateral vibration chart in paragraph
5.2.1.6, to complete the steps below and properly define this chart.
1. The name has been automatically entered as Lat: HOVER from the Main Rotor
Conditions Setup screen and is non-editable.
2. The type of chart is Irregular.
3. Although this chart does utilize a sweep adjustment for balancing, it is not the only type
of adjustment used and therefore requires this entry to be left set as No.
4. No Adjustment Blade/Pos. is left as None.
5. Max ICF Update is 50%.
6. Rotation is 45 degrees.
7. The first Bld/Pos name entered is TARGET, utilizing an adjustment unit of GMS
weight. The influence co-efficient for this point is 200.00 grams adjustment per 1.0
IPS vibration. The Move line for this position is 8:30.

5-20 Main Rotor Track & Balance 5 Revision 3, Oct 2012
8. The second Bld/Pos name entered is T AFT, utilizing an adjustment unit of PTS. The
influence co-efficient for this point is 2.00 points adjustment per 1.0 IPS vibration.
The Move line for this position is 11:30.
9. The third Bld/Pos name entered is BLANK, utilizing an adjustment unit of GMS
weight. The influence co-efficient for this point is 200.00 grams adjustment per 1.0
IPS vibration. The Move line for this position is 2:30.
10. The last Bld/Pos name entered is B AFT, utilizing an adjustment unit of PTS. The
influence co-efficient for this point is 2.00 points adjustment per 1.0 IPS vibration.
The Move line for this position is 5:30.
When completed, press [ENTER] to save and exit this setup.
5.3. Main Rotor Balance Process

The following paragraphs present the main rotor track and balance process and its associated
screens and are intended to familiarize the user with the data acquisition and correction
capabilities of the 4040 Viper.

Prior to starting a new main rotor track and balance job, you must first select the Main Rotor
Track & Balance option from the main menu. Do this by highlighting the Main Rotor
Track & Balance option from the Main Menu screen using the [] key and pressing
[ENTER].
Viper 4040 User Manual
Revision 3, Oct 2012 5 Main Rotor Track & Balance 5-21
5 5. .3 3. .1 1. . Starting a New Job

Selecting Start J ob from the Main Rotor Track & Balance banner screen allows you to
begin a main rotor balance job. When you select this option, one of three screens will appear
next depending on whether you are using the main rotor function for the first time, have
previously defined main rotor setups, or have a previously started job stored in the analyzer.
If you are using the analyzer for the first time, the Main Rotor Setup banner screen will
appear allowing you to define a new main rotor setup to use. Refer to paragraph 5.2.1
Main Rotor Setup for detailed instructions on defining a setup.
If you have previously saved setups stored in the analyzers memory, a screen displaying
the list of setups will be displayed. You can then select a setup from this list to use for the
job. Proceed to paragraph 5.3.2 Setup List
If another job was already in progress but not completed, the Incomplete J ob banner
screen will be displayed and the analyzer will present a message prompting you to verify
that you wish to finish the incomplete job or begin a new job. The screen will display the
message; The last job performed is incomplete. Do you want to RESUME work on it?
If you wish to return to the unfinished job, press the [F1] Yes key and you will be
returned to the point where the in-progress job was stopped and allowed to complete it. If
you wish to continue with starting a new job, press the [F5] No key and the screen will
then display the Setup List. Proceed to paragraph 5.3.2.

5-22 Main Rotor Track & Balance 5 Revision 3, Oct 2012
5.3.2. Setup List

The setup list presents the stored main rotor setups in analyzer memory. Select the setup you
wish to use by highlighting the name of the setup using the [] key and pressing [ENTER]. If
the setup you need is not present, press the [F1] New key to proceed to the Main Rotor
Setup screen to define a new setup. The [F4] key can be used to copy an existing setup and
rename or change parameters.
5.3.3. Job Identification

The J ob Identification banner screen appears next allowing entry of the customer name,
ACFT registration, and total time. This information is optional, but it is suggested that at least
a customer name be entered, as it will aid in identifying the job for future use.
Viper 4040 User Manual
Revision 3, Oct 2012 5 Main Rotor Track & Balance 5-23
If the analyzer has been used previously, a list of customer names will have been stored and
are accessed by pressing the [F1] Names key. A name can then be selected from this list for
use with this job.
When finished, press [ENTER].
5.3.4. Tracking Selections

The Tracking Selections screen is displayed, allowing you to choose a tracking device for
use with the job. This screen will always be presented at the start of a new job to allow
selection of a tracking device or when resuming a job to ensure the device has not been
changed.
The tracking device field is a toggle selection of either TraX, Tracker or Strobe.
Use the [] or [] keys to select the tracking device being used.
If you select TraX or Tracker, press the [] key and move to the lower portion of the
screen to input the following:
Using the keypad, enter the number of revolutions for which you will acquire track data.
The minimum entry is 20 and the maximum is 99, however, it is highly suggested that
you use no less than 30 for the number of rotations to measure track. This will result in
greater accuracy from the tracker.
Using the keypad, enter the distance, in inches, from the trackers location (usually the
cockpit) to the blade tips at 12:00 with the interrupter over the magnetic pickup, or
reflective tape in front of the Phototach.
Additional, device specific, instructions can be found in either the Model 550 TraX
TM

Operational Supplement (ACES P/N 75-900-4043) or the Model 540/540-2 Operational
Supplement (ACES P/N 75-900-2021).

5-24 Main Rotor Track & Balance 5 Revision 3, Oct 2012
When finished, press [ENTER].
5.3.5. Connect Sensors

The Connect Sensors banner screen will be displayed next. Messages that appear on this
screen prompt you to perform the physical installation and connection of the tachometer and
vibration sensors to the input channels you specified in the applicable setup.
You must use the vibration sensor installation locations as specified by the applicable
polar charts. The orientation of the sensor is key to the accuracy of the chart, if the sensor
is installed in a direction other than that specified, the phase (clock) angles will be
incorrect and solutions will not be accurate.
If you are using a magnetic pickup for the speed sensor, install and set the gap as directed
in the applicable maintenance manual or polar chart.
It is permitted to use the Phototach for the main rotor one per revolution source. If using a
Phototach as the tachometer, refer to paragraph 5.3.5.1 Optical Tachometer Setup.
Also at this time, install any ships power and strobe cables as needed.
When completed, press [ENTER].
5.3.5.1. Optical Tachometer Setup (Optional)
To install the optical tachometer, do the following:
If not specifically provided by an ACES Systems Application Note or manufacturers
directions, locate a position that allows the Phototach to be installed not more than 18
inches away or closer than 4 inches from a rotating main rotor component. This
component will be used to install the reflective tape to serve as the once-per-revolution
Viper 4040 User Manual
Revision 3, Oct 2012 5 Main Rotor Track & Balance 5-25
tachometer source for the analyzer. Connect and route the tachometer cable from the
Phototach to the analyzer.
NOTE
If possible, the location of the Phototach should al l ow for the reflective tape to trigger
it when the main rotor is i n the reference position as specified by the balance chart.
This will provide a direct correlation of the clock angles produced by the anal yzer and
the charts. If this is not possible, the clock positions on the chart will have to be
rotated based on the vibration results from the fi rst applied correction.
While still in the Connect Sensors banner screen, a message is presented near the
bottom that reads Tach Power is Off. The Block directly below this statement and
corresponding to the [F1] key, is labeled Tach Pwr. Pressing the [F1] Tach Pwr key
will power the Tach. Turning the tachometer power on is not required to start the balance
job; this step is only accomplished to verify the proper operation of the Phototach.
Rotate the main rotor until the target object is aligned with the Phototach. Clean this area
thoroughly to insure adhesion of the tape.
Cut a strip reflective tape (3M Tape, Model 7610) approximately 1.5 to 2 inches long.
With the tape backing still in place, hold the tape in position on the target object, then
verify the red LED Gate Light indicator light on the back end of the Phototach is
illuminated. This indicates the position of the tape is correct.
Remove the tape backing and attach reflective tape at that location. Be sure to smooth out
any wrinkles or bubbles in the tape. Insure the edges are smoothed and attached.
Once the above steps are completed and good Gate Light signal is present, press [ENTER]
to proceed with the job.
5.3.6. Start Aircraft


5-26 Main Rotor Track & Balance 5 Revision 3, Oct 2012
The analyzer will now direct the user to Perform FOD check and start aircraft per flight
manual, refer to the aircrafts flight manual for all aircraft starting and operational
instructions. This screen allows you to view the current main rotor RPM. When the aircraft
has been started and RPM is stable, press [ENTER] to continue.
The [F2] Swap J ob key allows you to return to the Main Menu without rebooting the
analyzer. This allows you to quickly and easily switch between various jobs.
5.3.7. Select Aircraft Condition

The Select Condition screen appears listing the conditions that were defined in the setup;
each preceded by a set of brackets. To measure a condition, highlight it using the [] key and
press [ENTER]. If a condition has already been measured, an X will be inserted between
the brackets. You may re-measure a condition if desired, however all data previously
measured for that condition will be over-written and subsequently lost.
When all desired conditions have been measured, pressing the [F1] End Run key will
terminate the current run and direct you to shut down the aircraft. Go to paragraph 5.3.10.
If during the current run, the [F2] Adjust key becomes visible, the analyzer has collected
enough information to present a solution. The solution presented will depend on the
conditions measured and the charts defined in the setup. For example, in our sample setup
paragraph 5.2.1.6.3, we defined only two charts for use with the aircraft in a hover:
Vertical balance and Lateral balance. In the example screen above, only hover
measurements have been acquired. Therefore the only solutions the analyzer could
present would have to be for either vertical balance or lateral balance.
The process for measuring and recording track data is covered in the measurement
screens, it must be done from the Review Data screen as shown in paragraph 5.3.9.
When all desired conditions have been measured, press the [F1] key to end the current run.
Viper 4040 User Manual
Revision 3, Oct 2012 5 Main Rotor Track & Balance 5-27
5.3.8. Data Acquisition

Upon selecting to acquire a measurement, the data acquisition screen appears. The screen
banner will contain the run number as well as the condition being measured. Within the
screen, the analyzer will present the Current and Average RPM, IPS level, and Phase
(Clock) angle readings. The averaged measurement will be used when calculating solutions.
There is also an error value indication associated with the averaged measurement.
NOTE
The error value will typicall y lower rapidl y when the amplitude of vibration i s high.
When the amplitude reaches a lower l evel (Approx. < 0.05 IPS) the error value may
remain high. This is a normal response and is not cause for al arm.
Press the [F1] Reset key to restart the measurement and averaging process at any time.
This may be performed as a means of validating the quality of a measurement. If, after
the reset key is pressed, the average measurement does not return to approximately the
same value shown before, the quality of the measurement may be questionable. If this
occurs, repeat the averaging process and try it again until the measurement values are
similar both before and after resetting.
When the error reaches its lowest level, press [ENTER] to stop the acquisition process.

5-28 Main Rotor Track & Balance 5 Revision 3, Oct 2012
5.3.9. Review Data

The Review Data screen will now appear presenting the vibration data for the current run
and condition.
This screen also offers a chance to retake the measurement by pressing the [F1] Retake
key. Pressing this key returns you to the data acquisition screen, paragraph 5.3.8.
If you wish to measure and record track for this run and condition, press the [F5] Track
key. Proceed to paragraph 5.3.9.1.
When you have finished reviewing the data, press [ENTER] to return to the Select
Conditions screen in order to acquire more measurements or to end the run. See paragraph
5.3.7 Select Aircraft Condition.
5.3.9.1. Track Measurement
NOTE
The steps below will only be requi red when using the Model 540/540-2 Optical Tracker.
When using the Model 550 TraX
TM
it will not be necessary to aim the unit each time
data is collected. After the TraX
TM
i s instal led, data acquisition should be automatic
when required. See the TraX
TM
Operational Supplement (550-OM-01, ACES P/N 75-900-
4043) for detail s on operating the TraX
TM
.
Viper 4040 User Manual
Revision 3, Oct 2012 5 Main Rotor Track & Balance 5-29

If you select [F5] to measure track, a screen will appear prompting you to Aim and Fire
Tracker. At this point, the tracker is energized and ready to use. Verify the presence of a
solid amber light at the bottom of the LED aiming lights. If present, raise the tracker into the
rotor disk and align until the green LEDs illuminate. Press and release the trigger once while
holding the tracker with the green LEDs illuminated. The amber LED should now pulsate.
When the amber LED is completely extinguished the tracker has measured the desired
number of revolutions as entered at the start of the job.
5.3.9.2. Check Track Results

A screen will appear presenting the track data just acquired. This data will be shown in both
graphical and numerical format. The sample data above was taken relative to blade one, the
TARGET blade. You can see that the TARGET blade is shown lagging 0.04 inches and the
BLANK blade is shown leading 0.04 inches. You will notice that the track of the TARGET
blade zero and the BLANK blade is shown to be 0.75 inches high. The lower portion of the
screen shows the number of valid data packets the tracker sent to the analyzer.

5-30 Main Rotor Track & Balance 5 Revision 3, Oct 2012
NOTE
If the number of data packets gathered i s less than 75 % of the total rotations defined
in paragraph 5.3.4, sel ect the [F5] Track option upon returning to the review data
screen as described in paragraph 5.3.9.
When you have finished reviewing the track, press [ENTER] to return to the Review Data
screen.
5.3.10. Shut Down Engines

When you have chosen to end the current run, the analyzer will prompt you to shutdown the
aircraft. You can use the [F2] Swap J ob key to return to the Main Menu without rebooting
the analyzer or [F5] Continue key to move to step 5.3.11.
5.3.11. Review Prior Run(s) Data

Viper 4040 User Manual
Revision 3, Oct 2012 5 Main Rotor Track & Balance 5-31
The Review Prior Run(s) Data screen appears as shown. The data will be displayed in the
order of the current run and first condition measured. From this first screen, press the [] key
to proceed to the next condition measured for the current run. Press the [] key to return to
the previous condition.
If the current run is number two or greater, pressing the [] key will move to the same
condition as on the previous run. Press the [] key to return to the current run. Always
observe the run number and condition name at top of the screen to identify the data you are
viewing.
When you have completed reviewing the data, press [ENTER] to continue to the solution
screens.
5.3.12. Solution Screens
The number and type of solutions presented will depend upon the data gathered and the limits
that were set for each of the measurement types in the Conditions Setup screen when the
setup was defined. Solutions will be presented in the following order: Track, Lateral, and
then Vertical, as shown below. Choose the solution for the current run, highlight it with the
cursor and press [ENTER] to view the actual solution. Typically, starting with the first
suggestion and applying corrections until this exceedance is under the defined limit before
proceeding to the next solution will be the best course of action.

The analyzer will present all of the solutions that are possible from the data gathered for the
current run. This means that it is possible for the analyzer to give two adjustments that would
affect the other adversely. The user will ultimately be responsible for determining which
adjustments to make and which to discard.
For instance, in the following sample screens, the analyzer will recommend solutions for both
the pitch change links and the main rotor blade trim tabs for the same run. If you were to
make both of these adjustments, chances are, this would over-correct causing counter-
adjustments on the next run. Most likely in this case, and depending on the amount of PCL

5-32 Main Rotor Track & Balance 5 Revision 3, Oct 2012
adjustment, the trim tab adjustment would be skipped and only the pitch change link
adjustment would be made.
As stated earlier, the solutions presented by the analyzer are based on the charts defined in the
setup and the measurements acquired for the current run. These influences will be updated
each time the analyzer is used. For the updates to be accurate, you must enter exactly the
adjustments performed, or skipped. If the analyzer presents a solution and you choose not to
apply it on the current run, you are required to zero out the adjustment entries in the recording
screen for that particular adjustment. If you believe that the current ICFs are correct and the
impact of one adjustment on another will be minimal, it is possible to make multiple
adjustments during a single run by pressing the [F1] All Adj key.
5.3.12.1. Example Solution Screen #1

For our sample job, the first adjustment given is for a vertical measurement at hover. The
adjustment type to be applied is FLT or flats of a pitch change link. The line at the bottom
of the screen serves as a reminder that a positive adjustment is intended to move the blade up.
For this measurement, the analyzers recommended adjustment is to raise the Target blade by
4.00 flats. This solution has been automatically entered in the appropriate Installed field. If
you are able to make this adjustment exactly as entered, all that is necessary to continue is
pressing the [ENTER] key. If an adjustment is made other than raising the Target blade 4.00
flats, you must enter this in the appropriate Installed field using the keypad.
Pressing the [F1] Inst=Sugg key will return any Installed field that has been edited to
the original values presented by the analyzer.
Pressing the [F2] Inst=None key will delete all Installed field entries. This function is
used when a particular adjustment is to be skipped on the current run.
Pressing the [F5] Quit J ob key will exit the current job and store it as complete.
Warning
Using the [F5] Quit Job function will close the job and not allow resuming at a later
Viper 4040 User Manual
Revision 3, Oct 2012 5 Main Rotor Track & Balance 5-33
time. If you wish to stop the job temporaril y, press the Main Menu key or si mpl y turn
the anal yzer off.
When you have finished entering the adjustments performed, press [ENTER] to continue to
the next screen.
5.3.12.2. Example Solution Screen #2

The second solution the analyzer gave for our sample job is for the average vertical
measurement from flight at 80 knots and flight at 120 knots. The adjustment type for this
chart is degrees of trim tab. For the current run, if you chose to make the pitch link
adjustment as recommended in the previous screen, you would most likely skip the trim tab
adjustment. Do this by pressing the [F2] Inst=None key and then [ENTER].
5.3.12.3. Example Solution Screen #3


5-34 Main Rotor Track & Balance 5 Revision 3, Oct 2012
The last correction given for our sample job is for the lateral ground measurement. The
solution type for this adjustment is grams of weight or points of blade sweep. The solution
presented for this screen is to add 200.00 grams to the target blade.
NOTE
The analyzer will attempt to give solutions that resolve to zero in all cases. Thi s may
nullify the ability to make some adjustments with any degree of accuracy. If this
occurs, it is the users responsibility to adjust the amount either up or down to achieve
a quantifiable adjustment. Remember that the anal yzer will update the influence co-
efficient between every run based on the vibration results from the previous
adjustment.
When the last solution screen has been updated, pressing [ENTER] will take you to the Start
Aircraft screen for the next run.
5.4. Main Rotor Manage Data Functions
The main rotor Review J ob function presents chart information, correction history, and
influence co-efficient for the job. The following paragraphs will describe these new screens
and how to navigate through them to review this information.
5.4.1. Main Rotor Review Job

Upon selecting to review a job, the Review J ob screen will appear as shown above. The run
number and condition name are displayed at the top of the screen along with the vibration and
track measurements acquired for the current run and condition listed.
To review different conditions within the same run, press either the [] or [] key.
To review data for a different run, press either the [] or [] key.
To view adjustments made for the current run, press the [F1] ViewAdj key. See
paragraph 5.4.2.
Viper 4040 User Manual
Revision 3, Oct 2012 5 Main Rotor Track & Balance 5-35
5.4.2. View Main Rotor Track and Balance

The View Main Rotor Track and Balance screen appears as shown above. This screen
presents both the suggested and installed adjustments for the run number and chart name
displayed.
Press either the [] or [] keys to view different chart types for the same run.
Press the [] or [] key to change the current run.
Press the [F1] ViewMeas key to return to the Review J ob screen as shown in
paragraph 5.4.1.
Press the [F2] View Chart key to view the polar chart influence information for the job
as shown in paragraph 5.4.3.

5-36 Main Rotor Track & Balance 5 Revision 3, Oct 2012
5.4.3. View Main Rotor Chart

The View M/R Chart screen gives the chart name, chart type, default magnitude of
adjustment, name and adjustment ratio of each blade position.
Pressing the [] or [] keys will toggle between multiple chart types if more than one is
defined for the setup.
Press the [F1] key to ViewMeas and return to paragraph 5.4.1.
Press the [F2] key to ViewAdj and return to paragraph 5.4.2.
Press the [F5] key to view the ICF changes recorded during the job as shown in
paragraph 5.4.4.
When completed reviewing, press [ENTER] to return to the manage data menu.
Viper 4040 User Manual
Revision 3, Oct 2012 5 Main Rotor Track & Balance 5-37
5.4.4. View Main Rotor Chart ICFs

The View M/R Chart ICFs screen shows how the influence coefficient magnitude and
rotation was changed as a result of the correction made on each run. Because the analyzer
continues to learn between runs, it is very important to ensure accurate data entry for the
actual correction made during each run.
Press [ENTER] to return to the Review J ob screen explained in paragraph 5.4.1.


Chapter 6
Tail Rotor Balance
(Revision 3, Oct 2012)
This section is intended to familiarize you with the various electronic chart forms and setup
screens used with the 4040 Viper. First by looking at each of the chart forms found in the tail
rotor section, then by using these forms to create an actual setup.
6.1. Analyzer Chart Forms
J ust as in the case with polar balance charts, there are two types of analyzer chart forms
used with the 4040 Viper. The chart forms are also categorized as either Regular or
Irregular. The selection of setup type is made within the chart form itself by using either the
[] or [] keys to toggle between Regular and Irregular in the Chart Type field, then
pressing the [] key to move to the next field. The remaining fields in the screen will
automatically change if necessary. The paragraphs below describe these forms in detail.
6.1.1. Regular Chart Forms
A Regular chart is one that has all weight positions spaced equally around the chart, all
adjustments are of the same type, and all adjustments carry the same ICF. The next paragraph
details the process for defining a tail rotor Regular chart setup.

6-2 - Tail Rotor Balance 6 Revision 3, Oct 2012
6.1.1.1. - Regular Tail Rotor Chart Setup
The tail rotor balance chart shown to the right depicts
six adjustment points. Each adjustment point has been
circled to ease identification and differentiate them
from the clock hours. The move line for each
adjustment point has been indicated with an arrow, and
the ICF is labeled at the bottom of the chart as being 12
grams per 1.0 IPS. This chart meets all criteria to place
it in the Regular chart type category, all weight
positions have the same ICF and type of adjustment,
and all move lines are equally spaced around the chart.
Using this chart, follow the examples below to
properly define a Regular tail rotor chart setup in the
analyzer.



Name: The name of the chart will be automatically inserted from the Tail Rotor Setup
Screen name field and is not editable.
Chart Type: Use [] or [] key to select the chart type. For this example, the type is
Regular.
No. WtPos: Enter the number of weight positions used. You can input up to 20 positions if
needed. This chart uses 6.
Grams / IPS: Enter the grams per IPS influence for the tail rotor. In this case the entry is
12.00 grams per 1.0 IPS. The ICF amount entered must always be for 1.0 IPS vibration.
ICF =12.0 Grams / 1.0 IPS
Viper 4040 User Manual
Revision 3, Oct 2012 6 Tail Rotor Balance 6-3
Additionally, the tail rotor balance function assumes the adjustment will always be weight in
grams. If the chart uses an adjustment type such as the number of washers per IPS, simply
enter this number and overlook the label of grams.
WtPos, Add @: The lower portion of the screen provides fields for entry of the WtPos
names and Add @ (move line) clock angles. Since this is a Regular chart setup, you will
only have to enter the move lines for the first two weight positions; the analyzer will
determine the rest.
Starting with any of the weight positions, enter a name, up to six characters, in the first
field as shown.
Next, press the [] key to move one field to the right; enter the angle (in hours) of the
move line for this position. If the move line contains an angle in minutes, press the []
key again to move to the next field and enter the minutes.
Repeat the name and move line process for the second weight position, then enter the rest of
the weight position names and this chart is completed.
NOTE
Weight position names must be entered sequentially in either clockwise or counter clockwise
order. It does not matter what direction is chosen.
6.1.2. Irregular Chart Forms
6.1.2.1. Irregular Tail Rotor Chart
Setup
The tail rotor balance chart shown to
the right represents four adjustment
points, all of which utilize the addition
of weight as a correction type.
However, the ICF is different for two
of the points. Target and Blank have
an ICF of 10 grams per 1.0 IPS where
A and B have an ICF of 33 grams
per 1.0 IPS. The clock angle move
lines are not equally spaced around
the chart therefore it must use the
Irregular chart form in the analyzer.
Using this chart, follow the examples
below to properly define an
Irregular tail rotor chart setup in the
analyzer.

6-4 - Tail Rotor Balance 6 Revision 3, Oct 2012

Name: The name of the chart will be automatically inserted from the main setup screen for a
tail rotor job.
Chart Type: Select Irregular as the chart type.
No. of WtPos: Enter the number of weight positions used as indicated by the polar chart, in
this case 4. You can input from 2 to 13 positions as needed. After pressing the [] key to exit
the field, the value entered in this field will change the remainder of the screen to allow input
of each weight positions ICF.
Wt/Pos, Grams, IPS, Add @:
Starting with any of the correction points on the chart. Enter the weight position name in
the first field up to six characters. TARGET is the first weight position name in our
example.
Press the [] key and move to the next field. Enter the amount of adjustment portion of
the ICF under Grams. This example uses 10.00 grams.
Press the [] key and enter the amplitude reference for the amount of adjustment just
entered. For this example, enter 1.0 IPS
Press the [] key to move to the Add @ field. Enter the clock angle move line for this
point. For the TARGET weight position the move line is 6:00.
Perform this for each adjustment point shown on the chart and the setup is complete.
Note:
Weight position names must be entered sequentially in either clockwise or counter clockwise
order. It does not matter what direction is chosen.
Viper 4040 User Manual
Revision 3, Oct 2012 6 Tail Rotor Balance 6-5
6.2. Tail Rotor Setup
The following paragraphs illustrate each of the screens necessary to define and store a tail
rotor setup.
6.2.1. Tail Rotor Setup Screen
Use the following screen capture and polar chart to follow the steps below to complete the
tail rotor setup screen for Example 1 as shown below.



6-6 - Tail Rotor Balance 6 Revision 3, Oct 2012
1. In the Name field, enter a name for the setup using the keypad.
2. Press [] to move to the Sensor Channel field. Use the [] key to select the vibration
sensor channel for this setup.
3. Press [] to move to the Sensor field and select a sensor type to be used with this setup
by pressing the [] key.
4. Move to the Tach Channel field by pressing the [] key. Select the tachometer channel
to measure using the [] key.
5. Press the [] key to move to the Tach Type field. Select the appropriate type of
tachometer using the [] key.
6. Press the [] key to move to the Tach Position field. Using the [] key, select the
tachometer position in hours at which the photocell beam strikes the reflective tape
during rotation of the tail rotor. Use the statements below to determine which viewing
perspective to use.
If using a Strobe polar chart for this setup enter the location in clock angle (1-12)
looking from the side the strobe would be used to acquire phase.
If using a Photocell polar chart for this setup, and the location of the photocell is as
specified on the balance chart, enter 12.
7. Press [] to move to the Balancing RPM field. Using the keypad, enter the tail rotor
RPM balance speed for the setup. This speed is only a reference used at the start of the
job. If during the job, a different tail rotor speed is used, subsequent runs will also call for
the adjusted RPM.
8. Move to the Direction of Rotation field by pressing the [] key. Use the [] key to
select the direction of rotation for the tail rotor. Use the statements below to determine
which viewing perspective to use.
If using a Strobe polar chart for this setup, enter the direction of rotation as viewed
from the side on which the strobe would have been used to acquire phase.
If using a Photocell polar chart for this setup, enter the direction of rotation as viewed
from the photocells position.
9. Press the [] key to move to the Number of Blades field. Using the keypad, enter the
number of blades on the tail rotor. The maximum number of blades is 20.
10. Press the [] key to move to the Conditions field. Using the [] and [] keys, enter
the number of conditions. The maximum number of conditions is 3.
Viper 4040 User Manual
Revision 3, Oct 2012 6 Tail Rotor Balance 6-7
11. Press the [] key to proceed to the Maximum Balance Weight field. If there is a
published maximum amount of weight that may be used for balancing the tail rotor, you
may enter it in this block. This is the total amount of balance weight allowable, not the
limit of each balance position. If the Installed Weights for a single run is more than the
maximum allowed, the user will encounter a warning screen to notify him that the
maximum weight limit is being exceeded.
When finished with the main setup screen, press [ENTER].
6.2.2. Tail Rotor Chart Setup

The Tail Rotor Chart Setup screen appears next. Using the tail rotor polar chart found in
paragraph 6.2.1 titled Tail Rotor Setup Screen; fill in the appropriate information as
follows:
1. The name for the chart, EXAMPLE 1, has already been inserted from the first setup
screen.
2. Press the [] key and select the chart type by pressing the [] key. The type of chart for
this example is Irregular.
3. Press the [] key and enter the number of weight positions using the keypad. This
example uses 4 weight positions.
4. Press the [] key and enter the first weight position name as TARGET. Using the []
key to change fields, enter the influence co-efficient for this location as 0.60 grams
adjustment per 1.0 IPS vibration, and the move line of 5:45 using the keypad.

6-8 - Tail Rotor Balance 6 Revision 3, Oct 2012
5. Press the [] key and enter the second weight position name of A. Using the [] key to
change fields, enter the influence co-efficient for this location as 5.0 grams adjustment
per 1.0 IPS vibration, and the move line of 10:00 using the keypad.
6. Press the [] key and enter the third weight position name of BLANK. Using the []
key to change fields, enter the influence co-efficient for this location as 0.60 grams
adjustment per 1.0 IPS vibration, and the move line of 11:45 using the keypad.
7. Press the [] key and enter the fourth weight position name of B. Using the [] key to
change fields, enter the influence co-efficient for this location as 5.0 grams adjustment
per 1.0 IPS vibration, and the move line of 4:00 using the keypad.
When completed, press [ENTER] to save the setup.
6.3. Multiple Condition Setups
The following paragraphs will describe the process for building multiple condition setups for
tail rotor balance. Multiple condition setups are used for aircraft that require balancing at
more than one speed and may have more than one balance chart.
Follow the steps below to complete the tail rotor setup screen for Multiple Example as
shown.
6.3.1. Tail Rotor Setup Screen

1. In the Name field, enter a name for the setup using the keypad.
Viper 4040 User Manual
Revision 3, Oct 2012 6 Tail Rotor Balance 6-9
2. Press [] to move to the Sensor Channel field. Use the [] key to select the vibration
sensor channel for this setup.
3. Press [] to move to the Sensor field and select a sensor type to be used with this setup
by pressing the [] key.
4. Move to the Tach Channel field by pressing the [] key. Select the tachometer channel
to measure using the [] key.
5. Press the [] key to move to the Tach Type field. Select the appropriate type of
tachometer using the [] key.
6. Press the [] key to move to the Tach Position field. Using the [] key, select the
tachometer position in hours at which the photocell beam strikes the reflective tape
during rotation of the tail rotor. Use the statements below to determine which viewing
perspective to use.
If using a Strobe polar chart for this setup enter the location in clock angle (1-12)
looking from the side the strobe would be used to acquire phase.
If using a Photocell polar chart for this setup, and the location of the photocell is as
specified on the balance chart, enter 12.
7. Press [] to move to the Balancing RPM field. Using the keypad, enter the tail rotor
RPM balance speed for the setup. This speed is only a reference used at the start of the
job. If during the job, a different tail rotor speed is used, subsequent runs will also call for
the adjusted RPM.
8. Move to the Direction of Rotation field by pressing the [] key. Use the [] key to
select the direction of rotation for the tail rotor. Use the statements below to determine
which viewing perspective to use.
If using a Strobe polar chart for this setup, enter the direction of rotation as viewed
from the side on which the strobe would have been used to acquire phase.
If using a Photocell polar chart for this setup, enter the direction of rotation as viewed
from the photocells position.
9. Press the [] key top move to the Number of Blades field. Using the keypad, enter the
number of blades on the tail rotor. The maximum number of blades is 20.
10. Press the [] key top move to the Conditions field. Using the keypad, enter the desired
number of conditions required for balancing. The maximum number of conditions is 3.
11. Press the [] key to proceed to the Maximum Balance Weight field. If there is a
published maximum amount of weight that may be used for balancing the tail rotor, you
may enter it in this block. This is the total amount of balance weight allowable, not the

6-10 - Tail Rotor Balance 6 Revision 3, Oct 2012
limit of each balance position. If the Installed Weights for a single run is more than the
maximum allowed, the user will encounter a warning screen to notify him that the
maximum weight limit is being exceeded.
When finished with the main setup screen, press [ENTER].
6.3.2. Tail Rotor Condition Setup Screen

1. The name for the first condition will be labeled 1. Use the keypad to change to the
desired condition name.
2. Press the [] key and assign the chart ID.
3. Press the [] key to move to the name field for the second condition.
4. Press the [] key to assign the next chart ID. If the tail rotor requires different charts as
shown above, the IDs will be 1 and 2. If all conditions use the same chart all of the ID
numbers will be 1.
5. Continue assigning names and chart IDs until all conditions are defined.
6. Press the [] key and if there is more than one chart ID specified the Soln: toggle field
will appear. The three choices are All, Max, and LSQ (Least Mean Square). If
All is selected the analyzer will present a solution for each of the charts. If Max is
selected the analyzer will present a single solution for the condition that recorded the
highest vibration reading. If LSQ is selected the analyzer will present a solution that
will lower vibration levels at all conditions.
Press the [ENTER] key to continue.
Viper 4040 User Manual
Revision 3, Oct 2012 6 Tail Rotor Balance 6-11
6.3.3. -First Condition Tail Rotor Chart Setup Screen
3 9
10 2
4
12
1
5
7
8
11
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
1.0
"IPS"
1
.
0
.
9
.
8
.
7
.
6
.
5
.
4
.
3
.
2
"
I
P
S
"
1
.
0
.
9
.
8
.
7
.
6
.
5
.
4
.
3
.
2
"
I
P
S
"
6
80% Balance Chart
100 50 0 50 100
1
0
0
5
0
0
5
0
1
0
0
+ C + A
+

B
+
T
a
r
g
e
t

The Tail Rotor Chart Setup screen for the first condition (80%) appears next. Using the tail
rotor polar chart above, fill in the appropriate information as follows:
1. The name for the chart, 80%, has already been inserted from the Tail Rotor Condition
Setup screen.
2. Press the [] key and select the chart type by pressing the [] key. The type of chart for
this example is Regular.
3. Press the [] key and enter the number of weight positions using the keypad. This
example uses 4 weight positions.

6-12 - Tail Rotor Balance 6 Revision 3, Oct 2012
4. Press the [] key to enter the grams per IPS influence for the tail rotor. This example
uses 100.00 grams.
5. Press the [] key and enter the first weight position name as TARGET.
6. Press the [] key and enter the Add @ move line for weight placement on the
TARGET blade as 12:00.
7. Press the [] key and enter the second weight position name of A.
8. Press the [] key and enter the Add @ move line for weight placement on the A
blade as 3:00.
9. Press the [] key and enter the next blade name as B.
10. Press the [] key and enter the last blade name as C.
Press [ENTER] to continue to the next chart.
6.3.4. Second Condition Tail Rotor Chart Setup Screen
The Tail Rotor Chart Setup screen for the second condition (100%) appears next. Using the
tail rotor polar chart, fill in the appropriate information as follows:

Viper 4040 User Manual
Revision 3, Oct 2012 6 Tail Rotor Balance 6-13
3 9
10 2
4
12
1
5
7
8
11
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
1.0
"IPS"
1
.
0
.
9
.
8
.
7
.
6
.
5
.
4
.
3
.
2
"
I
P
S
"
1
.
0
.
9
.
8
.
7
.
6
.
5
.
4
.
3
.
2
"
I
P
S
"
6
100% Balance Chart
100 50 0 50 100
1
0
0
5
0
0
5
0
1
0
0
+ B + Target
+

C
+

A

1. The name for the chart, 100%, has already been inserted from the Tail Rotor
Condition Setup screen
2. Press the [] key and select the chart type by pressing the [] key. The type of chart for
this example is Regular.
3. Press the [] key and enter the number of weight positions using the keypad. This
example uses 4 weight positions.
4. Press the [] key to enter the grams per IPS influence for the tail rotor. This example
uses 100.00 grams.
5. Press the [] key and enter the first weight position name as TARGET.
6. Press the [] key and enter the Add @ move line for weight placement on the
TARGET blade as 3:00.
7. Press the [] key and enter the second weight position name of A.
8. Press the [] key and enter the Add @ move line for weight placement on the A
blade as 12:00.
9. Press the [] key and enter the next blade name as B.
10. Press the [] key and enter the last blade name as C.
Press [ENTER] to continue to the next chart, if necessary.

6-14 - Tail Rotor Balance 6 Revision 3, Oct 2012
6.4. Tail Rotor Balance Process

The following paragraphs present the tail rotor balance process and its associated screens. It
is intended to familiarize the user with the data acquisition and correction capabilities of the
Viper 4040.
Prior to starting a new tail rotor balance job, you must first select the Tail Rotor Balance
option from the main menu by using the [] key and press [ENTER].
6.4.1. Starting a New Job

Selecting Start J ob from the Tail Rotor Balance banner screen allows you to begin a tail
rotor balance job. When you select this option, one of three screens will appear next
Viper 4040 User Manual
Revision 3, Oct 2012 6 Tail Rotor Balance 6-15
depending on whether you are using the tail rotor function for the first time, have previously
defined tail rotor setups, or have a previously started job stored in the analyzer.
If you are using the analyzer for the first time, the Tail Rotor Setup banner screen will
appear allowing you to define a new tail rotor setup to use. Refer to paragraph 6.2 Tail
Rotor Setup for detailed instructions on defining a setup.
If you have previously saved setups stored in the analyzers memory, a screen displaying
the list of setups will be displayed. You can then select a setup from this list to use for the
job. Proceed to paragraph 6.4.2 Setup List.
If another job was already in progress but not completed, the Incomplete J ob banner
screen will be displayed and the analyzer will present a message prompting you to verify
that you wish to finish the incomplete job or begin a new job. The screen will display the
message; The last job performed is incomplete. Do you want to RESUME work on it?
If you wish to return to the unfinished job, press the [F1] Yes key and you will be
returned to the point where the in-progress job was stopped and allowed to complete it. If
you wish to continue with starting a new job, press the [F5] No key, and the screen will
then display the Setup List for selection of a setup to use for the new job. Proceed to
paragraph 6.4.2 Setup List.
6.4.2. Setup List

The setup list presents the stored tail rotor setups in analyzer memory. Select the setup you
wish to use by highlighting the name of the setup using the [] key and pressing [ENTER]. If
the setup you need is not present, press the [F1] New key to proceed to the Tail Rotor
Setup screen as outlined in paragraph 6.2. If a similar setup is in the list, you can use the
[F4] key to Copy this setup, change the setup name, and make the desired changes.

6-16 - Tail Rotor Balance 6 Revision 3, Oct 2012
6.4.3. - Job Identification

The J ob Identification banner screen appears next allowing entry of the customer name,
A/C registration, and A/C total time. This information is optional, but it is suggested that at
least a customer name be entered, as it will aid in identifying the job for future use.
If the analyzer has been used previously, a list of customer names will have been stored and
are accessed by pressing the [F1] Names key. A name can then be selected from this list for
use with the new job.
When finished, press [ENTER].
6.4.4. Connect Sensors

Viper 4040 User Manual
Revision 3, Oct 2012 6 Tail Rotor Balance 6-17
The Connect Sensors banner screen will be displayed next. Messages that appear on this
screen prompt you to perform the physical installation and connection of the tachometer and
vibration sensors to the input ports you specified in the applicable setup.
You must use the vibration sensor installation location as specified by the applicable
polar chart. The orientation of the sensor is key to the accuracy of the chart, if the sensor
is installed in a direction other than that specified, the phase (clock) angle will be
incorrect and any solution will not be accurate.
Tach Power need not be ON before leaving this screen. The option simply exists for
installing and checking alignment of the reflective tape and PhotoTach. When completed,
press [ENTER].
6.4.5. Start Aircraft

The Start Aircraft screen appears. The current run number is displayed at the top of the
screen, followed by both the current and desired speed in RPM. The differential speed is also
displayed. The [F2] Swap J ob key can be used to return directly to the Main Menu without
rebooting the analyzer. When the current speed matches the desired speed, press [ENTER] to
begin acquiring the measurement.

6-18 - Tail Rotor Balance 6 Revision 3, Oct 2012
6.4.6. Select Tail Rotor Condition Screen

The Select Tail Rotor Condition screen allows the user to select which condition he would
like to take balance readings from. This screen will only appear in Multiple Condition
balance runs. In a single condition run, the next screen to appear is the Data Acquisition
screen, proceed to paragraph 6.4.7.
Use the [] key to highlight the proper condition and press [ENTER] to begin gathering data
for that condition.
6.4.7. Data Acquisition

Viper 4040 User Manual
Revision 3, Oct 2012 6 Tail Rotor Balance 6-19
The data acquisition screen will appear next, displaying the current and averaged rotor speed,
vibration amplitude (IPS), and phase angle (in clock format). There will also be a numeric
error indication associated with the averaged measurement. The numeric error value will
typically lower rapidly when the amplitude of vibration is high.

The top line of this screen can display three different status messages. The messages are:
Waiting for Data This message is displayed until in-range RPM, IPS, and Phase Angle
readings are recorded by the analyzer. The only way to exit the screen while this message is
displayed is to use the [BACKUP] key.
Acquiring Data This message is displayed during data acquisition. As long as the data
remains in-range, the analyzer will add each new sample to the running average. The only
way to exit the screen while this message is displayed is to use the [BACKUP] key.

Complete! Press ENTER This message will appear when a minimum number of consistent
samples have been collected. Allow the unit to collect data as long as the error continues to
decrease. This will insure you have the most accurate data possible. Use the [ENTER] key
to exit this screen and store the reading.

The text below the Current heading indicates the RPM, IPS, and Phase Angle from the
latest collect vibration sample. These values will change as the individual readings are
collected. The RPM will be the currently recorded speed value. For Run 1 the RPM
heading itself will blink HIGH or LOW if the current RPM is more than +/- 200 RPM
from the RPM defined in a Fan/Turbine Balance setup. For Run 2, the HIGH/LOW warning
will appear if the value is +/- 50 RPM from the value recorded during Run 1.
NOTE:
When the amplitude reaches a lower level (Approx. < 0.05 IPS) the numeric error may remain
high. This is a normal response and is not cause for alarm.
Pressing the [F1] Reset key will restart the data acquisition process. This may be
performed as a means of validating the quality of a measurement. If, after the Reset key
is pressed, the average measurement does not return to approximately the same value
shown before, the quality of the measurement may be questionable. If this occurs, repeat
the averaging process and try it again until the measurement values are similar both
before and after resetting.
When the error has reached its lowest point, press [ENTER] to stop acquisition and
continue the job.
If performing a tail rotor balance job consisting of more than one condition, the Select
Aircraft Condition screen will appear. Select the condition desired and press [ENTER].
When data has been collected at all of the conditions, the condition boxes will have Xs
showing that data has been collected.

6-20 - Tail Rotor Balance 6 Revision 3, Oct 2012

After data has been collected press the [F1] End Run.
6.4.8. - Shut Down Engines

A screen directing you to shut down the engine(s) will appear next. You can use the [F2]
Swap J ob key to return directly to the Main Menu without rebooting the analyzer. Shut
down and press [F5] Continue to proceed.
Viper 4040 User Manual
Revision 3, Oct 2012 6 Tail Rotor Balance 6-21
6.4.9. Review Prior Run(s) Data

The Review Prior Run(s) Data screen appears. This will allow you to review the data just
acquired as well as all prior run data (if any has been taken).
If you wish to re-acquire the current run data, press the [F1] Retake #1 key.
If the setup has more than one condition, press the [F2] Next Cond key to view the data
for the second condition.
When finished reviewing, press [ENTER] to continue to the solution process.
6.4.10. Tail Rotor Suggested/Installed Weights Screen


6-22 - Tail Rotor Balance 6 Revision 3, Oct 2012
The T/R Suggested / Installed Weights screen appears displaying the suggested adjustments
and providing for input of the actual changes made to the tail rotor prior to the next run. It is
extremely important that these changes are entered, as they will be used to update the
influence co-efficient for the next run. Use the keypad to enter changes. If weight is removed
from a location, use the negative symbol [-] when entering the adjustment performed.
Pressing the [F1] Suggested key will return any Installed field that has been edited to
the original values presented by the analyzer.
Pressing the [F2] None key will delete all Installed entries. This function is used
when an adjustment is to be skipped on the current run.
Pressing the [F3] Re-Solve key will allow you to find an alternate solution. This may
be used when weight is already attached to the tail rotor or the suggested weights are
smaller than the minimum hole weight. See below for instructions on using the Re-
Solve feature.
Pressing the [F5] Quit J ob key will exit the current job and store it as complete.
Warning
Using the [F5] Quit Job function will close the job and not allow you the resume option at a
later time. If you wish to pause the job temporarily, press the Main Menu key or simply turn
the analyzer off. You may then use the Resume function to complete the job.
When you have finished entering the adjustments performed, press [ENTER] to continue to
the next run.

6.4.11. - Tail Rotor Re-Solve Feature
The [F3] Re-Solve key will allow you to find an alternate solution. This may be used when
weight is already attached to the tail rotor or the suggested weights are smaller than the
minimum hole weight. For instance, in the example below, the attaching nut and bolt weigh
3.9 grams. This is larger than either of the suggested weights. In this case, press the [F3]
Re-Solve key and follow the instructions below.

Using the keypad, record the actual weight(s) installed between runs and their location. If
you choose to remove weight from an opposite or alternate position, enter the negative
adjustment. Do this by moving the highlight to the appropriate field, press the [SPACE+/-]
key to produce a (-).

Using the screen below as an example, the suggested weight installation is to add 2.5 Grams
to the #6 weight hole location and to add 2.8 Grams to the #7 weight hole location. This is
shown on the top line of the screen, directly below Run 1 Suggestion:

In the example below, the closest matching weight combination was to add 2.5 Grams to the
#6 weight hole location and to add 3.0 Grams to the #7 weight hole location. This change
was made on the tail rotor and entered into the analyzer adjacent to the appropriate weight
Viper 4040 User Manual
Revision 3, Oct 2012 6 Tail Rotor Balance 6-23
hole locations under the Enter Installed Wts portion of the screen. This adjustment will
only be possible if there is already attaching hardware in holes #6 and #7. If this is not the
case continue below.

In the example above, the suggested weight is smaller than the minimum weight; a bolt and
nut, which are required to attach hardware (attach hdw). The weight of this hardware must be
included in the final weight installation. In this case, press the [F3] Re-Solve key to find an
alternate solution. The screen below will appear. In the Min Hole Wt (inc attach hdw):
line, enter the value of the attaching hardware. In the example below, the attaching nut and
bolt weigh 3.9 grams. To re-solve the solution simply compensating for the minimum hole
weight, press [ENTER] to display the new solution. If there are existing weights on the tail
rotor continue below to obtain the solution optimized for both the weight removal and the
minimum hole weight requirements.

The example below shows the procedure for removing any weights already installed on the
tail rotor. After entering the required minimum hole weight, press the [] key to move to the
next field. Weigh any weights that are currently installed on the tail rotor. In the example
below there were 4.5 grams in the #3 weight hole and 3.9 grams in the #7 hole. These

6-24 - Tail Rotor Balance 6 Revision 3, Oct 2012
weights are removed to leave the tail rotor free of weight. Press the [SPACE+/-] key once to
enter the negative sign before the removed weight value. When all weights have been
weighed, removed from the tail rotor and entered into the appropriated field, press the
[ENTER] key to re-solve the balance solution.

Now, the solution presented on the top half of the T/R Suggested/Installed Weights screen
below Run 1 Suggestion: will be the minimum weight required in the minimum number of
holes allowing for the attaching hardware. These weights may not be in adjacent holes. This
is necessary to provide the weight influence at the optimum location on the tail rotor.
Every attempt should be made to match the suggested weight value. If it is not possible to
match the suggestion exactly, match the weight as closely as possible. Enter the values
actually placed on the tail rotor in the table at the bottom of the screen, under Enter Installed
Weights. Use the [] [] key to move from field to field.

Viper 4040 User Manual
Revision 3, Oct 2012 6 Tail Rotor Balance 6-25
6.5. Tail Rotor Manage Data Functions
The tail rotor Review J ob function also now presents chart information, correction history,
and influence co-efficient for each job. The following paragraphs will describe the new
screens and the navigation steps to review this information.
6.5.1. View Tail Rotor Balance

After selecting to review a job, the View T/R Balance screen appears showing the run
number, RPM at which the data was acquired, amplitude and clock angle of the vibration, and
suggested, as well as the installed, corrections to the rotor. To view a different run number,
press the [] or [] keys. To view the chart information for the job, press the [F1] Chart
key and refer to paragraph 6.5.2.
6.5.2. View Tail Rotor Chart
The View T/R Chart screen consists of multiple parts; the first shows the chart name, chart
type, default grams per inch influence, name and adjustment ratio of each blade position
(below top). The second gives the influence co-efficient and phase angle rotation changes for
each run (below bottom). Any additional charts will have similar screens to view. Pressing
[F5] Continue will progress through all available screens for all conditions.
When returned to the View T/R Balance screen, paragraph 6.5.1, press [ENTER] to return
to the Manage Data screen.

6-26 - Tail Rotor Balance 6 Revision 3, Oct 2012




Chapter 7
Fan/Turbine Balance
and Fan Blade Optimizer
(Revision 3.02, Oct 2012)
Fan/Turbine Balance is an analyzer function that is accessed from the analyzers Main
Menu banner screen as shown in the illustration below. Selecting this function from the main
menu brings up the J obs and Setups banner screen menu (also shown below). Each of the
listings on this banner screen menu is an option within the function. Descriptions of each of
these options follow, along with the information required to complete the menu screens
within the options, and the steps necessary to perform the fan balance function.

7.1. Fan/Turbine Balance
7.1.1. Selecting Start J ob from the J obs and Setups banner screen allows you to begin
a new fan trim balance job. When you select this option, one of three screens will
appear depending on whether you are: 1) Starting a new job with no fan setups
previously defined in the analyzers memory; 2) Starting a new job with previously

7-2 Fan Balance 7
defined fan setups available in the analyzers memory; or 3) Resuming an incomplete
fan job being held in the analyzers memory.

7.1.2. Setup List. If you are starting a new job with previously defined setups available in
the analyzers memory, the screen will automatically display the Select Setup List
banner screen similar to the one shown below. The actual setup names will be those
which you have entered into your analyzer.

7.1.3. Fan/Turbine Balance Setup Screen. If you are starting a new job with no setups
previously defined in the analyzers memory, the screen will automatically display
the Fan/Turbine Balance Setup banner screen shown below. See paragraph 7.1.6 for
step-by-step instructions on completing the Fan/Turbine Balance Setup.
Viper 4040 User Manual
7 Fan Balance 7-3

7.1.4. Incomplete J ob. If you are resuming an incomplete job being held in the analyzers
memory, the opportunity to do so is presented immediately following the Start J ob
selection. The screen displays the message as shown below. If you press the [F1]
Yes key, the analyzer will return you to the last logical in-progress step of the job.
If you press the [F5] No key, the analyzer will proceed as described in the two
examples above, depending on your circumstances.

7.1.5. Fan/Turbine Balance Setup. The Fan/Turbine Balance Setup banner screen
allows you to define and store a Fan/Turbine Balance Setup. The Fan/Turbine
Balance Setup banner screen displays fill-in and selection fields. The fill-in fields
have squared off ends ([ ]). These fields are filled in using inputs from the analyzer
keypad. The selection fields have pointed ends (<>). These fields have two or more
preset values that are selected by using the [] and [] keys. Navigate between the
fields on this screen using the [] and [] keys. (Refer to Chapter 3, Using the
Model 4040 Viper Analyzer if you are unfamiliar with using the keypad or
inputting data.)

7-4 Fan Balance 7
Complete the Fan/Turbine Balance Setup screen per the following example.
7.1.6. Complete the Fan/Turbine Balance Setup. To complete the Fan/Turbine Balance
Setup banner screen (as shown below), do the following:

7.1.6.1. In the Name field, enter a name for this setup using the keypad. (Refer to
Chapter 3, Using the Model 4040 Viper Analyzer if you are unfamiliar with
using the keypad.) The name you choose will aid you in differentiating this setup
from other stored setups should you choose to use or review it at a later time. The
name should be one of your choosing which will be easily recognized and
associated with this setup such as Citation 10, Lear 45, or CF34-3A.
7.1.6.2. Using the [] key, move down to the Eng Rotation field. Use the [] to select
the direction of engine rotation. The choices in this field are CW for clockwise or
CCW for counter clockwise.
7.1.6.3. Using the [] key, move to the Viewed From: field. This field is used to define
the Engine Rotation perspective. The two available perspectives are <FLA>
(Forward Looking Aft) and <ALF>(Aft Looking Forward). The <FLA>
perspective is determined by standing in front of the engine and noting the
direction the fan rotates as viewed looking back into the intake. The <ALF>
perspective is determined by noting the direction the fan/turbine rotates as viewed
from behind the fan/turbine looking forward out of the intake.
7.1.6.4. Using the [] key, move to the Num Baln Planes field. Use the [] key to select
the total number of rotational balance planes on this engine type.
7.1.6.5. Using the [] key, move to the Num Optional Planes field. Use the [] key to
select the total number of optional rotational balance planes on this engine type.
An optional plane is usually one which you may move to and continue balancing
when attempts to balance on the primary balance plane do not yield the desired
results.
Viper 4040 User Manual
7 Fan Balance 7-5
7.1.6.6. Using the [] key, move to the Balance Wt Type: field. The balance weight type
is a description of the balance weights for this application. Use the right arrow key
to select from Actual, Class, or Both. Class weights are balance weights designed
specifically for use with the engine. Class weights usually have a part number for
the set and a designation for each weight in the set. Weights are fixed values for
each individually designated weight. Actual means the weights are not designed
specifically for the engine, such as standard AN washers or slug weights. The
weights are designated as units of measure (grams or ounces) in the solution
offered by the analyzer rather than a specific class weight by name.
7.1.6.7. Using the [] key, move to the Num Class Wt Sets field. Use the [] key to
select the total number of class weight sets available for use on this engine. If you
choose a number here, be prepared to define each class weight on the next screen.
7.1.6.8. Use the [] key to move to the Label Detail Wts: field. Detail weights are those
weights that are installed at the factory and cannot be removed. If these weights
occupy positions normally used for trim balancing, you may label those occupied
positions so that the balance solution will be calculated disregarding those
locations. In addition, if the engine has holes that are typically unusable for trim
balancing, bolts used to attach the spinner for example; this setting can define those
holes as unusable also. The choices here include No, J ob, and Setup. With
the selection set to J ob you have the opportunity to define these holes at the start
of each job. This selection is better suited for engines where the number of
unusable holes changes on each engine. If the detail weight holes are in fixed
locations, you can define these locations by selecting Setup. They would be
saved in the setup and you would not have to indicate them at the start of each job.
Storing the detail weight locations in the setup may also keep you from having to
unnecessarily define the hole layout as Uneven in step 7.1.8.15 below.
7.1.6.9. Use the [] key to move to the Baln Weight Unit: field. Use the [] key to select
g for grams or oz for ounces. You will use this unit of measurement to define
your class weight set. If using Actual Weights, this defines the units of measure in
which the balance solution will be presented.
7.1.6.10. Move to the Num Sens / Eng: field using the [] key. Select the number of
sensors you will use on each engine by using the [] key to scroll between the
selections. This selection will define total number of sensors being used on each
engine for the balance job.
7.1.6.11. Move to the Num Baln Speeds field using the [] key. Use the [] key to select
the number of actual speeds (1 to 9) or Sel. In J ob. The Sel in J ob selection in
this field will allow you to choose the number of balance speeds as well as the
actual speeds themselves in the job. If you always use the same number of speeds
and the same speeds to balance this engine, you should select that number of
balance speeds here. If the number of speeds can vary with each job using this
setup, select the option of Sel in J ob.
7.1.6.12. Move to the Slow Roll RPM field by using the [] key and use the numeric keys
to enter a Slow Roll RPM for this balance job. If no entry is required, leave this
field at 0. A Slow Roll RPM may be required when using proximity probes. With
these probes you may encounter a phenomenon known as runout. Runout occurs as

7-6 Fan Balance 7
a result of the physical properties of some shafts. The Slow Roll RPM is used to
identify what the actual signal is, and then these measured values are subtracted
from all subsequent vibration measurements.
7.1.6.13. Move to the Min Baln RPM: (minimum balancing speed) field by using the []
key. Enter the minimum speed, in RPM, that may be used for this balance setup.
7.1.6.14. Move to the Actual RPM @ 100% field by using the [] key. Use the numeric
keypad to enter the actual RPM of the fan or turbine being balanced at 100% of its
allowable speed.
7.1.6.15. Move to the Vibe Unit: field by using the [] key. Using the [] key, select the
engineering units used for this balance setup. Refer to the LMM if you are not
familiar with the vibe unit used for this application.
7.1.6.16. Using the [] key, move to the Modifier field. Using the [] key, select the
modifier used for this balance setup. Refer to the LMM for verification of required
engineering units and modifier to be used for this application. The Vib
(engineering) Unit and Modifier are used in conjunction with one another to
express a value as in Mils Pk-Pk, gs RMS, or IPS Peak. Refer to the LMM if you
are not familiar with the modifier used for this application.
7.1.6.17. Use the [] key to move to the Solution Iterations:. The Solution Iterations field
is used for varying the weights for the least squares. 1 means take the straight LSQ
solution (minimize RMS vib), more than one means adjust the weighting to
minimize worst case vib. Solution Iterations only appears when the Num Baln
Planes in paragraph 7.1.6.4 above is greater than 1.
When all fields are completed as required, press [ENTER] to proceed.
7.1.6.18. If you selected a number of balance speeds in paragraph 7.1.6.11 above, the
Fan/Turbine Balance Speeds banner screen will be displayed. If you selected
Select in J ob, go to paragraph 7.1.7. The number of speeds (Num Baln Speeds:)
line will display the number entered in step 7.1.6.11.
7.1.6.19. If multiple sensors were defined in paragraph 7.1.6.10 above the All Sensors Use
the Same RPM; line will be present. If the same engine RPM settings will be used
for all balance measurements, select Yes. The analyzer will use the RPM
settings shown under All Sensors on the top example below. Setting this entry to
No will cause the labels to change to Sens 1 and Sens 2 as shown in the
bottom example below. Enter values for the speed settings for the first sensor in
the first column and the speed settings for the second sensor in the second column.
7.1.6.20. Press the [] key to move the cursor to the Balance Relative to Defined Peak
Speed? field. The field will be highlighted and defaulted to the No answer as
illustrated in the first screen below. With the No answer displayed, the entered
speeds are not relative to the highest peak vibration. In this case, press the [] key
to move to the Enter Speeds As N% or Defined RPM field and enter the speed(s)
determined from the fan survey or LMM. You may enter the speed(s) as an actual
RPM or %.
Viper 4040 User Manual
7 Fan Balance 7-7
If the speeds are to be entered based on a vibration survey and relative to the
highest peak encountered, use the [] key to toggle the answer to Yes in the
Entered RPM Relative to Peak: field. Press the [] key and a new field Peak
Speed: will appear as shown in the second screen below. Use the keypad to enter
the speed at which the highest amplitude peak occurred in the fan survey. Press the
[] key to move to the Enter Speeds As N% or Defined RPM field and enter the
variance in speed relative to the Peak Speed entered. For instance, if the Peak
speed was entered as 90 indicating 90% RPM, you might enter three speeds in the
bottom example screen below as -1, 0, and 1 to indicate speeds of 89, 90, and
91 % respectively.
7.1.6.21. Use the [] key to move to the toggle field at the bottom of the screen. This field
gives you the option to use the Actual Speeds acquired during the first run as the
target speeds for all subsequent runs OR use the speeds defined on this screen as
the target for ALL runs. Use the [] key to make your selection.
When all fields are completed and set per your requirements, press [ENTER] to accept and
continue.


7-8 Fan Balance 7

7.1.7. Define Class Weights. The Define Class Wts banner screen (if class weight is
selected in item 7.1.6.6) will be displayed. To define a class weight set, do the
following:

7.1.7.1. In the Set ID field, use the keypad to enter a name or part number for the class
weight set you are about to define. The Set ID should be one that is recognizable
and commonly used by everyone who will be using this setup to balance.
7.1.7.2. Use the [] key to move to the MaxErr: field. Use the numeric keypad to enter
a number that will be used to determine the maximum amount of error between the
suggested solution and the available class weight placement combination. The
lower this number, the closer the two solutions will match, but the longer it may
take to generate a solution during the solution process.
7.1.7.3. Use the [] key to move to the Num Wts: (number of weights) field. Use the
numeric keypad to enter a number corresponding to the total number of different
weights in this class weight set.
Viper 4040 User Manual
7 Fan Balance 7-9
7.1.7.4. Use the [] key to move to the Placement field. Use the [] key to select from
Continuous or Spread. Selecting Continuous will tell the analyzer to match
the suggested solution as closely as possible while keeping the installed weights in
consecutive positions. Selecting Spread will allow the analyzer to insert empty
weight positions between weights, as needed, in an attempt to match the suggested
solution.
7.1.7.5. Use the [] key to move to the Add/Remove field. The only selection in this
field is Remove then Add. You cannot edit this selection at this time.
7.1.7.6. Use the [] key to move to the Name field. Use the keypad to enter a name or
part number to identify each weight in the class weight set.
7.1.7.7. Use the [] key to move to the Wt (weight) field. This field defines the exact
weight of the individual class weights in the adjacent Name field. The unit of
measure is that which you defined in item 7.1.6.9 above. Note that just above the
Name, Wt, and Span fields, is the statement The min wt must be a base wt. This
means that the smallest defined class weight in this table must be a base weight. A
base weight is one that may be used to occupy a position when an actual balance
weight is not required. It may also be the smallest available weight in the class
weight set or have a weight value of 0. Normally, if this weight is required to
occupy each location not containing a trim balance weight, its weight value should
be 0.
7.1.7.8. Use the [] key to move to the Span field. This field defines the number of
positions or weight mounting locations that will be occupied by this class weight.
7.1.7.9. Complete a Name, Wt, and Span field for each of the available fields until the chart
is filled. If you find that you have specified too few or too many class weights, use
the [] key to place the cursor in the Num Wts: field and adjust the number
accordingly. The number of available fields will be changed per this input. If you
have specified more than one class weight set for this setup in item 7.1.6.7 above,
another Define Class weight screen will be displayed, such as the two screens
below, when you press [ENTER] to store the current screen and continue. Repeat
section 7.1.7.1 through 7.1.7.9 for each additional class weight set. If you have
specified only one class weight set for this setup, press [ENTER] and go to item
7.1.8.

7-10 Fan Balance 7

7.1.8. Balance Plane Information Setup. To complete the Balance Plane Information
setup screen(s), as shown below, do the following:
Viper 4040 User Manual
7 Fan Balance 7-11

7.1.8.1. In the Plane: field, use the [] key to select the identifying number for the first
balance plane information. You will complete one of these information screens for
each balance plane as defined in item 7.1.6.4 or 7.1.6.5 above. If you defined only
one balance plane, you will only complete one balance information screen.
7.1.8.2. Use the [] key to move to the Posn Type: field. This field will define the
terminology used to refer to the weight locations throughout the balance job. The
choices in this field are <Position>, <Hole>or <Blade>. After you exit this field
the remaining references will change to the selected term. Consequently, the fields
described in these instructions are identified generically as Position. Your screen
will display the actual term you selected in this field.
7.1.8.3. Use the [] key to move to the Num Positions: (number of weight positions)
field. Use the numeric keypad to enter a number equal to the total number of
positions where balance weights may be attached for this balance plane only.
7.1.8.4. Use the [] key to move to the Num Usable: field. Use the numeric keypad to
enter a number that will define the maximum number of positions that can be used
for installing weight on a single run.
7.1.8.5. Use the [] key to move to the Detail Reduce Usable? This field will let you
define whether the detail weight holes reduce the number of holes usable for trim
balance. In some cases, the Num Usable holes, paragraph 7.1.8.4 above, may be
reduced by the presence of detail weights. In this case, enter Yes and the
analyzer will reduce the number of available trim balance holes by the number of
holes occupied by detail weights. If this field is set to No, the analyzer will not
reduce the number of available trim balance holes by the number of holes already
occupied by detail weights. For example, with this field set to Yes, if there are
15 Usable holes and 4 are already filled with detail weights, the analyzer will only
place trim balance weights in 11 additional holes. With this field set to No the
analyzer will be able to place trim weight in all 15 Usable holes for a total of 19
holes on the spinner.

7-12 Fan Balance 7
7.1.8.6. Use the [] key to move to the RivetWt: field. Use the numeric keypad to enter
a value for the weight in grams or ounces (as defined in item 7.1.6.9 above) of any
attaching hardware used to secure the balance weight to the balance plane.
7.1.8.7. Use the [] key to move to the Radius field. This field will only appear if an
optional balance plane is identified in paragraph 7.1.6.5 above. Use the numeric
keypad to enter a value defining the radius of the weight locations on this balance
plane.
7.1.8.8. Use the [] key to move to the Spacing: field. Use the [] key to select Even
or Uneven. Your selection is based on the equal or unequal spacing between all
positions. An Even setting is used when each individual position is spaced the same
relative to all adjacent positions. The Even selections will automatically assign an
angle to each position number based the other information you provide in this
screen. Any unequal spacing of even a single position dictates that you use the
Uneven setting. If using the Uneven setting, an additional screen displaying a table
will be displayed when you leave this screen. You must define each position angle
and its sequential number on the next screen as shown in paragraph 7.1.8.15.
7.1.8.9. Use the [] key to move to the Position Num Dir: (position numbering
direction) field. Use the [] key to select either CW for clockwise or CCW for
counter clockwise. The direction is based on the order of ascending value or
increasing numbers.
7.1.8.10. Pressing the [] key will move the cursor to the from field to the right of the
Position Num Dir: field. Use the [] key to select the perspective used to view
the direction of the position numbering. The two available perspectives are <FLA>
(Forward Looking Aft) and <ALF>(Aft Looking Forward). The <FLA>
perspective is determined by standing in front of the engine and noting the
direction the position numbers increase as viewed looking back into the intake.
The <ALF>perspective is determined by noting the direction the position numbers
increase as viewed from behind the fan/turbine looking forward out of the intake.
7.1.8.11. Use the [] key to move to the MaxWt/Position (maximum weight per position)
field. Enter a numeric value to define the maximum total number of grams or
ounces (as defined in item 7.1.6.9 above) allowed for installation at any one
individual position.
7.1.8.12. Use the [] key to move to the MaxWt/Plane" (maximum weight for this balance
plane) field. Enter a numeric value to define the maximum total number of grams
or ounces (as defined in item 7.1.6.9 above) allowed for installation on this balance
plane. This is the total of all weight at all individual positions on this plane.
7.1.8.13. Use the [] key to move to the Wt Set: (weight set) field. If you defined only
one weight set in section 7.1.6.7 above, that weight set name will appear in this
field and your only possible choice. If you defined more than one weight set, use
the [] key to select one of the previously defined sets.
Viper 4040 User Manual
7 Fan Balance 7-13
NOTE
If more than one set of cl ass weights is available for this bal ance pl ane, you must
select, and use ONLY one of the class weight sets for the balance plane. DO NOT MIX
CLASS WEIGHTS.
7.1.8.14. Use the [] key to move to the Trial Wt field. Use the numeric keypad to enter
a weight in grams or ounces (as defined in item 7.1.6.9 above) for the analyzer to
use as a trial weight in the first balance run. This trial weight will only be used if
an Influence Coefficient is not stored in the setup.
7.1.8.15. If you selected Even position spacing in paragraph 7.1.8.8 above, use the [] key
to move to the Angle of #1 Posn field. Use the keypad to enter the angular
location of the first weight position as viewed from the perspective selected in
paragraph 7.1.6.9 above. Determine the angle by rotating the fan to align the
tachometer pickup and its triggering device (magnetic interrupter, reflective tape,
etc.). With the fan in this position, use the 12:00 position as the 0 or 360
degrees (index point) and measure opposite the direction of rotation to the angle
of position number 1. For example, if the #1 hole is at the 3:00 position (simply as
viewed on the face of a clock from the perspective selected in paragraph 7.1.6.9
above) and the engine rotates counterclockwise, the angle would be 90 degrees. If
the #1 hole is at the 3:00 position and the engine rotates clockwise it would be 270
degrees. The measurement to position #1 must always be measured opposite the
direction of rotation. If the angle of position #1 is unknown, enter 0. After
entering the angle of the #1 position, press [ENTER] to continue.

If you selected Uneven in step 7.1.8.8 above, the Angle of #1 Posn: field will
not be displayed, but when you press [ENTER] the multiple angle/position number
fields are displayed as shown in the example above. Each position angle must be
defined individually. Using the keypad, complete each field by entering a position
number (No.) and its corresponding angular (Ang) location as measured
opposite the direction of fan rotation as viewed from the perspective selected in
paragraph 7.1.8.10 above. Use the [] and [] keys to move between these fields.
To determine these values, do the following. Rotate the fan to align the tachometer

7-14 Fan Balance 7
pickup and its triggering device (magnetic interrupter, reflective tape, etc.). With
the fan in this position, use the 12:00 position as the 0 or 360 degrees (index
point) and measure opposite the direction of rotation to the angle of each position
number and record that angle adjacent to the position number. For example, if the
number 1 position is near the 6:00 position, the angle may be measured as 174
degrees. On the screen, use the keypad to enter the angle of position number 1 as
174. Then, using the [] key to move to the adjacent field (No.), input the
number 1. Next, measure to position number 2. If position number two is
measured as 156 degrees, enter that value and 2 in the adjacent field. Continue
this process until all angles for all positions are defined. The measurement must
always be opposite the direction of rotation of the fan maintaining the perspective
selected in paragraph 7.1.8.10 above.
Continue entering Balance Plane Information for all planes described in paragraph(s) 7.1.6.4
and 7.1.6.5 above.
7.1.9. Complete the Label Detail Wt Holes screen as follows:

7.1.9.1. If you selected to label the detail weights in the Setup in paragraph 7.1.6.8 above
the next screen to appear will be the Label Detail Wt Holes screen. Use the [] key
to move from hole number to hole number. When the cursor highlights a hole
number that is currently occupied by a detail weight, use the [] key to toggle
between the hole number and an <-X->. The X symbolizes that a Detail Weight is
located in this hole and it is not available for trim balancing.
7.1.10. Complete the Sensor Information screen as follows:
7.1.10.1. In the Eng ID: (engine identification) use the numeric keypad to enter the number
of the engine. Press the [] key to move to the next field.
7.1.10.2. Use the [] to select the Tach Chan (tachometer channel) you will use for this job.
Be sure the channel you select here is the channel you actually connect the
tachometer-input signal to when setting up the equipment. Press the [] key to
move to the next field.
Viper 4040 User Manual
7 Fan Balance 7-15

7.1.10.3. Use the [] key to select the Tach Type: The analyzer will process the signal of
several tooth types, Shifted Tooth - Shfd Tth, High Tooth - Hi Tth, Low Tooth - Lo
Tth, Missing Tooth - Mssg Tth, Adjustable Shifted Tooth - AjSh Tth, as well as
tachometer generators and optical sensors. Optical sensors include the Phototach
and Lasetach. If AjSh Tth is selected the additional Delta(%): field will appear
after Tach Pos (FLA). See paragraph 7.1.10.5 below for more on this setting.
Press the [] key to move to the next field.
7.1.10.4. Use the [] to select Tach Pos (FLA): (Tachometer position, from Forward
Looking Aft). This is the clock position where the tachometer triggers during the
fan rotation as viewed from forward of the engine looking aft into the intake. The
selections are in whole hours from 1 to 12. If you are unsure of the location of the
tach trigger event, use the [] key to select UNK. Press the [] key to move to
the next field.
7.1.10.5. Use the keypad to enter a value in the Delta(%): field. This value will be the
amount that the shifted tooth detection is shifted. Valid entries are from 1.0%
through 16% in signal shift.
7.1.10.6. Use the [] key to select the Full Scale Vibration. This should be the highest
amplitude of vibration you would reasonably expect to see during a typical balance
job. This value should be enough above the maximum allowable vibration for the
engine so that any amplitude in excess of that limit can be readily seen. Use the []
key to move to the next field.
7.1.10.7. Use the [] key to select the Sensor Type you will use for this balance. If the
sensor you intend to use is not among those listed, see Chapter 18, Miscellaneous
Items, paragraph 18.1.2 on setting up a new sensor. Use the [] key to move to the
next field.
7.1.10.8. Use the [] key to select the Ch (Channel A, B, C, or D) where you will connect
the sensor input from the vibration sensor in this same row. Use the [] key to
move to the next field.

7-16 Fan Balance 7
7.1.10.9. Use the keypad to enter a name in the Desc field. The name should reflect the
source, location, or other common attribute of this sensor input. Some suggestions
are FRONT, REAR, VERT, HORIZ, or FFV, FFH. Use the [] key to move to the
next field.
7.1.10.10. In the Pos field, use the [] key to select the clock position of the sensor on the
engine as viewed from forward of the engine looking into the intake. Use the []
key to move to the next field.
7.1.10.11. Use the keypad to enter a value in the Targ field. The value will define the point
where the analyzer provides a suggestion to terminate the balance job. When all
fields are complete, press ENTER to accept and continue.
7.1.11. The Define Fan/Turbine Balance ICFs screen is shown below. This screen will
only appear if an Influence Coefficient has not already been defined in the setup or
if the setup is using Select in J ob for the number of balance speeds. Use the []
to toggle the YES / NO answer field to indicate if you wish to use the same
influence coefficient for all planes. If using a single balance plane, this option will
not be presented. Use the [] to toggle the YES / NO answer field to indicate if
you wish to use the same influence coefficient for all speeds. If using a single
speed balance, this option will not be presented. Use the [] key to move to the
next field. Enter an established or calculated influence for this setup from the
keypad. In the (Balance weight units)/(Vib units) field, enter the units of weight,
grams or ounces as designated in the setup, required to reduce one engineering unit
of vibration to the lowest possible level. In the Deg field, enter the phase
correction in degrees. If you have selected multiple planes or sensors, repeat these
steps for the next screens. When all fields are complete per your requirements,
press [ENTER] to accept and continue.

7.1.12. J ob Identification Screen. The J ob Identification screen will be displayed where
you may enter the optional information of Name, A/C Registration and AC/Total
Time. Complete each field as necessary using the analyzer keypad. If Names have
previously been entered in this analyzer, you may optionally press the [F1]
Viper 4040 User Manual
7 Fan Balance 7-17
Names key and select a name from the stored list of names. When all fields are
complete per your requirements, press [ENTER] to accept and continue.

7.1.13. Engine Information. The Engine Information screen will be displayed where you
may enter the optional information of Position, Engine S/N, Type, TSO, TSN, and
Cyc. Complete each field as necessary using the analyzer keypad. If Serial Nos
have previously been entered in this analyzer, you may optionally press the [F1]
Serial Nos key and select a serial number from the stored list of serial numbers.
When all fields are complete per your requirements, press [ENTER] to accept and
continue.

7.1.14. If you selected to label detail weights in the J ob in paragraph 7.1.6.8 above, the
Label Detail Wt Holes screen will appear. Use the [] key to move from hole
number to hole number. When the cursor highlights a hole number that is currently
occupied by a detail weight, use the [] key to toggle between the hole number
and an <-X->. The X symbolizes that a Detail Weight is located in this hole and it
is not available for trim balancing.

7-18 Fan Balance 7

7.1.15. Fan/Turbine Balance Equipment Setup. The Fan/Turbine Balance Equipment
Setup banner screen, shown below, will be displayed. Install the speed sensor,
vibration sensor, and cables as indicated. Near the center of the screen, the
information message Tach power is off will be displayed. This indicates that
power to the optical tachometer is currently not available to check alignment with
the reflective target. If you wish to do the alignment at this point, press the [F1]
Tach Pwr key to provide power to the optical tachometer being used. When all
installations and connections are made, and tachometer checks completed as
necessary, press [ENTER] to accept settings and exit this screen.

NOTE
The option to turn tach power on or off using the [F1] function key i s for tachometer
alignment onl y and will not affect the tachometers operational condition.
Regardl ess of sel ection, once this screen is exited power WILL be supplied
to an Optical Tachometer.
Viper 4040 User Manual
7 Fan Balance 7-19
7.1.16. The Tach Power may also be checked from the Main Menu option Test Tach
Power as shown below. Highlight the Test Tach Power item and press
[ENTER] to access the Tach Power screen.

7.1.16.1. Each function key on the Tach Power screen corresponds to a Tach channel. By
pressing the corresponding function key, power will be routed to that tach channel
for testing or alignment purposes. Only one tach channel can be powered at a time.
The powered tach will be identified following the Tach Power: statement. To
turn off power to any tach channel press [F5] Off. Exit the Tach Power screen
by pressing [ENTER] or [BACKUP]. Tach power will automatically be turned off
to all channels when the screen is exited.

7.1.17. Start Aircraft. The Start Aircraft banner screen, shown below, will be displayed
with several informational messages. The Run number indicates which run of the
balance job is currently being collected. The second line states Perform FOD
check, start engine(s) per flight manual and set engine(s) to idle. Before starting
the engine, make sure all previously installed trim balance jobs have been removed.

7-20 Fan Balance 7
On some engines, there may be detail or factory installed weights, which must not
be removed. Check the LMM prior to removing weights if you are not familiar with
this engine and the balancing procedures. Start the engine using normal procedures
and allow the engine to warm up to normal operating temperatures. When warm up
is complete, allow the engine to stabilize at speed, make any minor adjustments as
necessary, then press [ENTER] to continue. Use the [F2] Swap J ob key to return
directly to the Main Menu without rebooting the analyzer. Use the [F3] +/- Pol.
key to reverse the polarity of the Tach Signal. If the Current RPM is erratic at a
stable engine speed, press this key in an attempt to stabilize the reading. This option
may be necessary when some of the Tooth settings; Shfd Tth, Hi Tth, Lo Tth, Mssg
Tth, AjSh Tth; are selected on some engines.

7.1.18. The analyzer will display the Set Engine Speed screen. Use the on-screen
indications of engine RPM and Percent to set the current RPM to match the desired
RPM. When the desired RPM is reached press the [ENTER] key to progress to the
next screen. The Set Engine Speed screen will be repeated as many times as the
number of balance speeds selected in paragraph 7.1.6.11 above.

Viper 4040 User Manual
7 Fan Balance 7-21
7.1.19. A data acquisition screen similar to the one shown below will be displayed. If you
are unfamiliar with reading this screen, see Chapter 20 of this manual, Reading
Spectrum and Scales. Allow the analyzer to average the acquired data until the
indications are stable. The term STABLE is used here to indicate that the Average
indications are not widely fluctuating and that the Error indication is as low as
possible and not increasing. Press [F1] Reset, to clear the averaged data to this
point and begin the averaging process anew or press [ENTER] to stop the
acquisition and proceed.

The top line of this screen can display three different status messages. The messages
are:

Waiting for Data This message is displayed until in-range RPM, IPS, and Phase
Angle readings are recorded by the analyzer. The only way to exit the screen while
this message is displayed is to use the [BACKUP] key.

Acquiring Data This message is displayed during data acquisition. As long as the
data remains in-range, the analyzer will add each new sample to the running
average. The only way to exit the screen while this message is displayed is to use
the [BACKUP] key.

Complete! Press ENTER This message will appear when a minimum number of
consistent samples have been collected. Allow the unit to collect data as long as the
error continues to decrease. This will insure you have the most accurate data
possible. Use the [ENTER] key to exit this screen and store the reading.

The text below the Current heading indicates the RPM, IPS, and Phase Angle
from the latest collect vibration sample. These values will change as the individual
readings are collected. The RPM will be the currently recorded speed value. For
Run 1 the RPM heading itself will blink HIGH or LOW if the current RPM is
more than +/- 200 RPM from the RPM defined in a Fan/Turbine Balance setup. For
Run 2, the HIGH/LOW warning will appear if the value is +/- 50 RPM from the
value recorded during Run 1.

Use the [F1] Reset key as a way to validate the measurement or to reset the
average. Use the [F3] +/- Pol. key to reverse the polarity of the Tach Signal. If
the Current RPM is erratic at a stable engine speed, press this key in an attempt to
stabilize the reading. This option may be necessary when some of the Tooth
settings; Shfd Tth, Hi Tth, Lo Tth, Mssg Tth, AjSh Tth; are selected on some
engines.
NOTE
While collecting data, if the amplitude i s high, the Error number will decrease toward
and possible to 0.00 very rapidl y. This indicates the numbers of errors in the
indication are averaged out. As the ampl itude is decreased in the bal ancing process
on subsequent runs, the Error indication may not drop as rapidl y and will most likel y
not reach a 0.00 reading because the ampl itude is so low. In lower amplitude
situations, watch for the Error indication to be stable as an indication of acceptable
data rather than waiting for it to decrease further.

7-22 Fan Balance 7

7.1.20. Shut Down Engines. The screen will display the message Shut Down engine(s) per
flight manual instructions. Press [F2] Swap J ob to return directly to the Main
Menu without rebooting the analyzer. Press the [F5] Continue key to
acknowledge the message and shut down the engine(s).

7.1.21. Review Prior Run(s) Data. The Review Prior Run(s) Data screen, shown below,
will be displayed showing the RPM, Vib (amplitude) and Deg (phase angle)
collected on all runs up to this point. Pressing the [] or [] keys will allow you to
navigate through the readings from all runs of the current job. Use the text on the
first line to determine the run number. While viewing the current run, the currently
active RPM field will have its color scheme inverted. Use the [] and [] keys to
move the highlighted field. To re-take measurements for the current speed, press the
[F1] RetakeOne key. To retake readings for all speeds, use the [F2] RetakeAll
key. Press [ENTER] to accept the current measurements and continue.
Viper 4040 User Manual
7 Fan Balance 7-23

7.1.22. The Fan/Turbine Suggested /Installed Wts screen will be displayed. If this is the
first suggested weight screen, the weights will be test weights unless an established
influence was entered in the setup. Notice at the top of the screen that the message
Remove Old Wts is shown. All previously installed weights must be removed
EACH TIME a new solution is installed. This means that weights installed on the
previous run of a balance job must be removed completely before a new solution is
installed. The example screen below shows the suggested installation of class
weights. Identified in the Name: Plane #line as 4096T45PXX (this will be the name
of the default class weight set as specified in paragraph 7.1.8.13 above). The left
column, with a heading of Posn, shows the suggested position (or preferred term
selected in paragraph 7.1.8.2 above) for each class weight. To change the position,
use the [] [] keys to move from field to field. When the correct field is
highlighted, use the [] [] keys to change the value in that field. The center
column, with a heading of Suggest is the Class Weight suggested for that Position.
The right column, with a heading of Install, is the entry for the actual Class
Weight installed in a particular Position. To change the Class Weight installed for
each Position, use the [] and [] keys to move from field to field. When the correct
field is highlighted, use the [] and [] keys to change the value in that field. In
this case, the P01 weights are null weights that occupy positions when no balance
weight is suggested for the position. Near the bottom of the screen, you will see the
Total: Soln =, and the Inst =. The Soln field shows you the exact solution
required to balance the plane. The Inst field shows you the total you indicated you
have installed up to this point. If you do not agree with the Inst, review the screen
again and change weights as necessary. If you have installed the exact weights and
locations suggested, you need only press [ENTER] to continue. You may press the
[F1] Function2 key, to view an additional list of function keys. If you choose to
install no weights, you may indicate this by pressing the [F2] Inst=None key. This
will return all Installed values to the null or 0 weight. If you do not have a
complete set of class weights, press the [F3] Edit Weight key and go to paragraph
7.1.22.1 below for complete instructions. If you press the [F4] Positions key you
will be taken to a second screen that shows the remaining hole locations and
suggested weights. Complete the second screen exactly as you would the first
screen. If you want to stop and exit this job without the option to resume at a later

7-24 Fan Balance 7
time, press the [F5] Quit J ob and the job will be terminated. When all fields are
completed per your requirements, press [ENTER] to accept and continue.

7.1.22.1. The Edit Class Wt Set screen is used to tell the analyzer that certain members of
the class weight set are not available. Use the [] or [] keys to move from weight
to weight. When you reach a weight that is not available, use the [] and []
keys to place an -X- in the field replacing the class weight number. Class weights
marked with an X will no longer be used to calculate weight Suggestions.

7.1.23. If you pressed the [F1] Function2 key in paragraph 7.1.22 above, the list of
function keys will change to the display shown in the example below. You can
return the values in the Installed column to their original suggested values by
pressing the [F2] Inst=Sugg key. This will return all Installed values to the
values listed under the center Suggest column. If you do not have a complete set
of class weights, press the [F3] Edit Weight key and go to paragraph 7.1.22.1
above for complete instructions. If you press the [F4] Graph key you will be
taken to a picture of the disc as viewed from the perspective chosen in paragraph
Viper 4040 User Manual
7 Fan Balance 7-25
7.1.8.10 above. This will help you place the weights in the correct
position/hole/blade location. If you want to stop and exit this job without the option
to resume at a later time, press the [F5] Quit J ob and the job will be terminated.
When all fields are completed per your requirements, press [ENTER] to accept and
continue.

7.1.24. Start Aircraft. The screen will again display the Start Aircraft banner screen and
indicate a new Run number. From this point, repeat steps 7.1.17 to 7.1.23 until the
vibration amplitude is reduced to an acceptable level or below the target amplitude
entered in the setup.

7.1.25. When the vibration levels have been reduced to a satisfactory level, press the [F5]
Quit J ob key to complete the job and store any pertinent information back into the
setup. If the job went well, the Influence Coefficient (ICF) stored in the setup will be
updated. If certain criteria were not met indicating a good job, you will see the
message below telling you why the ICF could not be updated.

7-26 Fan Balance 7

7.2. Fan Blade Optimizer
The Fan Blade Optimizer is an accessory program that is activated with the
licensing of the Fan/Turbine Balance option in the analyzer. Fan Blade optimizer
allows you to remove a single blade from a fan disk then enter the weight moment
information for the new blade and all other blades currently installed on the disk.
The program will shuffle the entire set and display a new placement location for
each blade in the set to attain the best possible balance through weight distribution.
This negates the necessity for changing matched pairs of blades when one of the
blades is not damaged and still serviceable. The program is not limited by the
number of new blades that can be combined with the remaining serviceable blades
in a set. To use the Fan Blade Optimizer, proceed as follows:
7.2.1. Start J ob: From the Fan Blade Optimizer J obs, use the [] or [] keys as necessary
to select Start J ob and press [ENTER].

Viper 4040 User Manual
7 Fan Balance 7-27

7.2.2. Select Setup List. If a Blade Optimizer setup has previously been entered for the
engine model you are currently working, you may select it from the Select, Setup
List as illustrated in the screen sample below and proceed to step 7.2.4. If your
engine model is not listed, press the [F1] New key and proceed to step 7.2.3. If
no setups were previously entered, the analyzer will open a new setup screen. If
this is the case, go to step 7.2.3 below.

7.2.3. In the Fan Blade Optimizer Setup screen, shown below, use the [] key to move
from field to field and complete the screen as follows
7.2.3.1. In the Name: field, use the analyzer keypad to enter a name for this setup. The
engine model is usually a good choice for this name.
7.2.3.2. In the Number of Blades: field, use the analyzer keypad to enter the total number
of blades on the disk. The field will accept values from 5 to 99.

7-28 Fan Balance 7
7.2.3.3. In the Blade Num Style: Use the [] key to select the numbering style you would
prefer to use for this setup. The choices are <A Z>, which will allow up to 26
blades, or <B1 B99>which will allow up to 99 blades in a set. This numbering
style is how you will identify each blade in the set for weight and later for location
placement.
7.2.3.4. In the Units of Measure: field, use the keypad to enter the units of measure you
wish to use for the blades, such as Inch Grams.
7.2.3.5. In the Max Total Error: field, use the analyzer keypad to enter the maximum total
error for the assembly AFTER the blades have been reshuffled. If you do not know
the maximum allowable error, enter 0.1 which is generally acceptable for all
assemblies. This error is used as the target for the reshuffle and keys the analyzer
to continue calculations until this limit is either met, or cannot be achieved.
When all fields are complete as necessary, press [ENTER] to accept your settings and
continue.

7.2.4. The J ob Identification screen, shown below will be displayed. Use the [] key to
move from field to field. Use the analyzer keypad to enter a Name, and optional
Aircraft (A/C) Registration and Aircraft Total Time. If Names have previously
been entered in this analyzer, you may optionally press the [F1] Names key and
select a name from the stored list of names. When all fields are complete as
necessary, press [ENTER] to accept your settings and continue.
Viper 4040 User Manual
7 Fan Balance 7-29

7.2.5. The Engine Information screen, shown below will be displayed. This is a generic
form used for various analyzer features. Use the [] key to select the Position for
the engine (1, 2, 3, or 4). Enter the optional Engine Serial Number (S/N), Type,
Time Since Overhaul (TSO) and Time Since New (TSN) as required. When the
cursor is in the S/N field, you may alternately press the [F1] Serial Nos key to
select from a list of previously entered serial numbers. When all fields are
complete as necessary, press [ENTER] to accept your settings and continue.

7.2.6. The Fan Blade Optimizer J ob screen, shown below will be displayed. Notice that
there are two columns, one for the Blade identifier (A-Z or B1 B99) and one for
the Weight. There are a number of rows equal to the total number of blades in the
set as identified earlier in paragraph 7.2.3.2 above. The Weight column will
display all zeros (0.00). Use the [] and [] key to move from field to field in the
Weight column. Use the analyzer keypad to enter a value for the selected
measurement type corresponding to the identified blade number. When all values
are entered, recheck to insure accurate entries for each blade. When you are

7-30 Fan Balance 7
satisfied that all entries are correct, press [ENTER] to accept your entries and
continue.

7.2.7. A momentary screen reading Stand-by, Optimizing will be displayed along with
a progression bar. When the progression bar is completely darkened, the process
will be complete (about 30 seconds to one minute) and the Fan Blade Optimizer
Result screen, shown below, will be displayed. This is the screen that displays the
optimal blade placement for each blade in the set to achieve the best weight
distribution and balance. There are now three columns shown on screen, the Order,
Bld (Blade number), and Wt (Weight). The Order is the order of placement; the
blade number is the identifying number of the blade which should be placed in the
corresponding position shown in the Order column. At the bottom of the screen
you will see the Total Error for the new placement. If you notice that any of the
weights shown is not correct, or if you wish to replace one of the blades with a new
blade and its new weight, press the [F1] Edit Wt key. The screen will revert to
that shown in paragraph 7.2.6 above. Go to that paragraph and repeat the process
as directed. Otherwise, when placement is complete, you may press [ENTER] to
exit the screen and turn the analyzer off. A record of the job will be stored in the
analyzer for later reference if required.
NOTE
The screen below is for ill ustration purposes onl y and does not reflect accurate values
for an actual Blade Optimizer Job.
Viper 4040 User Manual
7 Fan Balance 7-31

7.2.8. Once the blade placement is complete, a vibration survey should be completed to
insure the balance is acceptable. If the balance is not acceptable, proceed to the
Fan/Turbine Balance section of this chapter.


Chapter 8
TFE731 Performance
(Revision 3, Oct 2012)
TFE731 Performance EMS is the function that makes the Viper the controller for the
ACES1752B, and 1754 J EDA units. The 1750 and 1752 J EDA will collect
performance data on all TFE731 engine models not equipped with N1 DEEC
computers and currently requires the use of the 17XX series analyzer acting as a
controller. The 1752B will collect performance data on all TFE731 engine models
regardless of the engine computer type and the 1754 will collect performance data
only from TFE731 engine models with N1 DEEC computers. The 1752B and 1754
J EDA models can be controlled with either a 17XX analyzer or the 4040 Viper.

The TFE731 Performance EMS function is used exclusively with the model 1752B
Mini J EDA and 1754 Micro J EDA models. The EMS function is included as part of
the 4040 Viper Main Menu. The EMS function cannot be intermixed as controller for
1750 and 1752 J EDA equipment and will not perform as described here. If you are
not sure what performance equipment and accessories you currently have, contact
ACES Systems. To conduct a performance run using EMS, refer to section 8.1
below.
8.1. TFE731 Performance EMS
8.1.1. Necessary Equipment. In order to use the EMS function of the Viper 4040 analyzer
you must first have the EMS function active on your analyzer. There is no charge for
the EMS function to be activated on the analyzer. If TFE731 Performance - EMS
does not appear on your main menu screen, contact ACES Systems for information
on how to activate this function. In addition to the EMS function being active, you
must have the necessary data logger (J et Engine Data Acquisition, or J EDA) plus
accessories required for the TFE731 engine model that you intend to conduct the
performance calibration run on. The following is a list and short explanation of each.

8-2 TFE731 Performance 8
1752B JEDA with 4040 Viper Analyzer
Equipment Setup
RS232/
RS422
Converter 75-210-0058
uJEDA/1700 COMM
10-320-0258
10-320-0232
AMB Temp Cable
10-320-0262
AMB Press Cable
10-100-0214
AMB Temp Probe
10-100-0355
(Optional)
AMB Press Transdcer
0 % 100 %
DEEC
COMM
BATTERY
LEVEL
FUEL
FLOW
FUEL
TEMP
AMB
TEMP COMM
ECC/
DEEC
POWER
OFF ON
2.35
PRES
3.0
PRES
AMB
PRES
2.35 3.0
TEMP TEMP
10-100-0356
(Optional)
2.35 Press Transducer
10-100-0357
(Optional)
3.0 Press Transducer
Sta. 2.35 Temp Cable
10-320-0242
10-320-0243 Sta. 3.0 Temp Cable
2.35 Press Cable
3.0 Press Cable
10-320-0241
10-320-0241
Hoses
10-100-0349
DB25
DB25
10-320-0310
**SN 88 and higher only
*SN 87 and lower only
Lear 45
10-320-0287
10-320-0288
10-320-0275
10-320-0273
10-320-0331
Falcon 50 (Pre-Aegis Installation)
1
ABC
S Y S T E MS
ACES
2
DE
F
3
GHI
4
J K
L
5
MNO
6
PQ
R
7
STU
8
VWX
9
YZ*
0
( ) ?
Model 4040
F
1
F
2
F
3
F
4
F
5
CLEAR HELP
PRINT
B
A
C
K
U
P
E
N
T
E
R
SPACE
+/ -
.
@ %
#
ON
/ OF
F
MAI
N MEN
U
A B C D 1 2 3 4 COMM
J1
J2
J1
J2
PT 2
N1
DEEC
10-320-0267
N2
DEEC
10-320-0239
To Engine
To Eng.
To Engine
DEEC HARNESS
10-320-0239 J1
J2
PT 2
Air Filter
Function Seletct
J1
J2
P
O
PT
2
To Engine
EEC
10-320-0238
EEC HARNESS
**Falcon 900EX, Falcon 50
(center engine)
**Falcon 900EX, Falcon 50
(side engines)
*Falcon 900EX / Galaxy
10-320-0274
uJEDA to 8002-60 / -62 only
N1 DEEC Comm
Generic uJEDA N1 DEEC Comm
PO
For N2 DEEC and 8002-60\62
N1 DEEC equipped engines
N1 DEEC
8002-60 \ -62
RS422 JEDA COMM-TO-4040
2.35 & 3.0 Pressure
PO
PT 2
DEEC HARNESS

Viper 4040 User Manual
8 TFE731 Performance 8-3
8.1.1.1. Datalogger (J EDA): There are two possible selections for the J EDA unit
required. 1.) The Model 1752 Mini J EDA is a compact designed data
logger, which enables you to collect data from any TFE731 engine model,
regardless of the computer type (EEC, N2 DEEC, or N1 DEEC) and 2.) The
Model 1754 Micro J EDA is a super compact designed data logger that
enables you to collect data from only TFE731 engine models equipped with
N1 DEEC computers.

8.1.1.2. ACES AvTrend Software: ACES AvTrend is the companion software
provided with the purchase of the Viper 4040 analyzer. AvTrend allows
you to dump and store all J obs completed with your Viper 4040 to your
computer. This includes TFE731 performance calibration runs. AvTrend
directs the logger files to the MEDRA Logger Directory where it is stored
until the data is reduced by MEDRA.

8.1.1.3. RS232-to-RS422 Communications Cable: This is the communications cable
that enables the Viper 4040 to control the J EDA unit via a serial
communications link. The communications cable between the Viper 4040
and the J EDA unit includes a RS232-to-RS422 converter and is
approximately 70 feet long to accommodate all known airframe
applications. The RS232-to-RS422 converter is attached in line at the Viper
4040 end of the cable to the DB25 connector. The converter connects
directly to the DB25 end of the Serial Comm cable, which is included with
the Viper 4040 analyzer. The Serial Comm cable then connects to the
analyzer via a 6 pin MS connector and the AUX COMM port

8.1.1.4. EEC, N2 DEEC, and N1 DEEC Comm Cable(s): The EMS software will
accommodate all TFE731 engine types. The EEC harness is connected to
the engine EEC computer and to the J EDA unit. The connection at the
computer also passes the signals through to the engine normally except for
the T5 connection, which is opened by the J EDA unit. For this reason, the
EEC or DEEC harness must never be attached independently to the engine
computer (that is without also being connected to the J EDA unit) to prevent
torching and overheating during engine start. The N2 DEEC harness is used
in the same fashion as the EEC harness. Both the EEC and DEEC harness
are the only cables required to be connected to EEC and N2 DEEC
computers to collect the calibration data. There are several N1 DEEC
Comm cables available as of this writing. You may expect that others will
become available as new airframe/engine combinations are designed and as
older N2 DEEC equipped engines are upgraded to the newer N1 DEEC
computers. The Standard N1 DEEC Comm cable is a generic design that
connects directly to the J 2 connection of the N1 computer, where possible.
Engine/airframe specific cables are necessary for access to the computer
where other means of communicating with the computer are not available.
There are specific designs for the Falcon 900EX, Falcon 50 (Side and
Center Engine), Lear 45, ASTRA SPX/Galaxy, and for the 8002-60 and

8-4 TFE731 Performance 8
8002-62 N1computers. When collecting data from either the 8002-60 or
8002-62 computers, you must also use the N2 DEEC harness cable (10-320-
0239) in conjunction with the 60/-62 N1 DEEC comm cable, 10-320-0274.
The two cables are necessary to: 1) control the computer ( -60/-62 N1 DEEC
Comm Cable) and 2) to facilitate a faster acquisition speed (N2 DEEC
breakout cable) from these older design N1 Computers.

8.1.1.5. Ambient Temperature Probe and Cable: The EMS software design dictates
that you must have an ambient temperature sensor and connecting cable
installed for all EMS performance runs. The ambient temperature sensor is
placed in a shaded area near the engine and secured to prevent ingestion into
the engine or damage due to movement caused by jet blast or wind. The
cable then connects the sensor to the J EDA unit.

8.1.1.6. Optional sensors and cables: Optional Sensors include the Station 3.0
Temperature cable, the Station 2.35 Temperature cable, the Station 2.35, and
3.0 pressure sensors and connecting cables and the pressure hoses to connect
the Station 2.35 and Station 3.0 pressure sensors to the engine. The
Ambient Pressure sensor and cable are also optional but recommended for
data quality.

8.1.2. Analyzer Operation
8.1.2.1. Turn the analyzer ON by pressing the ON/OFF key.
8.1.2.2. From the Main Menu, shown below, use the [UP ARROW] or [DOWN
ARROW] key to select TFE731 Performance EMS and press [ENTER].

Viper 4040 User Manual
8 TFE731 Performance 8-5
8.1.2.3. From the EMS Menu, select Start EMS J ob and press [ENTER].

8.1.2.4. The analyzer will perform a communications check with the J EDA unit and the
aircraft computer. If an error is encountered, the information screen below will
be displayed. Check all cable connections and attempt to start the job again.
Press the [F5] Continue key to acknowledge the warning and continue.

8.1.2.5. The Aircraft Select screen will be displayed. Use the [RIGHT ARROW] key to
scroll through the list of available aircraft. When the name of the aircraft on
which you are conducting the calibration run appears, press [ENTER] to accept
and continue.

8-6 TFE731 Performance 8

8.1.2.6. The Engine Select screen will be displayed. Use the [RIGHT ARROW] key to
scroll through the list of available engine models. The list is restricted to those
engine models that may be installed on the aircraft model selected in the Aircraft
Selection screen above. Double check the engine model as an error in this
selection can make significant differences in the reduced data. If the engine
model installed on the selected aircraft is NOT AVAILABLE from the list,
contact ACES Systems at the number listed in front of this manual. When you
are ready to continue, press [ENTER] to accept your selection.

8.1.2.7. The Nozzle Select screen will be displayed. Use the [RIGHT ARROW] key to
scroll through the list of available Nozzles that may be installed on the engine
model and aircraft selected in paragraphs 8.1.2.7 and 8.1.2.8 above. Press
[ENTER] to accept your selection and continue.
Viper 4040 User Manual
8 TFE731 Performance 8-7

8.1.2.8. The Performance Calibration Setup screen, shown below, will be displayed.
Complete this screen as follows:
Customer Name: Use the analyzer keypad to enter a customer name. Press the
[DOWN ARROW] key to move to the next field.
Aircraft S/N: Use the analyzer keypad to enter the aircraft registration or serial
number as required. Press the [DOWN ARROW] key to move to
the next field.
Fuel Spec Gravity: If you are using a fuel flow meter, use the analyzer keypad to enter
the Specific Gravity of the fuel at 60 degrees F (15.6 degrees C).
NOTE: If you are not using a fuel flow meter, this entry is not
required. Press the [DOWN ARROW] key to move to the next
field.
Fuel LHV(BTU/lbm): If you are using a fuel flow meter, use the analyzer keypad to enter
the Fuel Lower Heating Value. If you are not using a fuel flow
meter, this entry is not required. Press the [DOWN ARROW] key
to move to the next field.
Temp Disp Units: Use the [RIGHT ARROW] key to toggle the desired temperature
display units between degrees C or degrees F. Press the [DOWN
ARROW] key to move to the next field.
N1 Delta (rpm): Use the numeric keypad to enter the N1 Delta RPM. This is the
allowable N1 speed drift from a stable speed, before the data
logger will detect and store an invalid sample. The default is 100.
If wind conditions dictate, this value may be set as high as 300
RPM, however; data quality may be questionable if taken in such
extreme conditions as to require a 300 RPM delta. Press the
[DOWN ARROW] key to continue.

8-8 TFE731 Performance 8
Calib. Reason: Use the [RIGHT ARROW] key to scroll through the available
selections for Calibration Reason. When the Reason you are
conducting the calibration run is displayed, press the [DOWN
ARROW] key to move to the next field.
Engine Hours: Use the analyzers numeric keypad to enter the total Engine Hours.
Press the [DOWN ARROW] key to move to the next field.
Engine Cycles: Use the analyzers numeric keypad to enter the total Engine
Cycles. Review all fields on this page for correct entry then press
[ENTER] to accept your selections and entries and continue.

8.1.2.9. If the selected engine is APR equipped, the following information page will be
displayed. The message varies according to the aircraft selected above. If APR
equipped and aircraft is a Hawker with N1 DEEC 9020-3 or 9010-8000, the
message PRIOR TO START APR MUST BE TURNED OFF is given. If
the selected aircraft is not a Hawker, the message PRIOR TO START APR
MUST BE ARMED AND ON. is given. Press the [F5] Continue key to
acknowledge this information message and continue.
Viper 4040 User Manual
8 TFE731 Performance 8-9

8.1.2.10. If the engine you are running is EEC or N2 DEEC equipped, the information
message below will be displayed. Press [F1] Yes to conduct the bleed valve
check or no to continue without conducting the check. NOTE: If the engine is
N1 DEEC equipped, this message will not be seen as the Bleed Valve Check is
not an option with N1 DEEC equipped engines. This is a limitation of the N1
DEEC design.

8.1.2.11. The information screen below will be displayed. Allow the engine to warm up to
normal operating conditions. When normal operating conditions are attained,
press the [F5] Continue key.

8-10 TFE731 Performance 8

8.1.2.12. If the engine is N1 DEEC equipped, the WARNING message below will be
displayed. The message indicates that the computer is not in the certified, factory
default mode. If power to the analyzer is lost for any reason, the N1 DEEC
control will not automatically return to its default, certified mode. In order to
return the N1 DEEC computer to the default mode, you must cycle the N1 DEEC
power switch any time power to the analyzer is lost during a calibration run.
Press the [F5] key to acknowledge and continue.

8.1.2.13. The information screen below will be displayed. The OAT (outside air
temperature) will be displayed on the screen. Use this temperature to calculate
N1 for the day with the aircraft performance data. When the power setting is
calculated, advance the power lever to N1 for the day. When the ITT is stable at
N1 for the day, press [ENTER] to continue.
Viper 4040 User Manual
8 TFE731 Performance 8-11

8.1.2.14. The information screen below will be displayed if you are running an N1 DEEC
equipped engine. The message is to inform you that all power adjustment will be
made automatically by the Viper 4040 analyzer. While you do not need to adjust
power for the calibration run, you still have the ability to reduce the engine
power using the PLA if necessary, such as in an emergency or because of airfield
traffic. If power is reduced, the analyzer will afford you the opportunely to
continue the run without returning to the beginning of the run. Press [F5] to
acknowledge and continue.

8.1.2.15. The STABILIZATION screen, shown below, will be displayed. This screen will
be displayed while the engine is in the stabilization mode and will automatically
advance to the acquisition mode when the engine is thermodynamically stable.
The length of time this screen is displayed will vary according to the quality of
the data being collected. Note the P/Set: 1 indicates this is the first of the five
power point settings.

8-12 TFE731 Performance 8

When the analyzer switches to the Acquisition mode, the header at the top of the
screen will indicate Acquisition and the data quality indications,
ACCEPTABLE, QUESTIONABLE and UNRELIABLE will be shown to the
right of the P/Set indication. The normal time required for acquiring each point
is one minute. If data quality dictates, the scan period may be extended until the
required number of acceptable data samples is acquired.

When acceptable data is acquired, the screen will automatically display the
review screen shown below. As indicated at the bottom of the screen, use the
[LEFT ARROW] and [RIGHT ARROW] keys to select data points. Press the
[BACKUP] key to retake this power set point or press [ENTER] to accept this
data and continue.
Viper 4040 User Manual
8 TFE731 Performance 8-13

8.1.2.16. The Cockpit Readings screen, as shown in the example below, will be displayed.
The fields immediately to the right of the N1, N2 and ITT names will be blank.
Use the analyzer keypad to enter the values as indicated by the cockpit
instruments. Use the [UP ARROW] or [DOWN ARROW] key to move between
fields. When all fields are complete, press the [ENTER] key to accept and
continue. The screen will then return to the acquisition screen shown above in
8.1.2.15 with the P/Set indicating the next sequential point number. The process
then repeats for each of the five points until all data is collected.

8.1.3. Information Screens
8.1.3.1. During data collection, you may encounter one or more of the screens shown
below. Each screen is displayed if certain events occur. The first of these is Do
you wish to abort the performance calibration? You will encounter this screen
if the PLA is moved during the data acquisition phase; the PLA potentiometer is
producing noise levels above the pre-set allowable level. In either case, there are

8-14 TFE731 Performance 8
two possible answers Yes or No that may be selected by pressing either the
[F1] or [F5] key, respectively.

8.1.3.2. The Information screen below, Reduce PLA slowly until the engine slows
below N2 =XX.X% indicates that you have either selected the [F1] Yes
answer from the screen above, or you have completed data acquisition and
terminating the job. This screen directs actions that are required in order to
return normal control to the N1 DEEC computer. As indicated, the PLA must be
reduced to a point equal to or less than an N2 indication of 92.4%. When the
required speed is attained, press [ENTER] to continue the process.

8.1.3.3. The screen below will be displayed as a last action to be completed for returning
control of the engine to the N1 DEEC computer and the operator. As indicated,
cycle the N1 DEEC power to complete the procedure. Press the [F5] Continue
key to acknowledge and continue.
Viper 4040 User Manual
8 TFE731 Performance 8-15

8.1.3.4. The information screen below confirms that control of the engine has been
returned to the N1 DEEC computer and the operator.

8.1.3.5. The information screen below will be displayed each time the Viper 4040 is
adjusting power for the next point. As stated in the message, you should not
attempt to press any keys during this process. You should also not move the
PLA, activate or deactivate any aircraft systems that would change the power
setting of the engine. This screen is active only when conducting calibration runs
on N1 DEEC equipped engines.

8-16 TFE731 Performance 8

8.1.3.6. The information screen below will be displayed following the collection of data
from the fifth point of a calibration run. A minimum of five points are required,
however, the analyzer will allow you to acquire an additional seven points if you
so desire. If you answer YES to the screen below, you must then define the
parameters of the additional points and manually make power adjustment for the
additional points, even when the engine computer is an N1 DEEC.

8.1.3.7. The information screen below will follow the screen above in paragraph 8.1.3.6
if you answer Yes in that screen. In this case, move the PLA to the desired
power point and press the [F5] key to continue collecting data.
Viper 4040 User Manual
8 TFE731 Performance 8-17

8.1.4. Getting the latest software. As modifications, additions, and changes are made to
the EMS program, the Application running in your analyzer will change. To
check the currency of your application software, contact ACES Systems or visit
our web site at http://www.acessystems.com/applications.htm and look for the
Viper 4040. You may download the latest application at this location. The site is
updated during the first week of each month. The application software can also
be delivered to you via E-mail or on CD in special cases.


Chapter 9
Vibration Spectrum Survey
(Revision 3.01, Oct 2012)
Vibration Spectrum Survey is an analyzer function that is accessed from the analyzers
Main Menu banner screen as shown in the illustration below. Selecting this function from the
main menu brings up the Vibration Spectrum Survey J obs banner screen menu (also shown
below). Each of the listings on this banner screen menu is an option within the Vibration
Spectrum Survey function. Descriptions of each of these options follow, along with the
information required to complete the menu screens within the options, and the steps
necessary to perform the vibration spectrum surveys function.

The Vibration Spectrum Survey option allows the user to rapidly complete and storevibration
surveys using the Spectra Setup feature (described in section 9.1.1 below). With the setup
feature you may complete surveys on several different components without manually entering
the setup data between surveys. Each job is unique and very quick.

9-2 Vibration Spectrum Surveys 9 Revision 3.01, Oct 2012
9.1. - Start Job
Selecting Start J ob from the Vibration Spectrum Survey J obs banner screen allows you to
begin a vibration spectrum survey. When you select this option, one of two screens will
appear next depending on whether you are starting a job from scratch or an incomplete job
still exists in the analyzers memory.

If you have previously saved setups in the analyzers memory, a screen with the list of setups,
as shown below, will be displayed. If no setups are stored, or if you choose New by
pressing the [F1] key from the Setup List screen, the analyzer will display the Spectra
Setup banner screen. If you select a setup from the list, the analyzer will proceed to the J ob
Identification banner screen described in section 9.1.2. Instructions for completing the
Spectra Setup banner screen appear in the following Section, 9.1.1.

Viper 4040 User Manual
9 Vibration Spectrum Surveys 9-3

If another job was in progress but was not completed, the Incomplete J ob banner screen
will be displayed to inform you of this. This screen will also display a message prompting
you to verify that you want to complete the in-progress job or that you want to ignore it and
begin a completely new job. This verification prevents you from accidentally erasing data
from an in-progress job. The screen will display the message The last job performed is
incomplete. Do you want to RESUME work on it?

You must then choose a Yes or No answer by pressing the corresponding [F1] key, for
Yes, or the [F5] key, for No. The Yes answer will return you to the point where the in-
progress job was stopped and allow you to complete it. If you choose the No answer, the
screen will then display the Spectra Setup banner screen so you can program a new setup
or if you have previously-saved setups stored in the analyzers memory, a screen displaying
the list of setups will be displayed. You can then select a setup from this list. If you select
from the list, you proceed to the J ob Identification banner screen described in section 9.1.2.
Instructions for completing the Spectra Setup banner screen appear in the following
Section, 9.1.1.

9-4 Vibration Spectrum Surveys 9 Revision 3.01, Oct 2012
NOTE
The analyzer will store Setups as long as avail able memory remains. If you are
attempting to store a survey that will exceed the anal yzer s memory capacity, the
anal yzer will display a message saying You must delete an item before adding a new
one. Press the [BACKUP] key and sel ect Manage Setups to delete the Setup of your
choosing.
9.1.1. - Spectra Setup
The Spectra Setup banner screen allows you to define and store a vibration spectrum
survey job. As shown in the figure below, some fields in this screen have default values that
appear automatically. You can use this information if appropriate or input your specific setup
information using the keypad. (Refer to Chapter 3, Using the Viper 4040 Analyzer if you
are unfamiliar with using the keypad.) The analyzer will display the Spectra Setup banner
with default values as those shown in the figure below.

9.1.1.1. Spectra Setup
9.1.1.1.1. In the Name: field, use the keypad to enter a name for the vibration spectra
survey job. (Refer to Chapter 3, Using the Viper 4040 Analyzer if you are
unfamiliar with using the keypad.) The Name should be one of your choosing
which you will easily recognize and associate with this job. The airframe or
engine name such as AS350 or TFE731-2 is best to use when naming a
Setup.
9.1.1.1.2. Use the [] key to move to the frequency units (RPM or Hz) field. Determine if
the required frequency units are revolutions per minute (RPM) or cycles per
second (Hz), then use the [] key to toggle between the two selections in this
field.
9.1.1.1.3. Use the [] key to move to the Minimum Frequency and Maximum Frequency
fields. These fields are unnamed, are located immediately to the right of the
Viper 4040 User Manual
9 Vibration Spectrum Surveys 9-5
frequency units filed, and are separated by the word to.Using the keypad,
enter the minimum frequency value, then press [] key and enter the and
maximum frequency value according to the requirements for the job. For
instance, if the frequency of interest is 300 Hz, choose a minimum and
maximum frequency that will place the 300 Hz in the center of the range. The
minimum could be 250 Hz and the maximum 350 Hz for example. Be sure to
set the min and max frequencies wide enough to encompass all turning speeds
you wish to capture. The maximum frequency may be set as high as 30000 Hz
(1,800,000 RPM). You should also consider other factors such as Harmonics. If
you want multiples of the fundamental frequency included in the frequency
range, determine to what extent that need is (1X, 2X, 3X, and so on) then extend
the frequency range to include it. For example, 300Hz is the frequency of
interest, the fundamental frequency. If you want 3X harmonics included in the
frequency range you must multiply the fundamental frequency (300 Hz) X the
harmonic range (3X) and arrive at an upper range of 900 Hz.
9.1.1.1.4. Move to the Resolution field using the [] key. Complete the field by setting
the resolution as required at 100, 200, 400, 800, 1600, 3200, or 6400 lines by
pressing the [] key until the desired resolution is displayed. Unless you are
attempting to separate two frequencies that are within close proximity to one
another, the default 400 lines should more than suffice for general analysis.
Higher resolutions will provide a much sharper image of the specified frequency
band, but also require more time and more memory for acquisition.
9.1.1.1.5. Move to the Average Type field using the [] key. Select the Average Type
by scrolling between the available choices using the [] key. The three
available options are Normal, Expon. and Peak Hold. Normal averaging
displays a running average of the last specified number of blocks of data. All
blocks are weighed equally in normal averaging. Peak Hold averaging plots the
highest or worst case amplitude for all frequencies and holds that value on the
display until a higher value is acquired. The displayed amplitude will not
decrease thus the term peak hold. A peak hold survey will continue to collect
data until you stop acquisition by pressing the [ENTER] key. Expon. will show
the changes in amplitude as they occur allowing you to view the data in real
time. The analyzer collects data until you stop the data collection by pressing
the [ENTER] key. Consult your aircrafts equipment maintenance manual for
specific requirements of a vibration survey or for analysis guidelines.
9.1.1.1.6. Use the [] key to move to the Blocks field. Using the keypad, enter the
number of data blocks you wish to be used in the calculations. The default is 4.
The valid range is 0 to 999. Remember that a higher numbers of blocks, while
providing more reliable data, also require more time to acquire and memory to
store. The default of 4 is sufficient for most applications. This means that four
blocks of data will be acquired before the averaging process is executed. The
analyzer then acquires four more blocks and the process repeats until data
acquisition is terminated.
9.1.1.1.7. Use the [] key to move to the Units field in the Channel A: row (or rows
corresponding to the input channel you will use.). The Units field determines
the engineering units in which the amplitude or Y axis (amplitude) of the

9-6 Vibration Spectrum Surveys 9 Revision 3.01, Oct 2012
spectra will be displayed. Consult your equipment maintenance manual for
specific requirements of a vibration survey or for analysis guidelines. Use the
[] key to select IPS (Inches Per Second), mm/sec (millimeters per second),
cm/sec (centimeters per second), Mils (1/1000th of an inch), Microns
(1/1000000th of a meter), gs (equivalent gravities of acceleration), mbars
(microbars), Pascals, Volts, cm/s/s (centimeters per second per second) or db.
9.1.1.1.8. Move to the Mod (Modifier) field using the [] key. Modifier means unit
Modifiers relevant to the (Vibration) engineering units you selected in step
9.1.1.1.7 above. Use the [] key to select either Peak, Pk - Pk (Peak to Peak,
also called Double Amplitude), Avg. (Average) or RMS (Root Mean Square).
Consult the appropriate equipment maintenance manual for specific
requirements of a vibration survey or for analysis guidelines.
9.1.1.1.9. Use the [] key to move to the MaxValue field. Toggle between the
selections by using [] key. The full scale indicates the maximum amplitude
you reasonably expect to acquire or the maximum amplitude of interest. You
should choose an amplitude value that will adequately display the full amplitude
of any specified limit. If you do not expect amplitudes in excess of what would
normally be experienced for the equipment application, set this field as low as
possible while still allowing sufficient space to display the maximum limitations
as stated above.
NOTE
Encountered amplitudes above this setting may cause the anal yzer
to overload. It is best to set the Full Scale Vibration higher than needed
as opposed to lower than needed for this reason. The overload does not
cause a fatal error. You can recover from the overl oad by pressing the
[MAIN MENU] key and starting the process again from the beginning.
However, avoiding an overload will save you time in the process.
The available selections are: 0.01, 0.02, 0.05, .10, .20, .50, 1.00, 2.00, 5.00, 10.00,
20.00, 50, and 100. This scale refers to the number of engineering units of
vibration amplitude specified in step 9.1.1.1.7 above. Repeat steps 9.1.1.1.7 thru
9.1.1.1.9 for each channel being used to acquire vibration data for this survey.
NOTE
See the Chapter 19, Equi pment and Accessory Setup and Troubleshooting, for
additional information on installing accessory equi pment such as
vibration sensors and tachometers.
9.1.1.1.10. Use the [] key to move to the Sensor field for the Channel A: row. Select a
sensor from the available sensor list by using [] key. A None selection
indicates that you do not intend to use the channel. You MUST select at least
one sensor for any channel. You may use different sensor types for each
individual channel. The analyzer will process the incoming signal and display
the vibration in the units and modifiers specified in 9.1.1.1.7and 9.1.1.1.9 above.
If you are using an accelerometer for the sensor and have the Units set to mils
(displacement), you will require an external integrator for signal processing.
Call ACES Systems for more information.
Viper 4040 User Manual
9 Vibration Spectrum Surveys 9-7
9.1.1.1.11. Use the [] key to move to move to the Desc (description) field. If the Sensor
field contains a sensor selection, use the keypad to enter a description for the
sensor such as FRONT, REAR, or a clock position (12:00 for instance). The
Desc fields are optional .The available field length is 7 characters. Use the
keypad to make an entry in these fields. Repeat steps 9.1.1.1.10 and 9.1.1.1.11
for each channel being used for this survey. Press the [] key repeatedly to skip
over the unused Sensor and Desc fields.
9.1.1.2. Edit Conditions
The Edit Conds or Edit Conditions, (which corresponds to the [F1] key) selection appears
at the bottom left of the Spectra Setup banner screen. Press the [F1] key if you wish to
define conditions for the survey. Defining conditions for the survey allows you to acquire
data in each job for the same optional conditions. If you choose this option, the following
Spectra Conditions banner screen is displayed.

To input conditions, do the following:
9.1.1.2.1. Use the [], [], [], and [] keys to navigate the screen and input conditions
using the keypad.
9.1.1.2.2. In the Condition column, use the analyzer keypad to enter a descriptive name
for up to fifteen conditions. You may define up to fifteen individual conditions
for which you optionally collect and store data. When defined, these conditions
are stored with the setup and are accessed when the setup is selected from the
START J OB function
9.1.1.2.3. When the conditions are completed per your requirements, press [ENTER] to
accept and return to the Spectra Setup screen.
9.1.1.3. Speeds
Press the [F2] Speeds key from the Spectra Setup screen shown above in paragraph 9.1.1.
The Speeds option allows you to measure several types of speed inputs for synchronizing

9-8 Vibration Spectrum Surveys 9 Revision 3.01, Oct 2012
with the vibration input or to provide an entry field for reference where no actual speed input
is available. This allows you to view amplitude, in the selected engineering units, relative to
the speed of the machine or component being monitored. To complete the Speed option, do
the following:
9.1.1.3.1. Use the [] and [] to move from field to field on this screen and the [] and
[] keys to navigate within the field. Make field entries in the fields using the
keypad.
9.1.1.3.2. The column of numbers to the left side of the fields represents the four speed
input channels, TACH 1, 2, 3, and 4. In the Measure field, use the [], and
[] keys to select the type of input. The available selections are: NONE (where
no speed input or reference is used), PULSE S-H (Pulse, Single ended High),
Volts S (volts single ended), PULSE D H (Pulse Differential High), Volts
D (Volts Differential), PULSE S L (Pulse, Single ended Low), PULSE D
L (Pulse Differential Low), and ENTRY (A user entered speed reference).

9.1.1.3.3. The DESC column is the descriptive name for the tachometer input such as
N1, N2, Fan, or HPT. Enter up to five alphanumeric characters in this field. The
description should be one that all users of this setup are familiar with and easily
understand.
9.1.1.3.4. The OFF/100% column is used when the VOLTS selection is made in the
Measure column described above. This field is used to enter the offset if
measuring a DC voltage or the frequency at 100% of component speed if
measuring frequency in Hertz (Hz). Use the keypad to enter the value in the
OFF/100% field.
9.1.1.3.5. In the FACTOR column, enter the multiplier for the DC voltage or Hertz to
attain the actual component speed. If measuring a voltage, the speed in RPM is
equal to OFF +voltage x Factor. If using a Pulse (RPM) input, the RPM is equal
to Hertz x Factor. The analyzer assumes the input to be relative to Hz (cycles
per second) so that an input of one pulse per revolution (one-per-rev) would
Viper 4040 User Manual
9 Vibration Spectrum Surveys 9-9
require a FACTOR of 60 (1 (pulse per-rev) X 60 Hz) to equal Revolutions per
minute (RPM). Enter the factor using the keypad.
9.1.1.3.6. Repeat steps 9.1.1.3.2 through 9.1.1.3.5 for each of the channels required.
When all fields are completed per your requirements, press the [ENTER] key to
return to the Spectra Setup screen.
9.1.1.4. Limits
Press the [F3] Limits key from the Spectra Setup screen shown above in paragraph 9.1.1.
The Limits option allows you to enter the limits relative to the speed, or frequency (X
coordinate of the spectra) which will place a limit line directly on the spectral plot for quick
reference of compliance with operating limits of the machine or component being monitored.
To complete the Limits option, do the following:

9.1.1.4.1. After pressing the [F3] Limits key from the Spectra Setup screen, the five
function key values will change to those shown in the example screen above.
Press the key corresponding to the channel for which you wish to enter limits,
[F1] for Channel A, [F2] for Channel B, [F3] for Channel C, [F4] for Channel
D, or you may exit back to the Spectra Setup by pressing the [F5] Back key.
When you select a Channel the Edit Limits for Channel X screen, shown below
will be displayed.
9.1.1.4.2. In the Edit Limits for Channel X: screen, use the [] and [] keys to move
from field to field and the [] and [] keys to select options or move the
cursor within each field. Use the keypad to enter a beginning limit frequency in
the F-low field. Use the keypad to enter an ending limit frequency in the F-
high field. Select the unit multiplier for the reference frequency in the Unit
field and finally enter the actual limit, in numbers of engineering units of
amplitude, in the Limit field. You may then copy the specified limits to all
other input channels by pressing the [F1] CopyToAll key or to any other
individual channel by pressing the corresponding F key for CopyToX.
When all limits are set, press [ENTER] to accept and continue. The second

9-10 Vibration Spectrum Surveys 9 Revision 3.01, Oct 2012
screen below illustrates an example of how the limit line is actually depicted on
the analyzer screen.
Press [ENTER] from the Spectra Setup screen to finish and save the setup.


9.1.2. - Job Identification
The next screen displayed is the J ob Identification banner screen shown in the following
illustration. At this point you may turn the analyzer off or continue with the job. All
information on this screen is optional; however we highly recommend you fill in as much
information as possible to ease the task of storage and retrieval of surveys from AvTrend and
the analyzers memory. If you have other names stored, you may press the [F1] key to select
from a list of stored names, which will then be entered into the Name field. Enter
information as desired in each of the fields using the analyzer keypad. When all fields are
completed as desired, press [ENTER] to continue.
Viper 4040 User Manual
9 Vibration Spectrum Surveys 9-11

9.1.3. Engine Information
The Engine Information banner screen, shown below, will be displayed. Use the [] key to
select a position number for the engine being surveyed. A serial number (S/N), Type
TSO (time since new), and TSN (time since new) field is available for both an engine
and a propeller so that stored surveys can be traced by either component of the powertrain
system, where applicable. All fields are optional but we highly recommend you fill in as
much information as possible for ease of use in trending, recall, and storage.
Navigate (move) between the fields using the [] and [] keys. When all fields are filled as
required, press [ENTER] to continue.


9-12 Vibration Spectrum Surveys 9 Revision 3.01, Oct 2012
9.1.4. Microphone Calibration
If you have selected to gather data using a microphone, the Start Engine screen shown
below will appear before data collection. You MUST calibrate the microphone before every
use. Differences in temperature and pressure will affect the microphone readings if it is not
properly calibrated. Follow the steps below to properly calibrate the microphone.

9.1.4.1. Press the [F4] Calib to display a list of all channels which are currently configured
to collect data with a microphone similar to the example below. Select the first
channel and press [ENTER]. Continue the process for all applicable channels.

9.1.4.2. The analyzer will display the current calibration settings. Press [F1] Change to
change the current settings.
Viper 4040 User Manual
9 Vibration Spectrum Surveys 9-13

9.1.4.3. Enter the Reference Level, typically in decibels (db), and the Reference Frequency,
in Hertz (Hz), as found on the calibrator. Plug the microphone into the correct size
adapter in the top of the calibrator. Turn the calibrator on and press [ENTER] on
the analyzer.
NOTE
The minimum and maximum Reference Frequency range, di splayed below the Ref.
Frequency cell, is dynamic. If the di splayed range does not include the frequency
found on the calibrator, you will have to expand the frequency range defined in the
setup. See paragraph 9.1.1.1.3 above.

9.1.4.4. After a brief period the analyzer will display the Measurement Level and the
Adjustment that will be applied to the measurement. You can change the
adjustment by pressing [F1] Change and following the above steps again.

9-14 Vibration Spectrum Surveys 9 Revision 3.01, Oct 2012

9.1.4.5. As the channels are calibrated, an X will fill the brackets ([X]) indicating that data
has been collected. When all channels are calibrated, press [BACKUP] to exit the
calibration process and return to the Start Engine screen for the current job. Data
collection from this point on is no different than with any other vibration sensor.

9.1.4.6. As a way to verify the microphone settings, simply take sample data. Keep the
microphone plugged into the calibrator and view the results. The vibration peak
should be displayed within the tolerance of the microphone.
Viper 4040 User Manual
9 Vibration Spectrum Surveys 9-15

9.1.5. Select Aircraft Condition
The Select Aircraft Condition banner screen is displayed. The conditions are those defined
in the Edit Conditions screen (see section 9.1.1.2 above).
Use the [] or [] keys to select the condition you wish to collect. When your choice is
highlighted, press [ENTER] to begin collecting data.
9.1.6. Start Component
Start the component you are checking (engine, generator, gearbox, etc.). When the
component reaches the desired or normal operating conditions (speed, temp, pressures, etc.),
press the [ENTER] key to begin acquiring data.
NOTE
When the spectra is displ ayed on screen, you may press the [] key to produce a
NORMAL CURSOR immediatel y at the highest displayed amplitude frequency. The []
or [] keys may also be used immediatel y to EXPAND or SHRINK the Y scal e.
9.1.7. - Collecting Data
When the spectra is displayed, you will also see four function boxes at the bottom of the
screen (see following figure) corresponding to the position of the [F1], [F2], and [F5] keys
directly below them. The boxes read Options, Pause, Overall and Restart.

9-16 Vibration Spectrum Surveys 9 Revision 3.01, Oct 2012

Once any of these F key options are selected, both the screen and the corresponding F
key functions change. With each selection, the F keys offer different options (e.g., Expand,
Shrink, X scale) for viewing the spectra. The F key functions for viewing spectra are
described in the following steps.
9.1.7.1. Pressing the [F1] Options key will change the [F1], [F2], [F3], [F4], and [F5]
boxes to read Cursor, X scale, Y scale, View, and Cancel respectively as
shown in the figure below.

9.1.7.2. Pressing the [F1] Cursor key will change the [F1], [F2], [F3], and [F5] boxes to
read Normal, Harmonic, None, and Cancel respectively. The functions of
the F keys will continue to change as the screens change.
9.1.7.3. Pressing the [F1] Normal key will produce a normal cursor on the screen
accompanied by an X and Y scale value readout box in the upper right corner of
each displayed spectra (see the following figure). These X and Y values are relative
Viper 4040 User Manual
9 Vibration Spectrum Surveys 9-17
to the current position of the cursor only. The cursor can be moved along the X
(horizontal) axis of the spectra by pressing the [] or [] keys. Hold down the key
for large and rapid incremental changes. The value of the X-axis (frequency) and Y-
axis (amplitude) will be displayed for the current position of the cursor. Incremental
values are determined by the number of lines of resolution specified in the setup
screen.
9.1.7.4. Pressing the [F2] Harmonic key will produce multiple harmonic cursors according
to the specified frequency range. When this key is pressed, cursors will appear to the
right of the fundamental frequency identified by the leftmost cursor. For example, if
the fundamental frequency is 300 Hz cursors will be placed at 2X (600 Hz) 3X (900
Hz) 4x (1200 Hz) and so on until the upper frequency limit of the screen is met.
When the primary cursor (for the fundamental frequency) is moved, the multiple
harmonic cursors will automatically follow the movement and position themselves
at the new multiple of the fundamental frequency. To remove the harmonic cursors,
repeat steps 9.1.7.1 to 9.1.7.2 above. At step 9.1.7.3, press either the [F1] Normal
or [F5] None key and the harmonic cursor will be replaced by your selection.
9.1.7.5. Pressing the [F5] None key will remove either a normal or harmonic cursor if
currently displayed on screen. The four boxes above the [F1], [F2], [F4] and [F5]
keys will return to Options, Pause, Overall and Restart respectively. If no
cursor is displayed when pressing this key, only the box nomenclature will change.

9.1.7.6. Pressing the [F2] X scale key will change the [F1], [F2], [F3] and [F5] boxes to
read Expand, Default, Shrink, and Cancel respectively as shown in the
following figure.

9-18 Vibration Spectrum Surveys 9 Revision 3.01, Oct 2012

9.1.7.7. Pressing the [F1] Expand key will expand the X scale of the spectra, in effect
enlarging the viewing area. You might think of this function as a Zoom Out
feature. The center of the Expanded view will be the position of the cursor prior to
pressing the [F1] key. If the view is already at the maximum range of the specified
X scale range, no scaling change will occur. However, the cursor will be displayed
and the X, Y, and Ovr (Overall) values will be shown in the upper right corner of
the screen. The [F1], [F2], [F4] and [F5] boxes will return to the format described
in step 9.1.7.5 above. If you wish to Expand the X scale even further, retrace the
steps from that point as described in the text.
9.1.7.8. Pressing the [F2] Default key will return the X scale and Y scale to the values
specified in the setup. This is a quick and easy way to return all expanded and
shrunken scales to that default value without the necessity of numerous keystrokes.
If the X and Y scales are already at the setup values when the [F2] Default key is
pressed, the four function boxes will return to Options, Pause, Overall and
Restart. No other changes will occur.
9.1.7.9. Pressing the [F3] Shrink key will lower the X scale of the spectra, in effect
shrinking the viewing area. You might think of this function as a Zoom In feature.
If the view is already at the minimum of the specified X scale range, no scaling
change will occur. However, the cursor will be displayed and the X, Y, and Ovr
(Overall) values will be shown in the upper right corner of the screen. The [F1],
[F2], [F4] and [F5] boxes will return to the format described in step 9.1.7.5 above. If
you wish to Shrink the X scale even further, retrace the steps from that point as
described in the text.
9.1.7.10. Pressing the [F5] Cancel key will cancel the selection and return the F keys to
the format described in step 9.1.7.5 above.
9.1.7.11. Pressing the [F3] Y scale key in step 9.1.7.6 above changes the [F1], [F2], [F3]
and [F5] boxes to read Expand, Default, Shrink, and Cancel respectively
(see step 9.1.7.7 above).
Viper 4040 User Manual
9 Vibration Spectrum Surveys 9-19
9.1.7.12. Pressing the [F1] Expand key will expand the Y scale of the spectra, in effect
enlarging the viewing area. You might think of this function as a Zoom Out
feature. If the view is already at the maximum range of the specified Y scale range,
no scaling change will occur. However, the cursor will be displayed and the X, Y,
and Ovr: (Overall) values will be shown in the upper right corner of the screen. The
[F1], [F2], [F4] and [F5] boxes will return to the format described in step 9.1.7.5
above. If you wish to Expand the Y scale even further, retrace the steps from that
point as described in the text.
9.1.7.13. Pressing the [F2] Default key will return the X scale and Y scale to the values
specified in the setup. This is a quick and easy way to return all expanded and
shrunken scales to that default value without the necessity of numerous keystrokes.
If the X and Y scales are already at the setup values when the [F2] Default key is
pressed, the four function boxes will return to Options, Pause, Overall and
Restart. No other changes will occur.
9.1.7.14. Pressing the [F3] Shrink key will lower the Y scale of the spectra, in effect
shrinking the viewing area. You might think of this function as a Zoom In feature.
If the view is already at the minimum of the specified Y scale range, no scaling
change will occur. However, the cursor will be displayed and the X, Y, and Ovr
(Overall) values will be shown in the upper right corner of the screen. The [F1],
[F2], [F4] and [F5] boxes will return to the format described in step 9.1.7.5 above.
If you wish to shrink the Y scale even further, retrace the steps from that point as
described in the text.
9.1.7.15. Pressing the [F5] Cancel key will cancel the selection and return the F keys to
the format described in step 9.1.7.5 above.
9.1.7.16. Pressing the [F4] View key in step 9.1.7.1 above will allow you to zoom in to
view a spectral plot from a single channel. The function keys will change to list the
Description assigned to each vibration channel. Press the key below the name of
the channel you want to view. Press [F4] View again then select [F5] All to
return to the display showing all of the active vibration channels.
9.1.8. - Storing Data
When you press [ENTER] to store the spectral plot from any screen as described in section
you will be presented with the screen shown below. On this screen you can decide to Store
the data? by pressing the [F1] Yes key. If you wish to retake the data for any reason, press
the [F5] No key and you will be returned to the Select Aircraft Condition screen.

9-20 Vibration Spectrum Surveys 9 Revision 3.01, Oct 2012

The Select Aircraft Condition banner screen is again displayed as shown in the following
figure. Notice that the condition for which you just collected and stored data now has an X
immediately to the left of the defined condition. This alerts the user that data has been
collected and stored for this condition. This does not preclude you from selecting and
acquiring new data for this condition. However, if you choose to store the data, the previously
stored data will be written over and may not be recovered.

At this point you may select a new condition and repeat this procedure starting from section
9.1.4 until all required data is collected. When the last data point is collected the analyzer
will display the screen shown below. Press [F5] Continue to terminate the job.
Viper 4040 User Manual
9 Vibration Spectrum Surveys 9-21

It is also possible to quit the job without data being taken for all defined conditions by
pressing the [F5] Quit J ob key. You will not be able to resume this job at this point. You
will be returned to the Vibration Spectrum Survey banner screen where you may Start a new
job.
9.2. - Resume Job

When you select Resume J ob from the Vibration Spectrum Surveys banner screen menu,
the Incomplete J obs banner screen will be displayed. Incomplete jobs are listed by name,
preceded by an asterisk. Select the job you wish to complete and the analyzer will return you
to the point where the in-progress job was stopped, allowing you to complete it.

9-22 Vibration Spectrum Surveys 9 Revision 3.01, Oct 2012
9.3. - Manage Jobs
Selecting Manage J obs from the Vibration Spectrum Surveys banner screen menu
presents several sub-menu choices to choose from. These choices allow you to manage
previously completed job data you have stored in the analyzer.

9.3.1. - Review
Selecting the Review option presents a list of stored jobs on the J ob List banner screen.
You can select one job for on-screen viewing. When viewing is complete, press the
[BACKUP] or [ENTER] key to exit the screen.
9.3.2. - Delete
The Delete option presents a list of stored jobs on the J ob List banner screen. From the
list, you may select one job for deletion. After making your selection, the Delete J ob
banner screen will appear, asking you to verify your intent to delete the selected job by
pressing the [F1] key for Yes or the [F5] key for No. You may wish to transfer the data
to AvTrend for reference or permanent record prior to deleting. Once deleted, the job cannot
be retrieved from the analyzer.
9.3.3. - Delete All
The Delete All option will delete all currently stored jobs. After selecting this option, the
Delete All J ob banner screen will appear, asking you to verify your intent to delete all the
jobs by pressing the [F1] key for Yes or the [F5] key for No. You may wish to transfer
the data to AvTrend for reference or permanent record prior to deleting. Once deleted, the
jobs cannot be retrieved from the analyzer.
Viper 4040 User Manual
9 Vibration Spectrum Surveys 9-23
9.4. - Manage Setups

Selecting Manage Setups from the Vibration Spectrum Surveys banner screen menu
presents several sub-menu choices to choose from. These choices allow you to manage job
setups you have stored previously in the analyzer.
9.4.1. - Edit
Selecting the Edit function displays the Setup List screen. Select the setup you wish to
edit. The screen will display the Spectra Setup screen. Edit the setup as necessary and press
[ENTER] to store and exit the edited setup screen. DO NOT use the BACKUP key to exit the
screen following changes made in the setup with the Edit mode. You must use the [ENTER]
key to progress to the end of the setup for the changes to be permanent.
9.4.2. New
If you select New, the Spectra Setup screen is displayed. See section 9.1.1 for
instructions on how to proceed from this point.
9.4.3. - Delete
The Delete option presents you with a list of stored setups. From the list, you may select
one setup for deletion. If you wish to delete all stored setups, you must delete them
individually. After making your selection, you will be asked to verify your intent to delete the
selected job by pressing the [F1] key for Yes, or the [F5] key for No. We highly
recommend you download the setup(s) for reference or permanent record prior to deleting
them. Once deleted, the setups cannot be retrieved from the analyzer. If the setup is locked,
indicated by a small padlock icon to the left of the setup name, the setup can still be deleted
but not edited. Setups can only be locked as a function of AvTrend.


Chapter 10
Overall Vibration Surveys
(Revision 3.01, Oct 2012)
Overall Vibration Surveys is an analyzer function that is accessed from the analyzers Main
Menu banner screen as shown in the illustration below. Selecting this function from the main
menu brings up the Overall Vibration Surveys banner screen menu. Each of the listings on
this banner screen menu is an option within the Overall Vibration Surveys function.
Descriptions of each of these options follow, along with the information required to complete
the menu screens within the options, and the steps necessary to perform the overall vibration
surveys function.

The Overall Vibration Survey option allows the user to rapidly complete and store overall
vibration surveys using the Overall Vibration Setup feature (described in section 10.1.1
below). With the setup feature you may complete surveys on several different components
without manually entering the setup data between surveys. Each job is unique and very quick.

10-2 Overall Vibration Surveys 10 Revision 3.01, Oct 2012
10.1. - Start Job
Selecting Start J ob from the Overall Vibration Surveys banner screen allows you to begin
an overall vibration survey. When you select this option, one of two screens will appear next
depending on whether you are starting a job from scratch or an incomplete job still exists in
the analyzers memory.

If you have previously saved setups in the analyzers memory, a screen displaying the list of
setups, as shown below, will be displayed. If no setups are stored, or if you choose New by
pressing the [F1] key from the Setup List screen, the analyzer will display the Overall
Vibration Setup banner screen. If you select from the list, you proceed to the J ob
Identification banner screen described in section 10.1.2. Instructions for completing the
Overall Vibration Setup banner screen appear in the following Section, 10.1.1.

Viper 4040 User Manual
Revision 3.01, Oct 2012 10 Overall Vibration Surveys 10-3

If another job was in progress but was not completed, the Incomplete J ob banner screen
will be displayed to inform you of this. The analyzer will then display a message prompting
you to verify that you want to complete the in-progress job or that you want to ignore it and
begin a completely new job. This verification prevents you from accidentally erasing data
from an in-progress job. The screen will display the message The last job performed is
incomplete. Do you want to RESUME work on it?

You must then choose a Yes or No answer by pressing the corresponding [F1] key, for
Yes, or the [F5] key, for No. The Yes answer will return you to the point where the in-
progress job was stopped and allow you to complete it. If you choose the No answer, the
screen will then display the Overall Vibration Setup banner screen so you can program a
new job setup or if you have previously-saved setups stored in the analyzers memory, a
screen displaying the list of setups will be displayed. You can then select a setup from this
list. If you select from the list, you proceed to the J ob Identification banner screen
described in section 10.1.2. Instructions for completing the Overall Vibration Setup banner
screen appear in the following Section, 10.1.1.

10-4 Overall Vibration Surveys 10 Revision 3.01, Oct 2012
NOTE
The analyzer will store Setups as long as avail able memory remains. If you are
attempting to store a survey that will exceed the anal yzer s memory capacity, the
anal yzer will display a message saying You must delete an item before adding a new
one. Press the [BACKUP] key and sel ect Manage Setups to delete the Setup of your
choosing. It is advisable to transfer setups to AvTrend for storage and, when
necessary, retri eval.
10.1.1. Overall Vibration Setup
The Overall Vibration Setup banner screen allows you to define and store an overall
vibration survey job. As shown in the figure below, some fields in this screen have default
values that appear automatically. You can use this information if appropriate or input your
own specific setup information using the keypad. (Refer to Chapter 3, Using the Viper 4040
Analyzer if you are unfamiliar with using the keypad.) The analyzer will display the
Overall Vibration Setup banner with default values or values entered from the previous job
such as those shown in the figure below.

10.1.1.1. To complete the Overall Vibration Setup banner screen, do the following
10.1.1.1.1. In the Name: field, use the analyzer keypad to enter a name for the overall
vibration survey setup. (Refer to Chapter 3, Using the Viper 4040 Analyzer
if you are unfamiliar with using the keypad.) The name should be one of your
choosing which you will easily recognize and associate with this setup. The
airframe or engine name such as AS350 or TFE731-2 is best to use when
naming a Setup.
10.1.1.1.2. Use the [] key to move to the frequency units field. Determine if the required
frequency units are revolutions per minute (RPM) or cycles per second (Hz),
then use the [] key to toggle between the two selections in this field.
10.1.1.1.3. Using the [] key, move to the Minimum Frequency and Maximum Frequency
field. (These are the two unmarked fields immediately to the right of the
Viper 4040 User Manual
Revision 3.01, Oct 2012 10 Overall Vibration Surveys 10-5
frequency units filed and separated by the word to.) Using the keypad, enter
the minimum and maximum frequency values according to the requirements
for the job.

For instance, if the frequency of interest is 300 Hz, choose a minimum and
maximum frequency that will place the 300 Hz in the center of the range. The
minimum could be 250 Hz and the maximum 350 Hz for example. You should
also consider other factors such as Harmonics. If you want multiples of the
fundamental frequency included in the frequency range, determine to what
extent that need is (1X, 2X, 3X, and so on) then extend the frequency range to
include it. For example, 300Hz is the frequency of interest, the fundamental
frequency. If you want 3X harmonics included in the frequency range you must
multiply the fundamental frequency (300 Hz) X the harmonic range (3X) and
arrive at an upper range of 900 Hz. After you have entered the appropriate
minimum and maximum frequency values, use the [] to move to the next
field.
10.1.1.1.4. The Units field determines the engineering units in which the amplitude or
Y axis (amplitude) of the spectra will be displayed. Consult your equipment
maintenance manual for specific requirements of a vibration survey or for
analysis guidelines. Use the [] key to select gs (equivalent gravities of
acceleration), IPS (Inches Per Second), mm/sec (millimeters per second),
cm/sec (centimeters per second), Mils (1/1000th of an inch), Microns
(1/1000000th of a meter), or m/s/s (meters per second per second) or cm/s/s
(centimeters per second per second). Use the [] key to move to the next field.
10.1.1.1.5. The Mod field is an abbreviation for the unit Modifiers relevant to the
engineering units specified in step 10.1.1.1.4 above. Use the [] key to select
either Peak, Pk - Pk (Peak to Peak, also called Double Amplitude), Avg.
(Average) or RMS (Root Mean Square). Consult the appropriate equipment
maintenance manual for specific requirements of an overall vibration survey or
for analysis guidelines. Use the [] key to move to the next field.
10.1.1.1.6. In the MaxValue field, toggle between the possible selections by using the
[] key. This value indicates the maximum amplitude you expect to acquire or
the maximum amplitude of interest. You should choose an amplitude that will
adequately display the full amplitude of any specified limit. If you do not
expect amplitudes in excess of what would normally be experienced for the
equipment application, set this field as low as possible while still allowing
sufficient space to display the maximum limitations as stated above. Repeat
steps 10.1.1.1.4 through 10.1.1.1.6 for all the channels you are planning to use
during the survey. Then press the [] key to move to the Sensor field.
10.1.1.1.7. Select a Sensor from the available sensor list by using [] key. A None
selection indicates that you do not intend to use the channel and the Desc
(description) field will be skipped. If the Sensor field contains a sensor
selection, use the [] key to move to the Desc fields.
10.1.1.1.8. The Desc fields are optional fields that are not required to be filled in to use
the Overall Vibration Survey function; however, this information will aid you

10-6 Overall Vibration Surveys 10 Revision 3.01, Oct 2012
in differentiating the reading on one channel from another. The Channel A, B,
C, and D descriptions likewise should be a description of your choosing which
you and your co-workers easily understand, such as Lateral, Vertical, or
No. 1 Gen and No. 2 Gen. All other fields are not optional and must be
selected or filled in.
NOTE
Encountered amplitudes above this setting may cause the anal yzer
to overload. An overload will result in spurious harmonics and may cause unusual
termination of the job. It i s best to set the Full Scale Vibration higher than needed
as opposed to lower than needed for this reason. The overload does not
cause a fatal error. You can recover from the overl oad by pressing the
[MAIN MENU] key and starting the process again from the beginning.
However, avoiding an overload will save you time in the process.
The available selections are: 0.01, 0.02, 0.05, .10, .20, .50, 1.00, 2.00, 5.00, 10.00, 20.00,
50. and 100. This scale refers to the number of engineering units of vibration amplitude
specified in step 10.1.1.1.4 above.
NOTE
See the Chapter 15, Equi pment and Accessory Setup and Troubleshooting, for
additional information on installing accessory equi pment such as
vibration sensors and tachometers.
10.1.1.2. Conditions
The Conds (which corresponds to the [F1] key) selection appears at the bottom left of the
Overall Vibration Setup banner screen. Press the [F1] key if you wish to define conditions
for the survey. If you choose this option, the following Conditions banner screen is
displayed.

To input conditions, do the following:
Viper 4040 User Manual
Revision 3.01, Oct 2012 10 Overall Vibration Surveys 10-7
10.1.1.2.1. Use the [] and [] to move from field to field on this screen and the [] and
[] keys to navigate within the field or toggle between selections. Make field
entries in the fields using the keypad.
10.1.1.2.2. In the Condition column, use the analyzer keypad to enter a descriptive name
for up to fifteen conditions. You may define up to fifteen individual points at
which you collect and optionally store data. When defined, these conditions are
stored with the setup and are accessed when the setup is selected.
10.1.1.2.3. When the conditions are completed per your requirements, press [ENTER] to
accept and exit back to the Overall Vibration Setup screen.
10.1.1.3. Speeds
The Speeds (which corresponds to the [F2] key) selection appears at the bottom, second
from the left, of the Overall Vibration Setup screen. Press the [F2] key if you wish to define
speeds for the survey. If you choose this option, the following Speed Inputs Setup banner
screen is displayed. There are four rows, 1, 2, 3, and 4 indicating the tachometer input
channel. There are four columns, Measure, DESC, OFF/100%, and Factor. These inputs are
described below.

To define the Speed Inputs Setup, do the following:
10.1.1.3.1. Use the [] and [] to move from field to field on this screen and the [] and
[] keys to navigate within the field or toggle between selections. Make field
entries in the fields using the keypad.
10.1.1.3.2. In the Measure column, use the [], and [] keys to select from Pulse S-H,
Volts S, Pulse D-H, Volts D, Pulse S-L, Pulse D-L, or None indicating the
tachometer input type for the corresponding tachometer input channel 1 through
4. None is selected when the corresponding tach channel is not being used.
10.1.1.3.3. In the DESC (description) column, enter a description for the corresponding
tachometer input channel. The description should be a name commonly

10-8 Overall Vibration Surveys 10 Revision 3.01, Oct 2012
understood by all users of this setup. Use the analyzer keypad to input the
description. For instance, if the input is in Hertz (cycles per second), the
description might be Hz1. If the input is in a raw voltage, the input description
might be DC2 indicating a Direct Current input on Channel 2. You might also
choose common terminology such as N1, N2, Fan, etc.
10.1.1.3.4. In the OFF/100% column you should enter the DC OFFSET when measuring a
DC voltage, if known. If you are measuring a Hertz input enter the expected Hz
@ 100% speed.
10.1.1.3.5. In the FACTOR column, enter the multiplier for the voltage or frequency to
result in a 100% speed reading for the component being measured. The resultant
speed indication is based on either OFFSET +VOLTS x FACTOR, or Hz x
FACTOR.
10.1.1.3.6. When all fields are completed per your requirements, press ENTER. The screen
will return to the Overall Vibration Setup banner screen. Press ENTER again.
10.1.2. - Job Identification
The next screen displayed is the J ob Identification banner screen shown in the following
illustration. All information on this screen is optional; however we highly recommend you fill
in as much information as possible to ease the task of storage and retrieval of surveys. If you
have entered names into the analyzer previously, you may press the [F1] key to select from a
list of stored customer names, which will then be entered into the Name field. When all
fields are completed as desired, press [ENTER] to continue.


Viper 4040 User Manual
Revision 3.01, Oct 2012 10 Overall Vibration Surveys 10-9
10.1.3. Engine Information
The Engine Information banner screen is displayed as shown below. A serial number
(S/N) and Type field are available for both an engine and a propeller so that stored
surveys can be traced by either component of the powertrain system. All fields are optional
but we highly recommend you fill in as much information as possible for ease of use in
trending, recall, and storage.
Navigate (move) between the fields using the [] and [] keys. All fields are entered from the
keypad with the exception of the Pos (Position) field, which is a selection field. The
position indicates the position on the airplane of the engine, propeller or subcomponent.
Using the [] key, select positions from 1 through 4. The TSO and TSN fields for
Time Since New and Time Since Overhaul are optional fields. When all fields are filled
as required, press [ENTER] to continue.

10.1.4. Select Aircraft Condition
The Select Aircraft Condition banner screen is displayed. The conditions are those defined
in the Edit Conditions screen (see section 10.1.1.2).
Use the [] or [] keys to select the condition you wish to collect. When your choice is
highlighted, press [ENTER] to begin collecting data.
10.1.5. Start Component
Start the component you are checking (engine, generator, gearbox, etc.). When the
component reaches the desired operating condition (speed, temp, etc.), press the [ENTER]
key to begin acquiring data.
NOTE
When the spectra is displ ayed on screen, you may press the [] or [] keys to produce

10-10 Overall Vibration Surveys 10 Revision 3.01, Oct 2012
a NORMAL CURSOR immediatel y at the highest displayed amplitude frequency. The
[] and [] keys may al so be used immediatel y to EXPAND or SHRINK the Y scal e.
10.1.6. - Collecting Data
When the data screen is displayed, you will also see one function box at the bottom of the
screen (see following figure) corresponding to the position of the [F5] key. The box reads
Reset.

Pressing the [F5] key will delete the collected data, zero out the affected fields and begin
anew. As shown in the screen above, the analyzer will report the total number of Samples
taken and the engineering Units of vibration plus the modifier for those samples. Lower on
the screen, there are two columns corresponding to the Current input measurements and the
Maximum which is the highest amplitude reading from the number of Samples taken.
There will be a number of rows corresponding to the number of input channels specified in
the Setup for this job.
Viper 4040 User Manual
Revision 3.01, Oct 2012 10 Overall Vibration Surveys 10-11
10.2. - Resume Job

When you select Resume J ob from the Overall Vibration Surveys banner screen menu,
the Incomplete J obs banner screen will be displayed. Incomplete jobs are listed by name,
preceded by an asterisk. Select the job you wish to complete and the analyzer will return you
to the point where the in-progress job was stopped, allowing you to complete it.
10.3. - Manage Jobs
Selecting Manage J obs from the Overall Vibration Surveys banner screen menu presents
several sub-menu choices to choose from. These choices allow you to manage previously
completed job data you have stored in the analyzer.


10-12 Overall Vibration Surveys 10 Revision 3.01, Oct 2012

10.3.1. - Review
Selecting the Review option presents a list of stored jobs on the J ob List banner screen.
You can select one job for on-screen viewing. When viewing is complete, press the
[BACKUP] or [ENTER] key to exit the screen.
10.3.2. - Delete
The Delete option presents a list of stored jobs on the J ob List banner screen. From the
list, you may select one job for deletion. After making your selection, the Delete J ob
banner screen will appear, asking you to verify your intent to delete the selected job by
pressing the [F1] key for Yes or the [F5] key for No. You may wish to download the job
for reference or permanent record prior to deleting. Once deleted, the job cannot be retrieved
from the analyzer.
10.3.3. - Delete All
The Delete All option will delete all currently stored jobs. After selecting this option, the
Delete All J ob banner screen will appear, asking you to verify your intent to delete all the
jobs by pressing the [F1] key for Yes or the [F5] key for No. You may wish to download
the jobs for reference or permanent record prior to deleting. Once deleted, the jobs cannot be
retrieved from the analyzer.
Viper 4040 User Manual
Revision 3.01, Oct 2012 10 Overall Vibration Surveys 10-13
10.4. - Manage Setups

Selecting Manage Setups from the Overall Vibration Surveys banner screen menu
presents several sub-menu choices to choose from. These choices allow you to manage job
setups you have stored previously in the analyzer.
10.4.1. - Edit
Selecting the Edit function displays the Setup List screen. Select the setup you wish to
edit. The screen will display the Spectra Setup screen. Edit the setup as necessary and press
[ENTER] to store and exit the edited setup screen.
10.4.2. New
If you select New, the Overall Vibration Setup screen is displayed. See section 10.1.1 for
instructions on how to proceed from this point.
10.4.3. - Delete
The Delete option presents you with a list of stored setups. From the list, you may select
one setup for deletion. If you wish to delete all stored setups, you must delete them
individually. After making your selection, you will be asked to verify your intent to delete the
selected job by pressing the [F1] key for Yes, or the [F5] key for No. We highly
recommend you download the setup(s) to your PC for reference or permanent record prior to
deleting them. Once deleted, the setups cannot be retrieved from the analyzer.


Chapter 11
Transient Vibration Survey
(Revision 3, Oct 2012)
Transient Vibration Survey is an analyzer function that is accessed from the analyzers
Main Menu banner screen as shown in the illustration below. Selecting this function from the
main menu brings up the Transient Vibration Survey J obs banner screen menu. Each of the
listings on this banner screen menu is an option within the Transient Vibration Survey
function. Descriptions of each of these options follow, along with the information required to
complete the menu screens within the options, and the steps necessary to perform the
transient vibration survey function.

The Transient Vibration Survey option allows the user to rapidly complete and storea
transient vibration survey using the Setup feature (described in section 11.1.1 below). With
the setup feature you may complete surveys on several different components without
manually entering the setup data between surveys. Each job is unique and very quick.

11-2 Transient Vibration Surveys 11 Revision 3, Oct 2012
11.1. - Start Job
Selecting Start J ob from the Transient Vibration Survey J obs banner screen allows you to
begin a transient vibration survey. When you select this option, one of two screens will
appear next depending on whether you are starting a job from scratch or whether an
incomplete job still exists in the analyzers memory.

If you have previously saved setups in the analyzers memory, a screen displaying the list of
setups, as shown below, will be displayed. If no setups are stored, or if you choose New by
pressing the [F1] key from the Setup List screen, the analyzer will display the Transient
Survey Setup banner screen. If you select from the list, you proceed to the J ob
Identification banner screen described in section 11.1.2. Instructions for completing the
Transient Survey Setup banner screen appear in the following Section, 11.1.1.

Viper 4040 User Manual
11 Transient Vibration Surveys 11-3

If another job was in progress but was not completed, the Incomplete J ob banner screen
will be displayed to inform you of this. The analyzer will then display a message prompting
you to verify that you want to complete the in-progress job or that you want to ignore it and
begin a completely new job. This verification prevents you from accidentally erasing data
from an in-progress job. The screen will display the message The last job performed is
incomplete. Do you want to RESUME work on it?

You must then choose a Yes or No answer by pressing the corresponding [F1] key, for
Yes, or the [F5] key, for No. The Yes answer will return you to the point where the in-
progress job was stopped and allow you to complete it. If you choose the No answer, the
screen will then display the Transient Survey Setup banner screen so you can program a
new job setup or if you have previously-saved setups stored in the analyzers memory, a
screen displaying the list of setups will be displayed. You can then select a setup from this
list. If you select from the list, you proceed to the J ob Identification banner screen
described in section 11.1.2. Instructions for completing the Transient Survey Setup banner
screen appear in the following Section, 11.1.1.

11-4 Transient Vibration Surveys 11 Revision 3, Oct 2012
NOTE
The analyzer will store Setups as long as avail able memory remains. If you are
attempting to store a survey that will exceed the anal yzer s memory capacity, the
anal yzer will display a message saying You must delete an item before adding a new
one. Press the [BACKUP] key and sel ect Manage Setups to delete the Setup of your
choosing. It is advisable to transfer setups to AvTrend for storage and, when
necessary, retri eval.
11.1.1. Transient Survey Setup
The Transient Survey Setup banner screen allows you to define and store a transient
vibration survey setup. As shown in the figure below, some fields in this screen have default
values that appear automatically. You can use this information if appropriate or input your
own specific setup information using the keypad. (Refer to Chapter 3, Using the Viper 4040
Analyzer if you are unfamiliar with using the keypad.) The analyzer will display the
Transient Survey Setup banner with default values or values entered from the previous job
such as those shown in the figure below.

To complete the Transient Survey Setup banner screen, do the following:
1. Using the keypad, enter a name for the transient vibration survey setup. (Refer to Chapter
3, Using the Viper 4040 Analyzer if you are unfamiliar with using the keypad.)
2. Using the [] key, move to the frequency unit field which is defaulted to RPM. The
two selections are RPM and Hz. Determine if the display frequency units are to be in
revolutions per minute (RPM) or cycles per second (Hz), then use the [] key to
toggle between the two selections in this field. If the frequency unit you desire is not
currently in the field, press the [] key to toggle between the two choices until your unit
is shown in the field.
3. Use the [] key to move to the minimum frequency field, immediately to the right of the
frequency units field. Use the analyzer keypad to enter the minimum frequency of
interest for this survey relative to the frequency units selected in step 2 above. If you
Viper 4040 User Manual
11 Transient Vibration Surveys 11-5
desire a high pass frequency, such as 40 Hz, the minimum frequency field should reflect
this as the minimum frequency of interest.
4. Use the [] key to move to the maximum frequency field, immediately to the right of the
word to and the minimum frequency field. Use the analyzer keypad to enter the
highest frequency of interest for this survey relative to the frequency units selected in step
2 above. You should also consider other factors such as Harmonics. If you want multiples
of the fundamental frequency included in the frequency range, determine to what extent
that need is (1X, 2X, 3X, and so on) then extend the frequency range to include it. For
example, 300Hz is the frequency of interest, the fundamental frequency. If you want 3X
harmonics included in the frequency range you must multiply the fundamental frequency
(300 Hz) X the harmonic range (3X) and arrive at an upper range of 900 Hz.
5. Use the [] key to move to the Resolution: field. Resolution is the number of lines of
resolution for the spectra display. Press the [] key to increase the number of lines up to
6400. Normally 400 to 800 lines are sufficient for spectra. Higher resolutions may be
used when separation of two frequencies of very close proximity is required.
6. Use the [] key to move to the Display field. Use the [] key to select the Display
type. Your selection in this field will determine how the initial data is displayed on the
analyzer screen during acquisition. A selection of Overall will provide a numeric value
reading while a selection of Spectra will display a full spectral graph of the acquired
data. Either selection will cause the analyzer to begin recording data as soon as the data
acquisition process begins. It should be noted that a setting of Overall in this field will
provide faster data updates and a higher accuracy due to the lower demand on the digital
signal processors for this type of display. The display can be toggled between the two
during the job. See Section 11.1.7 for instructions on switching between the two display
modes. The data can then be review or played back after recorded in full spectral or
waterfall modes. The selection of Overall w/Record or Spectra w/Record allows the
user to begin the data acquisition process, view the data and confirm the values then
select the point at which data will begin to get recorded.
7. Use the [] key to move to the Every field. Enter a sample rate in numbers of samples
per millisecond. The sample rate determines how often the analyzer acquires the data. A
setting of 0 tells the analyzer to update as rapidly as possible for existing conditions. A
setting 1000 tells the analyzer to sample once every second. If you are acquiring a start
up survey, where the engine acceleration is automatic and very rapid, you may wish to
set the rate at shorter intervals, 50 or 20 for instance. If you can control the acceleration
or deceleration of the engine (or component being checked) you may wish to set the rate
at longer intervals, 200 or 500 for instance.
8. Use the [] key to move to the Define related tachs? field. This field will allow you to
define correlations between vibration channels and tach signals. The default field value
is <No>which correlates all vibration channels with all tach inputs. By selecting <Yes>,
using the [] key, additional Tach selection fields will appear to the right of the Max
fields in the upper set of Channel definition rows. See step 12 below for information
about filling in additional fields that will appear as a result of your selection.
9. Use the [] key to move to the Units column of the Channel A: row. Select an
engineering unit from the available list by using [] key. A selection of None in the

11-6 Transient Vibration Surveys 11 Revision 3, Oct 2012
field indicates there will be no input to the Channel (A, B, C, or D) adjacent to the field
where the word None appears. Your selection determines the engineering units in
which the vibration spectra will be displayed. Each channel is independent of the other
three so that the type of unit can vary between channels. For example, you may select
IPS in channel A for velocity, gs in channel B for acceleration, Mils in channel C for
displacement, and db in Channel D for acoustics. Any selection, other than None will
automatically provide additional selection fields in the Mod and MaxValue columns.
10. Use the [] key to move to the Mod field. The Mod field determines the modifier
that will be applied to the engineering units of the spectra. Consult your equipment
maintenance manual for specific requirements of a vibration survey or for analysis
guidelines. Use the [] key to select the modifier, such as Peak, Peak-to-Peak (Pk-Pk),
RMS or Average. Consult the appropriate equipment maintenance manual for specific
requirements of an overall vibration survey or for analysis guidelines.
11. Move to the MaxValue field using the [] key. MaxValue means the Maximum
Amplitude value, relative to the engineering units selected in step 9 above, you expect to
see in this job. Use the [] key to select a maximum value above, but not less than the
value you expect to see.
12. Use the [] key to move to the Tach x field as appropriate. When the Define related
tachs? field in step 8 above is set to Yes and the field is exited, the Tach x portion of
the Channel line will become visible. Use the [] key to move from field to field even
though the fields are arranged horizontally. Once a field is highlighted, use the [] key
to select (display a dot in the box) or deselect (erase a dot in the box) the Tach input you
would like to correlate with the vibration channel described by this line line.
NOTE
Encountered amplitudes above this setting may cause the anal yzer to overl oad. An
overload will result in spurious harmonics and may cause unusual terminati on of the
job. It is best to set the Full Scale Vibration higher than needed as opposed to lower
than needed for this reason. The overload does not cause a fatal error. You may
recover from the overload by pressing the [MAIN MENU] key and starting the process
again from the beginning. However, avoiding an overload will save time in the process.
13. Repeat steps 9 through 12 above for each of the four channels per your requirements.
14. Move to the Sensor column in the Channel A: row by using the [] key. Use the []
key to select the sensor you will use for this channel. If the sensor you are using is not in
the selection list, you must enter the sensor setup. See Chapter 18 for entering a sensor
setup.
15. Move to the Desc (description) column in the Channel A: row by using the [] key.
Use the analyzer keypad to enter a six character description for the channel such as #1
Eng, or Fan.
16. Repeat steps 14 and 15 for each of the four channels per your requirements.
Viper 4040 User Manual
11 Transient Vibration Surveys 11-7
11.1.1.1. Config
The Config (which corresponds to the [F1] key) selection appears at the bottom left of the
Transient Survey Setup banner screen. Press the [F1] key if you wish to define Conditions,
Speeds, and Parameters for the survey. If you choose this option by pressing the [F1]
Config key, the Transient Survey Setup banner screen does not change, however, the
definitions for the function keys at the bottom of the screen will change as shown in the
example below.

The Conds (conditions) key, which corresponds to the [F1] key, will display the Conditions
screen as shown in the example below.

To input conditions, do the following:
1. Use the [] and [] keys to navigate the screen and input data from the keypad or select
conditions using the [], and [] keys.

11-8 Transient Vibration Surveys 11 Revision 3, Oct 2012
2. In the Condition column, use the analyzer keypad to enter a descriptive name for up to
fifteen conditions. You may define up to fifteen individual points at which you collect
and optionally store data. When defined, these conditions are stored with the setup and
are accessed when the setup is selected and set into motion.
3. In the Spectrum Column, select from NONE, PEAK HOLD, AVERAGE,
WATERFALL, or TIME per your requirements.
Note
The WATERFALL option must be selected to utilize the playback feature of the
anal yzer and AvTrend.
4. In the Max. Time column, enter the maximum amount of time, in seconds, that you
wish to automatically collect and stop data collection for that condition. This option
is used as both a time and memory management tool. It also allows the analyzer a
specific time block to collect data at the specified condition. Following data
acquisition for the specified amount of time, data collection will terminate allowing
you to proceed to the next condition. A setting of 0 will allow the analyzer to
acquire data until terminated by the user pressing [ENTER].
5. When all conditions are completed per your requirements, press [ENTER] to accept
and exit back to the Transient Survey Setup screen.
11.1.1.2. Speeds
The Speeds (which corresponds to the [F2] key) selection appears at the bottom, second
from the left, of the Transient Survey Setup banner screen. Press the [F2] key if you wish to
define speed inputs for the survey. If you choose this option, the following Speed Inputs
Setup banner screen is displayed. There are two sets of fields with four rows each, 1, 2, 3,
and 4 indicating the four tachometer input channels. There are seven columns, Measure,
DESC, OFF/100%, Factor, Plot Min, Plot Max, and Plot Div. These inputs are described
below.

Viper 4040 User Manual
11 Transient Vibration Surveys 11-9
To define Speed inputs, do the following:
1. Use the [] and [] keys to navigate the screen and input or select data using the keypad
or the [], and [] keys respectively.
2. In the Measure column, use the [] or [] key to select from Pulse S-H, Volts S,
Pulse D-H, Volts D, Pulse S-L, Pulse D-L, or None indicating the tachometer input type
for the tachometer input channel indicated. NONE is selected when the corresponding
tach channel is not being used. Pulse is used when there is a pulse input such as a
Phototach, Lasetach or magnetic pickup. This pulse input may be, but is not necessarily a
once-per-rev pulse. The preference is actually a multi-pulse per revolution input. The D
or S in the selection depicts either single ended (S) or differential (D) while the H or L
depicts a setting of high gain (H) or low gain (L) as required.
3. The DESC column is the descriptive name for the tachometer input such as N1, N2,
Fan, or Turbine. Enter up to five alphanumeric characters in this field. The description
should be one that all users of this setup are familiar with and easily understand.
4. The OFF/100% column is used when the VOLTS selection is made in the Measure
column described in item 2 above. This field is used to enter the offset if measuring a DC
voltage if measuring the frequency in Hertz (Hz) or the frequency at 100% of component
speed. Use the keypad to enter the value in the OFF/100% field.
5. In the FACTOR column, enter the multiplier for Volts or Hertz to attain the actual
component speed. If measuring a voltage, the speed is equal to OFF +voltage x Factor. If
using a Pulse input, the RPM is equal to Hertz x Factor. The analyzer assumes the input
to be relative to Hz (cycles per second) so that an input of one pulse per revolution (one-
per-rev) would require a FACTOR of 60 (1 per-rev X 60 Hz assumed) to equal
Revolutions per minute (RPM). Enter the factor using the keypad. For multiple pulses
per revolution, divide 60 (Hz) by the number of pulses to display RPM.
6. When viewing Plots, you should know the minimum and maximum speeds of interest.
When you arrive at that speed range, use the keypad to enter the Plot Min, or minimum
speed of interest in this column.
7. For the Plot Max you should, likewise, determine the speed range of interest and enter
the maximum speed of that range in this column using the keypad.
8. The Plot Div determines the intervals or divisions of speed indication on the plots
across the full speed range. For instance, if you intend to view the plot in a range of 1000
to 2000 RPM and wish it to be in divisions of 500 RPM, enter 2 in this column using
the keypad. That is, the upper range (2000) minus the lower range (1000) divided by
increments of 500 RPM =2 divisions. The valid range for the field is 1 to 10. An entry of
1 will show NO incremental divisions of the X scale.
9. Press ENTER to return to the Transient Survey Setup screen.
11.1.1.3. Parms
The Parms, or Parameters, (which corresponds to the [F3] key) selection appears at the
bottom center of the Transient Survey Setup banner screen. Press the [F3] key if you wish

11-10 Transient Vibration Surveys 11 Revision 3, Oct 2012
to define data collection parameters for the survey. If you choose this option, the following
Transient Parameters Setup banner screen is displayed.

To input information into the Transient Vibration Parameters screen, do the following.
1. Use the [] and [] keys to navigate the screen and input or select data using the
keypad or the [] and [] keys respectively.
2. In the Description column, use the keypad to input a description of the individual
component you will track with a speed input. The description should be one that is
familiar and easily understood to all users of this setup. In the example above, we
have used N1and N2 for the number 1 and number 2 spools respectively. You might
use terms such as FAN, INPUT SHAFT, or COMPRESSOR.
3. In the Type column, use the [] and [] keys to select PWR for displaying the
value of total energy within the specified bandwidth you specify in the F(lower)
and F(upper) columns. Select MAX to display the maximum single amplitude
peak within the specified frequency bandwidth.
4. Use the keypad to enter the lowest frequency of interest, (F) lower. This is the
component speed x this factor and defines the lowest frequency variance where you
will monitor the component speed.
5. Use the keypad to enter the highest frequency of interest, (F) upper. This is the
component speed x this factor and defines the highest frequency variance where you
will monitor the component speed.
6. In the Speed column, use the [] and [] keys to select xRPM, xHz, xCS1,
xCS2, xCS3, or xCS4. CS is an abbreviation for Calculated Speed The xCS1
through xCS4 selections will base the limit on a dynamic speed reference calculated
per your specifications in the Speed Inputs Setup screen above in section 11.1.1.2.
Viper 4040 User Manual
11 Transient Vibration Surveys 11-11
7. When fields are completed for all Parameters, press ENTER to return to the Transient
Survey Setup screen.
11.1.1.4. Plots
The Plots (which corresponds to the [F4] key) selection appears at the bottom, second from
the right function keys of the Transient Survey Setup banner screen. Press the [F4] key if
you wish to define plots for display of the collected survey data. If you choose this option, the
following Transient Plot Setup banner will be displayed.

1. The Parameters column is a display of the available parameters for plotting. These are
based on your specifications in other screens of the Transient Survey Setup.
2. Use the [] and [] keys to navigate the screen and use the [] and [] keys to toggle
the answer field between Yes and No. All fields default to No on initial opening of
the screen.
3. If you wish to plot a transient survey, toggle the answer field to Yes under the column
of choice. In the example above, you may choose to plot the OVERALL, and N1 vs.
Time and/or vs. Calculated Speed (xCS) inputs. A No answer in any field will indicate
that you do not wish to plot that parameter.
4. Press ENTER to return to the Transient Survey Setup screen.
11.1.1.5. Limits
The Limits (which corresponds to the [F5] key) selection appears at the far right bottom of
the Transient Survey Setup banner screen. Press the [F5] key if you wish to define limits.
When limits are defined in this page, a limit line will be plotted on the survey screen as a
quick reference. If you choose this option, the following Transient Survey Setup screen will
be displayed. Note that he only difference from the main Transient Survey Setup screen and
this screen is in the function key, [F1] through [F5] selections.

11-12 Transient Vibration Surveys 11 Revision 3, Oct 2012

11.1.1.5.1. L:Parms
The L:Parms, or Limit :Parameters, (which corresponds to the [F1] key) selection appears
at the bottom left of the Transient Survey Setup screen after selection [F5] Limits from the
main Transient Survey Setup screen. Press the [F1] key if you wish to define Parameter
Limits for the transient survey plots. Use the [] key to move from field to field and enter a
limit value using the analyzer keypad. When all desired limits are defined, press ENTER to
accept your settings and return to the Transient Survey Setup screen.

11.1.1.5.2. L:Spec
The L:Spec, or Limit: Spectra, (which corresponds to the [F2] key) selection appears at the
bottom, second from the left of the Transient Survey Setup screen after selection of [F5]
Limits from the main Transient Survey Setup screen. Press the [F2] key if you wish to
define Spectra Limits for the transient survey plots.
Viper 4040 User Manual
11 Transient Vibration Surveys 11-13

To define spectra limits, do the following:
1. Choose the spectrum for which you wish to define limits, A-Limits, B-Limits, C-
Limits, or D-Limits from the corresponding function key at the bottom of the screen.
The letters A, B, C, and D are in reference to the input channel of the analyzer.

2. Use the [] and [] keys to navigate the screen and input or select units using the
keypad or the [] and [] keys respectively.
3. The Edit Limits for Channel X banner screen, where X represents the input channel
letter A, B, C, or D, shown above, will be displayed.
4. Use the keypad to enter the lower frequency (F low) in the 1) row. Move to the next
column (F high) and again use the keypad to enter the upper frequency limit in the
1) row.

11-14 Transient Vibration Surveys 11 Revision 3, Oct 2012
5. Move to the next column (Unit) and use the [] and [] keys to select the frequency
unit. This selection will determine the frequency unit where lines will be drawn on
the spectra relative to the x (frequency) axis specified in item 3 above.
6. Move to the Limit column and enter the amplitude limit for the bandwidth
specified in F-low and F-high of the same row. This limit will be displayed as a
horizontal line relative to the engineering units specified on the Transient Survey
Setup screen in the Vibration: field. When all desired limits are set, press
[ENTER] to accept your settings and exit the screen.
11.1.2. - Job Identification
The next screen displayed is the J ob Identification banner screen shown in the following
illustration. All information on this screen is optional; however we highly recommend you fill
in as much information as possible to ease the task of storage and retrieval of surveys. If you
have other customer information stored, you may press the [F1] key to select from a list of
stored customer names, which will then be entered into the Name field. When all fields are
completed as desired, press [ENTER] to continue.

11.1.3. Engine Information
The Engine Information banner screen is displayed as shown below. Serial number (S/N)
and Type fields are available for both an engine and a propeller so that stored surveys can
be traced by either component of the powertrain system. All fields are optional but we highly
recommend you fill in as much information as possible for ease of use in trending, recall, and
storage.
Navigate (move) between the fields using the [] and [] keys. All fields are entered from the
keypad with the exception of the Pos (Position) field, which is a selection field. The
position indicates the position on the airplane of the engine, propeller or subcomponent.
Using the [] key, select positions from 1 through 4. The TSO and TSN fields for
Viper 4040 User Manual
11 Transient Vibration Surveys 11-15
Time Since New and Time Since Overhaul are optional fields. When all fields are filled
as required, press [ENTER] to continue.

11.1.4. Start Engine
Start the engine (or component) you are checking (generator, gearbox, etc.). When the
component reaches normal operating conditions (speed, temp, etc.), press the [ENTER] key
to begin acquiring data. You can use the [F2] Swap J ob key to return directly to the Main
Menu without rebooting the analyzer.

11.1.5. Microphone Calibration
If you have selected to gather data using a microphone, the Start Engine screen shown
below will appear before data collection. You MUST calibrate the microphone before every

11-16 Transient Vibration Surveys 11 Revision 3, Oct 2012
use. Differences in temperature and pressure will affect the microphone readings if it is not
properly calibrated. Follow the steps below to properly calibrate the microphone.

1. Press the [F4] Calib to display a list of all channels which are currently configured to
collect data with a microphone similar to the example below. Select the first channel
and press [ENTER]. Continue the process for all applicable channels.

2. The analyzer will display the current calibration settings. Press [F1] Change to change
the current settings.
Viper 4040 User Manual
11 Transient Vibration Surveys 11-17

3. Enter the Reference Level, typically in decibels (db), and the Reference Frequency, in
Hertz (Hz), as found on the calibrator. Plug the microphone into the correct size adapter
in the top of the calibrator. Turn the calibrator on and press [ENTER] on the analyzer.
NOTE
The minimum and maximum Reference Frequency range, di splayed below the
Ref. Frequency cel l, is dynamic. If the displ ayed range does not include the
frequency found on the calibrator, you will have to expand the frequency range
defined in the setup. See paragraphs 3 and 4 above.

4. After a brief period the analyzer will display the Measurement Level and the Adjustment
that will be applied to the measurement. You can change the adjustment by pressing [F1]
Change and following the above steps again.

11-18 Transient Vibration Surveys 11 Revision 3, Oct 2012

5. As the channels are calibrated, an X will fill the brackets ([X]) indicating that data has
been collected. When all channels are calibrated, press [BACKUP] to exit the calibration
process and return to the Start Engine screen for the current job. Data collection from
this point on is no different than with any other vibration sensor.

6. As a way to verify the microphone settings, simply take sample data. Keep the
microphone plugged into the calibrator and view the results. The vibration peak should
be displayed within the tolerance of the microphone.
Viper 4040 User Manual
11 Transient Vibration Surveys 11-19

11.1.6. Select Aircraft Condition
The Select Aircraft Condition banner screen is displayed. The conditions are those defined
in the Edit Conditions screen (see section 11.1.1.1).
Use the [] or [] keys to select the condition you wish to collect. When your choice is
highlighted, press [ENTER] to begin collecting data.
11.1.7. Collecting Data
If the display type was selected as Spectra in step 6 of paragraph 11.1.1 above, the spectra
is displayed, you will also see three function boxes at the bottom of the screen (see following
figure) corresponding to the position of the [F1], [F4], and [F5] keys directly below them.
The boxes read Options, Overall and Event.


11-20 Transient Vibration Surveys 11 Revision 3, Oct 2012
Once any of these F key options are selected, both the screen and the corresponding F
key functions change. With each selection, the F keys offer different options (e.g., Expand,
Shrink, X scale) for viewing the spectra. The F key functions for viewing spectra are
described in the following steps.
1. Pressing the [F1] Options key will change the [F1], [F2], [F3], [F4] and [F5] boxes
to read Cursor, X Scale, and Y Scale, View and Cancel respectively as
shown in the figure below.

2. Pressing the [F1] Cursor key will change the [F1], [F2], [F3] and [F5] boxes to
read Normal, Harmonic, None and Cancel respectively. The functions of the
F keys will continue to change as the screens change.
3. Pressing the [F1] Normal key will produce a normal cursor on the screen
accompanied by an X and Y scale value readout box in the upper right corner of each
displayed spectra (see the following figure). These X and Y values are relative to the
current position of the cursor only. The cursor can be moved along the X (horizontal)
axis of the spectra by pressing the [] or [] keys. Hold down the key for large and
rapid incremental changes. The value of the X-axis (frequency) and Y-axis
(amplitude) will be displayed for the current position of the cursor. Incremental
values are determined by the number of lines of resolution specified in the setup
screen.
4. Pressing the [F2] Harmonic key will produce multiple harmonic cursors according
to the specified frequency range. When this key is pressed, cursors will appear to the
right of the fundamental frequency identified by the leftmost cursor. For example, if
the fundamental frequency is 300 Hz cursors will be placed at 2X (600 Hz) 3X (900
Hz) 4x (1200 Hz) and so on until the upper frequency limit of the screen is met.
When the primary cursor (for the fundamental frequency) is moved, the multiple
harmonic cursors will automatically follow the movement and position themselves at
the new multiple of the fundamental frequency. To remove the harmonic cursors,
repeat steps 1 and 2 above. At step 3, press either the [F1] Normal or [F3] None
key and the multiple cursors will be replaced by your selection.
Viper 4040 User Manual
11 Transient Vibration Surveys 11-21
5. Pressing the [F3] None key will remove either a normal or harmonic cursor if
currently displayed on screen. The three boxes above the [F1], [F4] and [F5] keys
will return to Options, Overall and Event respectively. If no cursor is displayed
when pressing this key, only the box nomenclature will change.

6. Pressing the [F2] X scale key will change the [F1], [F2], [F3], and [F5] boxes to
read Expand, Default, Shrink and Cancel respectively as shown in the
following figure.

7. Pressing the [F1] Expand key will expand the X scale of the spectra, in effect
enlarging the viewing area. You might think of this function as a Zoom Out
feature. The center of the Expanded view will be the position of the cursor prior to
pressing the [F1] key. If the view is already at the maximum range of the specified X
scale range, no scaling change will occur. However, the cursor will be displayed and
the X, Y, and Ovr (Overall) values will be shown in the upper right corner of the
screen. The [F1], [F2] and [F5] boxes will return to the format described in step 5

11-22 Transient Vibration Surveys 11 Revision 3, Oct 2012
above. If you wish to Expand the X scale even further, retrace the steps from that
point as described in the text.
8. Pressing the [F2] Default key will return the X scale to the values specified in the
setup. This is a quick and easy way to return all expanded and shrunken scales to that
default value without the necessity of numerous keystrokes. If the X scale is already
at the setup values when the [F2] Default key is pressed, the three function boxes will
return to Options, Overall and Event. No other changes will occur.
9. Pressing the [F3] Shrink key will lower the X scale of the spectra, in effect
shrinking the viewing area. You might think of this function as a Zoom In feature.
If the view is already at the minimum of the specified X scale range, no scaling
change will occur. However, the cursor will be displayed and the X, Y, and Ovr
(Overall) values will be shown in the upper right corner of the screen. The [F1], [F4]
and [F5] boxes will return to the format described in step 5 above. If you wish to
Shrink the X scale even further, retrace the steps from that point as described in the
text.
10. Pressing the [F3] Y scale key changes the [F1], [F2], [F3], and [F5] boxes to read
Expand, Default, Shrink and Cancel respectively (see above).
11. Pressing the [F1] Expand key will expand the Y scale of the spectra, in effect
enlarging the viewing area. You might think of this function as a Zoom Out
feature. If the view is already at the maximum range of the specified Y scale range,
no scaling change will occur. However, the cursor will be displayed and the X, Y,
and Ovr: (Overall) values will be shown in the upper right corner of the screen. The
[F1], [F4] and [F5] boxes will return to the format described in step 5 above. If you
wish to Expand the Y scale even further, retrace the steps from that point as
described in the text.
12. Pressing the [F2] Default key will return the Y scale to the values specified in the
setup. This is a quick and easy way to return all expanded and shrunken scales to that
default value without the necessity of numerous keystrokes. If the Y scale is already
at the setup values when the [F2] Default key is pressed, the three function boxes will
return to Options, Overall, and Event. No other changes will occur.
13. Pressing the [F3] Shrink key will lower the Y scale of the spectra, in effect
shrinking the viewing area. You might think of this function as a Zoom In feature.
If the view is already at the minimum of the specified Y scale range, no scaling
change will occur. However, the cursor will be displayed and the X, Y, and Ovr
(Overall) values will be shown in the upper right corner of the screen. The [F1], [F4]
and [F5] boxes will return to the format described in step 5 above. If you wish to
shrink the Y scale even further, retrace the steps from that point as described in the
text.
14. Pressing the [F4] View key will display another sub menu. The [F1], [F2], [F3],
[F4] keys will be identified by the descriptions assigned in Section 11.1.1 step 15
above. The [F5] key will be labeled All. Pressing the F key below the name of
the channel will enlarge the display of that plot to the full size of the screen. The
other plots will continue to gather data they will just be hidden from view. Pressing
Viper 4040 User Manual
11 Transient Vibration Surveys 11-23
[F1] Options, [F3] View, and [F5] All will return all available plots to the
screen. The F keys will return to Options, Spectra, and Event.
15. Pressing [F4] Overall will cause the screen to change from the spectra plot to the
overall display as shown below. You can change back to the spectra plot by pressing
[F4] Spectra.

16. Pressing [F5] Event from the initial function key display will store a marker in the
job indicating the time the Event key was pressed. Multiple tags will be
incremented sequentially as Event 1, Event 2, and so on. The tag will help you
identify the point in time during the run when the Event key was pressed during the
Review J ob process or in AvTrend.
11.1.8. - Storing Data
Anytime the spectrum is displayed on screen you may press [ENTER] to terminate data
acquisition. The analyzer then displays the screen shown below.


11-24 Transient Vibration Surveys 11 Revision 3, Oct 2012
The Select Aircraft Condition banner screen is again displayed as shown in the following
figure. Notice that the condition for which you just collected and stored data now has an X
immediately to the left of the defined condition. This alerts the user that data has been
collected and stored for this condition. This does not preclude you from selecting and
acquiring new data for this condition. However, if you choose to store the data, the previously
stored data will be written over and may not be recovered.

At this point you may select a new condition and repeat procedures starting from section
11.1.5 until all required data are collected. If you would like to exit the job with the ability to
resume it later, you can press the [F1] End Run key. This will cause the following screen
to be displayed. From this screen, you can use the [F2] Swap J ob key to return to the Main
Menu without rebooting the analyzer. This will leave the job incomplete and suspended in
the analyzers memory. If you are finished collecting data, shut down the engine(s) per the
manual instructions and use the [F5] Continue key to mark the job complete and store it to
memory.

Viper 4040 User Manual
11 Transient Vibration Surveys 11-25
From the Select Condition screen, to quit the job and return to the Transient Vibration
Surveys banner screen, press [F5] for Quit J ob.
11.2. - Resume Job

When you select Resume J ob from the Transient Vibration Survey J obs banner screen
menu, the Incomplete J obs banner screen will be displayed. Incomplete jobs are listed by
name, preceded by an asterisk. Select the job you wish to complete and the analyzer will
return you to the point where the in-progress job was stopped, allowing you to complete it. If
no in-progress jobs are available to resume, an information screen with that message will be
displayed.
11.3. - Manage Jobs
Selecting Manage J obs from the Transient Vibration Survey J obs banner screen menu
presents several sub-menu choices to choose from. These choices allow you to manage
previously completed job data you have stored in the analyzer.

11-26 Transient Vibration Surveys 11 Revision 3, Oct 2012

11.3.1. - Review
Selecting the Review option presents a list of stored jobs on the J ob List banner screen.
You can select one job for on-screen viewing. When viewing is complete, press the
[BACKUP] or [ENTER] key to exit the screen.
11.3.2. - Delete
The Delete option presents a list of stored jobs on the J ob List banner screen. From the
list, you may select one job for deletion. After making your selection, the Delete J ob
banner screen will appear, asking you to verify your intent to delete the selected job by
pressing the [F1] key for Yes or the [F5] key for No. You may wish to download the job
for reference or permanent record prior to deleting. Once deleted, the job cannot be retrieved
from the analyzer.
11.3.3. - Delete All
The Delete All option will delete all currently stored jobs. After selecting this option, the
Delete All J ob banner screen will appear, asking you to verify your intent to delete all the
jobs by pressing the [F1] key for Yes or the [F5] key for No. You may wish to download
the jobs for reference or permanent record prior to deleting. Once deleted, the jobs cannot be
retrieved from the analyzer.
Viper 4040 User Manual
11 Transient Vibration Surveys 11-27
11.4. - Manage Setups

Selecting Manage Setups from the Transient Vibration Survey J obs banner screen menu
presents several sub-menu choices to choose from. These choices allow you to manage job
setups you have stored previously in the analyzer.
11.4.1. - Edit
Selecting the Edit function displays the Setup List screen. Select the setup you wish to
edit. The screen will display the Spectra Setup screen. Edit the setup as necessary using
steps 11.1.1 through 11.1.1.5 above as a guide and press [ENTER] to store and exit the edited
setup screen.
NOTE
When the EDIT mode is being used, you must press the [ENTER] key until the screen
again displ ays the TRANSIENT VIBRATION SURVEY JOBS banner screen, shown
above, for the edited information to be stored. Using the [BACKUP] key to return to
the menu will exit the edit function without storing the new information.
11.4.2. New
If you select New, the Spectra Setup screen is displayed. See section 11.1.1 for
instructions on how to proceed from this point.
11.4.3. Delete
The Delete option presents you with a list of stored setups. From the list, you may select
one setup for deletion. If you wish to delete all stored setups, you must delete them
individually. After making your selection, you will be asked to verify your intent to delete the

11-28 Transient Vibration Surveys 11 Revision 3, Oct 2012
selected job by pressing the [F1] key for Yes, or the [F5] key for No. We highly
recommend you download the setup(s) for reference or permanent record prior to deleting
them. Once deleted, the setups cannot be retrieved from the analyzer.
11.4.4. - Select Setup for Remote Job

The Select Setup for Remote J ob option allows you to select the name of a transient survey
setup to use for a REMOTE transient job. You must select the name of a specific setup from
the Name: toggle field, as shown below. The next line allows you to select the method the
analyzer will use to start the job. The choices are Automatically or Pilot Trigger.
Automatically tells the analyzer to start the job as soon as it is turned on. Pilot Trigger is an
ACES option that allows the job to be started from a remote location, the Pilots station for
example. To help the analyzer properly manage internal memory, you should also enter a
time (in seconds) of a typical data acquisition. Valid time entries are between 20 and 999
seconds.



Chapter 12
Monitor Spectrum
(Revision 3, Oct 2012)
Monitor Spectrum is an analyzer function that is accessed from the analyzers Main Menu
banner screen. A description of this function follows, along with the information required to
complete the menu screens within the function, and the steps necessary to perform the
function.
The Monitor Spectrum function allows the user to rapidly set up the analyzer to acquire
vibration data for troubleshooting, verification of repair, comparison of similar components
or snap shot recording of pre- or post-maintenance conditions.

12.1 Spectra Setup
12.1.1. Select Monitor Spectrum from the Main Menu banner screen.
12.1.1.1. The analyzer will display the Spectra Setup banner screen shown in the
illustration below. Complete the fields as follows:

12-2 Monitor Spectrum 12 Revision 3, Oct 2012

12.1.1.2. Determine if the required frequency units are revolutions per minute (RPM) or
cycles per second (Hz). Press the [] key to toggle between the frequency unit
selections in the field.
12.1.1.3. Use the [] key to move down to the next field. Using the keypad, enter the
determined minimum frequency in the Min Frequency field. This is the first
field directly to the right of the frequency units (RPM or Hz) field. Determine
the minimum and maximum frequency requirements. For instance, if the
frequency of interest is 300 Hz, you might choose a minimum and maximum
frequency that will place the 300 Hz in the center of the range. The minimum
might then be 250 Hz and the maximum 350 Hz for instance. You might also
consider other factors such as Harmonics. If you want multiples of the
fundamental frequency included in the frequency range, determine to what
extent that need is (1X, 2X, 3X and so on) then extend the frequency range to
include it. For example, 300Hz is the frequency of interest, the fundamental
frequency. If you want 3X harmonics included in the frequency range you must
multiply the fundamental frequency (300 Hz) X the harmonic range (3X) and
arrive at an upper range of 900 Hz.
12.1.1.4. Use the [] key to move down to the next field. Using the keypad, enter the
determined maximum frequency in the Max Frequency field. This is the first
field directly to the right of the word to which separates the Min and Max
frequency fields.
12.1.1.5. Use the [] key to move down to the next field. Set the Resolution as required
at 100, 200, 400, 800, 1600, 3200 or 6400 lines by pressing the [] key to
scroll through the selections until the desired resolution is displayed. Unless
you are attempting to separate two frequencies that are within close proximity
to one another, 100 or 200 lines should suffice for general analysis. Higher
resolutions will provide a much sharper image of the specified frequency band
but also require more time and memory for acquisition [] key and should
only be used when genuinely needed.
Viper 4040 User Manual
Revision 3, Oct 2012 12 Monitor Spectrum 12-3
12.1.1.6. Use the [] key to move to the Average Type field. Select the average type
by scrolling through the selections in the field using the [] key until your
selection is displayed. There are three available options, Expon. Normal
and Peak Hold. If you select Expon the screen will constantly update both
the amplitude and frequency. The screen will have a dynamic appearance and
change as the input condition changes. The analyzer will continue to collect
data until stopped by pressing [ENTER] or the acquisition time selected in
Conditions for the current running condition expires. If you select Normal
the analyzer will acquire only the total number of blocks specified in step
12.1.1.7 below, then automatically stop data acquisition, average the collected
blocks and plot them on screen. If you select Peak Hold the analyzer will
plot and hold the highest amplitude received on screen. These values will not
decrease once plotted, but will increase if amplitude of higher value is acquired.
The analyzer will continue to collect data until stopped by pressing [ENTER].
Consult the appropriate equipment maintenance manual for specific
requirements of a vibration survey or for analysis guidelines.
12.1.1.7. Use the [] key to move to the Blocks in Avg. field. Enter the number of data
blocks you wish to be used in the calculations. This is the total number of
samples taken, and then averaged before being plotted on the screen. The
default is four. The valid range is 0 to 999. Remember that higher numbers of
averaging, while providing more reliable data, also require more time. The
default of 4 is sufficient for most applications.
12.1.1.8. Use the [] key to move to the Units column of the Channel A row. The
Units field determines the engineering units in which the amplitude, or Y
axis, of the spectra will be displayed. Consult the appropriate equipment
maintenance manual for specific requirements of a vibration survey or for
analysis guidelines. Use the [] or [] keys to scroll through the selections in
this field. The available selections are: Gs (equivalent gravities), IPS (Inches
Per Second), mm/sec (millimeters per second), cm/sec (centimeters per
second), Mils (1/1000th of an inch), Microns (1/1000000th of a meter), ubars
(Millibars), Pascals, Volts, m/s/s (meters per second per second), cm/s/s
(centimeters per second per second, db (decibels), Special and None.
NOTE
Selecting Mils in this block will not allow you to sel ect any accelerometer input in step
12.1.1.12 below. If an accelerometer i s being used, you must al so use an external
converter to convert the actual input to the anal yzer to velocity (IPS) input.
12.1.1.9. Use the [] key to move to the Mod (Modifier) field. This is Modifiers
relevant to the engineering units specified in step 12.1.1.8, above. Use the []
or [] keys to toggle through the available selections in the field which are:
Peak, Pk-Pk (Peak to Peak), Avg. (Average), and RMS (Root Mean Square).
Consult the appropriate equipment maintenance manual for specific
requirements of a vibration survey or for analysis guidelines.
12.1.1.10. Use the [] key to move to the MaxValue field. The MaxValue field is a
toggle selection field. Use the [] or [] keys to toggle through the available
selections for the field. The available selections are: 0.01, 0.02, 0.05, 0.10, 0.20,

12-4 Monitor Spectrum 12 Revision 3, Oct 2012
0.50, 1.00, 2.00, 5.00, 10.0, 20.0, 50.0, 60.0, 70.0, 80.0, 90.0, 100, 110, 120,
130, 140, 150, 200, 500, 1000, 2000 and 5000. This scale refers to the number
of engineering units of vibration amplitude specified in the previous field. The
full scale indicates the maximum vibration amplitude you expect to acquire or
the maximum amplitude of interest. Choose the amplitude that will adequately
display the full amplitude of any specified limits as a minimum. If you do not
expect amplitudes in excess of what would normally be experienced for the
equipment application, set this field as low as possible while still allowing
sufficient space to display the maximum limitations as stated above.
NOTE
Ampl itudes encountered above the setting in this field may cause the anal yzer to
overload. It is best to set the Full Scale Vibration hi gher than needed as opposed to
lower than needed so the overload does not cause a fatal error. You can recover from
the overload by pressing the [Main Menu] key and starting the process agai n from the
beginning. However, avoiding an overload will save you time in the process.
12.1.1.11. Repeat steps 12.1.1.8 through 12.1.1.10 for all channels you intend to use for
this job.
12.1.1.12. Use the [] key to move to the Sensor column for Channel A row. Scroll
through the choices in this field using the [] or [] keys. The available
choices are dependent on the number of sensors you have programmed into
your analyzer. (See chapter 18 Miscellaneous Items, for sensor setups.)
12.1.1.13. Use the [] key to move to the Channel Desc column for Channel A row.
You define this optional field. The field will accept any alphanumeric
characters entered from the keypad. This field is used as a description for the
individual channel such as Lat and Vert or GBox and Core.
12.1.1.14. Repeat steps 12.1.1.12 through 12.1.1.13 for each of the channels you intend to
use for this job.
12.1.2. Speeds
12.1.2.1. Press the [F2] Speeds key from the Spectra Setup screen shown above in
paragraph 12.1.1.1. The Speeds option allows you to measure several types of
speed inputs for synchronizing with the vibration input or to provide an entry
field for reference where no actual speed input is available. This allows you to
view amplitude, in the selected engineering units, relative to the speed of the
machine or component being monitored.
12.1.2.2. The column of numbers to the left side of the fields represents the four speed
input channels, TACH 1, 2, 3, and 4. In the Measure field, use the [], and
[] keys to select the type of input. The available selections are: NONE (where
no speed input or reference is used), PULSE S-H (Pulse, Single ended High),
Volts S (volts single ended), PULSE DH (Pulse Differential High), Volts
D (Volts Differential), PULSE S L (Pulse, Single ended Low), PULSE D
L (Pulse Differential Low), and ENTERY (A user entered speed reference).
Viper 4040 User Manual
Revision 3, Oct 2012 12 Monitor Spectrum 12-5
NOTE
Where selections vary between an S and a D suffix are necessary, the selection i s
dependent on whether the input is singl e ended (S) or differential (D). Where
selections between an L and an H suffix are necessary, the selection is dependent
on whether the required gain for the incoming signal is Low (L) or High (H). General l y
a signal below 1 volt peak will require you to use the High gain (H) selection and inputs
of over one volt Peak will require you to use the Low gain (L) selection.

12.1.2.3. The DESC column is the descriptive name for the tachometer input such as
N1, N2, Fan, or Turbine. Enter up to five alphanumeric characters in this field
using the analyzer keypad.
12.1.2.4. The OFF/100% column is used when the VOLTS selection is made in the
Measure column described in paragraph 12.1.2.2 above. This field is used to
enter the offset if measuring a DC voltage, or the frequency at 100% of
component speed if measuring frequency in Hertz (Hz). Use the keypad to enter
the value in the OFF/100% field.
12.1.2.5. In the FACTOR column, enter the multiplier for the DC voltage or Hertz to
attain the actual component speed. If measuring a voltage, the speed is equal to
OFF +voltage x Factor. If using a Pulse input, the RPM is equal to Hertz x
Factor. The analyzer assumes the input to be relative to Hz (cycles per second)
so that an input of one pulse per revolution (one-per-rev) would require a
FACTOR of 60 (1 per-rev X 60 Hz assumed) to equal Revolutions per minute
(RPM). Enter the factor using the keypad.
12.1.2.6. Repeat the steps from paragraph 12.1.2.2 through 12.1.2.5 for each of the four
channels you intend to use for this job the/or press [ENTER] to accept your
settings and exit back to the Spectra Setup screen.

12-6 Monitor Spectrum 12 Revision 3, Oct 2012

12.1.3. Monitor
12.1.3.1. Install the sensors and cables required for the task.
12.1.3.2. Start the component you are checking (engine, generator, etc.). When the
component is at normal operating condition (speed, temp, etc.) press the
[ENTER] key to begin acquiring data. When monitoring is complete, press
[ENTER] again to stop data collection.
NOTE
When the spectrum is di splayed on screen, press the [] or [] key to
produce a NORMAL CURSOR immediatel y at the frequency where the highest
amplitude is di splayed. The keys may al so be used to immediatel y EXPAND [] or
SHRINK [] the Y scale.


Chapter 13
Monitor Magnitude & Clock
(Revision 1, Aug 2007)
Monitor Magnitude and Clock is an analyzer function that is accessed from the analyzers
Main Menu banner screen. A description of this function follows, along with the information
required to complete the menu screens within the function, and the steps necessary to perform
the function.

The Monitor Magnitude and Clock function provides for rapid acquisition of a clock angle
and amplitude reading without defining and saving a setup. This function allows for no
storage of readings for future review.
It is not recommended that you use this function for the acquisition of measurements from tail
rotors or other items that have a balance chart that utilizes a strobe light for phase (clock)
angles. Measurements acquired with this function will not be accurate for use in these
applications. To balance these applications, use the Tail Rotor Balance selection from the
Main Menu.
To use the Monitor Magnitude and Clock function, do the following:

13-2 Monitor Magnitude and Clock 13
1. From the Main Menu banner screen, select Monitor Magnitude and Clock. The
Monitor Magnitude and Clock banner screen appears as shown in the figure below.

2. Use the [] key to toggle between the selections in the Tach Input field. Toggle
between selections using the [] keys to select the tachometer-input channel to be
monitored.
3. Move down to the Tach Type field by using the [] key. Use the [] key to select the
tachometer type you are using for the once-per-revolution input into the analyzer.
4. Use the [] key to move to the Vibration field. The Vibration field determines the
engineering units in which the amplitude, or Y axis, of the spectra will be displayed.
Consult the appropriate equipment maintenance manual for specific requirements of a
vibration survey or for analysis guidelines. Use the [] or [] keys to scroll through the
selections in this field. The available selections are: IPS (Inches Per Second), mm/sec
(millimeters per second), cm/sec (centimeters per second), Mils (1/1000th of an inch),
Microns (1/1000000th of a meter), M/S/S (millimeters per second squared), C/S/S
(centimeters per second squared), and Gs (equivalent gravities).
5. Use the [] key to move to the Modifier field. Mod is short for unit Modifiers
relevant to the engineering units specified in step 4, above. Use the [] or [] keys to
toggle through the available selections in the field which are: Peak, Pk-Pk (Peak to Peak),
Avg. (Average), and RMS (Root Mean Square). Consult the appropriate equipment
maintenance manual for specific requirements of a vibration survey or for analysis
guidelines.
6. Use the [] key to toggle between the selections in the Display 1 field to select the
output of Display 1. The available selections are: A, B, C, D, A+B, and A-
B.
7. Use the [] key to move down to the Description field. Enter a name from the keypad
in the description field. (Refer to Chapter 3, Using the VIPER if you are unfamiliar
with using the keypad.) The description field is optional.
Viper 4040 User Manual
13 Monitor Magnitude and Clock 13-3
8. Use the [] key to move down to the Description field. Enter a name from the keypad
in the description field. The description field is optional. If you are only measuring one
channel, leave this field blank.
9. Use the [] key to move to the Full Scale Vibration field. The Full Scale Vibration
field is a toggle selection field. Use the [] or [] keys to toggle through the available
selections for the field. The available selections are: 0.01, 0.02, 0.05, 0.10, 0.20, 0.50,
1.00, 2.00, 5.00, 10.0, 20.0, 50.0, 60.0, 70.0, 80.0, 90.0, 100, 110, 120, 130, 140, 150,
200, 500, 1000, 2000 and 5000. This scale refers to the number of engineering units of
vibration amplitude specified in the previous field. The full scale indicates the maximum
vibration amplitude you expect to acquire or the maximum amplitude of interest. Choose
the amplitude that will adequately display the full amplitude of any specified limits as a
minimum. If you do not expect amplitudes in excess of what would normally be
experienced for the equipment application, set this field as low as possible while still
allowing sufficient space to display the maximum limitations as stated above.
NOTE
Amplitudes encountered above the setting in this field may cause the analyzer to
overload. It is best to set the Full Scale Vibration higher than needed as opposed to
lower than needed so the overload does not cause a fatal error. You can recover from
the overload by pressing the [Main Menu] key and starting the process again from the
beginning. However, avoiding an overload will save you time in the process.
10. Use the [] key to move down to the Sensor field. Select a sensor type by using the
[] key to toggle between selections.
11. Once all fields are filled press the [ENTER] key to begin acquiring vibration data. See
Chapter 20, Reading Spectrum and Scales for a detailed explanation of the information
contained on the acquisition screen.
12. When finished acquiring vibration data, press the [ENTER] key to stop.


Chapter 14
Monitor Magnitude and Phase
(Revision 1, Aug 2007)
Monitor Magnitude and Phase is an analyzer function that is accessed from the analyzers
Main Menu banner screen. A description of this function follows, along with the information
required to complete the menu screens within the function, and the steps necessary to perform
the function.
The Monitor Magnitude and Phase function provides for rapid acquisition of a phase angle
and amplitude reading without defining and saving a setup. This function allows for no
storage of readings for future review.
To use the Monitor Magnitude and Phase function, do the following:
1. From the Main Menu banner screen, select Monitor Magnitude and Phase. The
Monitor Magnitude and Phase banner screen appears as shown in the figure below.

2. Use the [] key to toggle between the selections in the Tach Channel field. Toggle
between selections using the [] keys to select the tachometer-input channel to be
monitored.

14-2 Monitor Magnitude and Phase 14
3. Move down to the Tach Type field by using the [] key. Use the [] key to select the
tachometer type you are using for the once-per-revolution input into the analyzer.

4. Use the [] key to move to the Vibration field. The Vibration field determines the
engineering units in which the amplitude, or Y axis, of the spectra will be displayed.
Consult the appropriate equipment maintenance manual for specific requirements of a
vibration survey or for analysis guidelines. Use the [] or [] keys to scroll through the
selections in this field. The available selections are: IPS (Inches Per Second), mm/sec
(millimeters per second), cm/sec (centimeters per second), Mils (1/1000th of an inch),
Microns (1/1000000th of a meter), M/S/S (millimeters per second squared), C/S/S
(centimeters per second squared), and Gs (equivalent gravities).
5. Use the [] key to move to the Modifier field. Use the [] or [] keys to toggle
through the available selections in the field which are: Peak, Pk-Pk (Peak to Peak), Avg.
(Average), and RMS (Root Mean Square). Consult the appropriate equipment
maintenance manual for specific requirements of a vibration survey or for analysis
guidelines.
6. Use the [] key to move to the Input field. Use the [] key to toggle between the
selections in the Input field to select the output of Input field. The available
selections are: A, B, C, D, A+B, and A-B.
7. Use the [] key to move down to the Description field. Enter a name from the keypad
in the description field. (Refer to Chapter 3, Using the VIPER if you are unfamiliar
with using the keypad.) The description field is optional.
8. Use the [] key to move to the Full Scale Vibration field. The Full Scale Vibration
field is a toggle selection field. Use the [] or [] keys to toggle through the available
selections for the field. The available selections are: 0.01, 0.02, 0.05, 0.10, 0.20, 0.50,
1.00, 2.00, 5.00, 10.0, 20.0, 50.0, 60.0, 70.0, 80.0, 90.0, 100, 110, 120, 130, 140, 150,
200, 500, 1000, 2000 and 5000. This scale refers to the number of engineering units of
vibration amplitude specified in the Vibration field in step 4 above. The full scale
indicates the maximum vibration amplitude you expect to acquire or the maximum
amplitude of interest. Choose the amplitude that will adequately display the full
Viper 4040 User Manual
14 Monitor Magnitude and Phase 14-3
amplitude of any specified limits as a minimum. If you do not expect amplitudes in
excess of what would normally be experienced for the equipment application, set this
field as low as possible while still allowing sufficient space to display the maximum
limitations as stated above.
NOTE
Amplitudes encountered above the setting in this field may cause the analyzer to
overload. It is best to set the Full Scale Vibration higher than needed as opposed to
lower than needed so the overload does not cause a fatal error. You can recover from
the overload by pressing the [Main Menu] key and starting the process again from the
beginning. However, avoiding an overload will save you time in the process.
9. Use the [] key to move down to the Sensor field. Select a sensor type by using the
[] key to toggle between selections.
10. Once all fields are filled press the [ENTER] key to begin acquiring vibration data. See
Chapter 20, Reading Spectrum and Scales for a detailed explanation of the information
contained on the acquisition screen.
11. When finished acquiring vibration data, press the [ENTER] key to stop.


Chapter 15
Monitor Overall
(Revision 2, Aug 2007)
Monitor Overall vibration is an analyzer function that is accessed from the analyzers Main
Menu banner screen. A description of this function follows, along with the information
required to complete the menu screens within the function, and the steps necessary to perform
the function.

Monitor Overall vibration allows the user to monitor the overall vibration condition of a
system or component in a digital numeric display only and will not produce a spectral view.
This function also provides the means to monitor under one set of criteria then quickly
change those criteria and return to the monitor mode. As with all monitor functions of the
analyzer, there are no provisions for storing, reviewing, or printing the monitored data.
15.1.1. Overall Vibration Setup
15.1.1.1. Select Monitor Overall from the Main Menu banner screen.
15.1.1.2. The analyzer will display the Overall Vibration Setup banner screen shown in the
illustration below.

15-2 Monitor Overall 15 Revision 2, Aug 2007

15.1.1.3. Enter a name for the job in the optional Name field if desired using the keypad.
(Refer to Chapter 3, Using the Model 4040 Analyzer if you are unfamiliar with
using the keypad. Use the [] key to move down to the next field.
15.1.1.4. Use the [] key to move to the RPM/Hz field. Determine if the required
frequency units are revolutions per minute (RPM) or cycles per second (Hz). Press
the [] key to toggle between the frequency unit selections in the field. Use the []
key to move down to the next field.
15.1.1.5. Determine the minimum and maximum frequency requirements. For instance, if
the frequency of interest is 300 Hz, you might choose a minimum and maximum
frequency that will place the 300 Hz in the center of the range. The minimum might
then be 250 Hz and the maximum 350 Hz for instance. You might also consider
other factors such as Harmonics. If you want multiples of the fundamental
frequency included in the frequency range, determine to what extent that need is
(1X, 2X, 3X and so on) then extend the frequency range to include it. For example,
300Hz is the frequency of interest, the fundamental frequency. If you want 3X
harmonics included in the frequency range you must multiply the fundamental
frequency (300 Hz) X the harmonic range (3X) and arrive at an upper range of 900
Hz.
15.1.1.6. Using the keypad, enter the determined minimum frequency in the Min
Frequency field. This is the first field directly to the right of the frequency units
(RPM or Hz) field. Use the [] key to move down to the next field.
15.1.1.7. Using the keypad, enter the determined maximum frequency in the Max
Frequency field. This is the first field directly to the right of the word to which
separates the Min and Max frequency fields. Use the [] key to move down to the
next field.
15.1.1.8. Use the [] key to move to the Units column of the Channel A row. The Units
field determines the engineering units in which the amplitude, or Y axis, of the
spectra will be displayed. Consult the appropriate equipment maintenance manual
Viper 4040 User Manual
Revision 2, Aug 2007 15 Monitor Overall 15-3
for specific requirements of a vibration survey or for analysis guidelines. Use the
[] or [] keys to scroll through the selections in this field. The available
selections are: Gs (equivalent gravities), IPS (Inches Per Second), mm/sec
(millimeters per second), cm/sec (centimeters per second), Mils (1/1000th of an
inch), Microns (1/1000000th of a meter), ubars (Millibars), Pascals, Volts, m/s/s
(meters per second per second), cm/s/s (centimeters per second per second, db
(decibels), Special and None.
NOTE
Selecting Mils in this block will not allow you to select any accelerometer input in step
15.1.1.12 below. If an accelerometer is being used, you must also use an external
converter to convert the actual input to the analyzer to velocity (IPS) input.
15.1.1.9. Use the [] key to move to the Mod (Modifier) field. This is Modifiers relevant
to the engineering units specified in step 15.1.1.8, above. Use the [] or [] keys
to toggle through the available selections in the field which are: Peak, Pk-Pk (Peak
to Peak), Avg. (Average), and RMS (Root Mean Square). Consult the appropriate
equipment maintenance manual for specific requirements of a vibration survey or
for analysis guidelines.
15.1.1.10. Use the [] key to move to the MaxValue field. The MaxValue field is a toggle
selection field. Use the [] or [] keys to toggle through the available selections
for the field. The available selections are 0.01, 0.02, 0.05, 0.10, 0.20, 0.50, 1.00,
2.00, 5.00, 10.0, 20.0, 50.0, 60.0, 70.0, 80.0, 90.0, 100, 110, 120, 130, 140, 150,
200, 500, 1000, 2000 and 5000. This scale refers to the number of engineering
units of vibration amplitude specified in the Units field. The full scale indicates the
maximum vibration amplitude you expect to acquire or the maximum amplitude of
interest. Choose the amplitude that will adequately display the full amplitude of
any specified limits as a minimum. If you do not expect amplitudes in excess of
what would normally be experienced for the equipment application, set this field as
low as possible while still allowing sufficient space to display the maximum
limitations as stated above.
NOTE
Amplitudes encountered above the setting in this field may cause the analyzer to
overload. It is best to set the Full Scale Vibration higher than needed as opposed to
lower than needed so the overload does not cause a fatal error. You can recover from
the overload by pressing the [Main Menu] key and starting the process again from the
beginning. However, avoiding an overload will save you time in the process.
15.1.1.11. Repeat steps 15.1.1.8 through 15.1.1.10 for all channels you intend to use for this
job.
15.1.1.12. Use the [] key to move to the Sensor column for Channel A row. Scroll through
the choices in this field using the [] or [] keys. The available choices are
dependent on the number of sensors you have programmed into your analyzer.
(See chapter 18 Miscellaneous Items, for sensor setups.)
15.1.1.13. Use the [] key to move to the Channel Desc column for Channel A row. You
define this optional field. The field will accept any alphanumeric characters entered

15-4 Monitor Overall 15 Revision 2, Aug 2007
from the keypad. This field is used as a description for the individual channel such
as Lat and Vert or Gearbox and Core.
15.1.1.14. Repeat steps 15.1.1.12 through 15.1.1.13 for each of the channels you intend to use
for this job.
15.1.2. Speeds
15.1.2.1. Press the [F2] Speeds key from the Overall Vibration Setup screen shown above
in paragraph 15.1.1.2. The Speeds option allows you to measure several types of
speed inputs for synchronizing with the vibration input or to provide an entry field
for reference where no actual speed input is available. This allows you to view
amplitude, in the selected engineering units, relative to the speed of the machine or
component being monitored.

15.1.2.2. The column of numbers to the left side of the fields represents the four speed input
channels, TACH 1, 2, 3, and 4. In the Measure field, use the [], and [] keys
to select the type of input. The available selections are: NONE (where no speed
input or reference is used), PULSE S-H (Pulse, Single ended High), Volts S
(volts single ended), PULSE DH (Pulse Differential High), Volts D (Volts
Differential), PULSE S L (Pulse, Single ended Low), PULSE D L (Pulse
Differential Low), and ENTERY (A user entered speed reference).
NOTE
Where selections vary between an S and a D suffix are necessary, the selection is
dependent on whether the input is single ended (S) or differential (D). Where
selections between an L and an H suffix are necessary, the selection is dependent
on whether the required gain for the incoming signal is Low (L) or High (H). Generally
a signal below 1 volt peak will require you to use the High gain (H) selection and inputs
of over one volt Peak will require you to use the Low gain (L) selection.
15.1.2.3. The DESC column is the descriptive name for the tachometer input such as N1,
N2, Fan, or Turbine. Enter up to five alphanumeric characters in this field using the
analyzer keypad.
Viper 4040 User Manual
Revision 2, Aug 2007 15 Monitor Overall 15-5
15.1.2.4. The OFF/100% column is used when the VOLTS selection is made in the
Measure column described in paragraph 15.1.2.2 above. This field is used to
enter the offset if measuring a DC voltage, or the frequency at 100% of component
speed if measuring frequency in Hertz (Hz). Use the keypad to enter the value in
the OFF/100% field.
15.1.2.5. In the FACTOR column, enter the multiplier for the DC voltage or Hertz to
attain the actual component speed. If measuring a voltage, the speed is equal to
OFF + voltage x Factor. If using a Pulse input, the RPM is equal to Hertz x Factor.
The analyzer assumes the input to be relative to Hz (cycles per second) so that an
input of one pulse per revolution (one-per-rev) would require a FACTOR of 60 (1
per-rev X 60 Hz assumed) to equal Revolutions per minute (RPM). Enter the factor
using the keypad.
15.1.2.6. Repeat the steps from paragraph 15.1.2.2 through 15.1.2.5 for each of the four
channels you intend to use for this job the/or press [ENTER] to accept your settings
and exit back to the Overall Vibration Setup screen.
15.1.3. Monitor
15.1.3.1. Install the sensors and cables required for the task.
15.1.3.2. Start the component you are checking (engine, generator, etc.). When the
component is at normal operating condition (speed, temp, etc.) press the [ENTER]
key to begin acquiring data. When monitoring is complete, press [ENTER] again
to stop data collection.


Chapter 16
Check Track
(Revision 3, Oct 2012)
Check Track is an analyzer function that is accessed from the analyzers Main Menu
banner screen. A description of this function follows, along with the information required to
complete the menu screens within the function, and the steps necessary to perform the
function.

The Check Track option is provided for quick track observations. This function allows for
no data storage for later recall and review of data as do the other rotor-related functions of the
analyzer.
The Check Track function can be performed using either an industry-standard strobe for
visual blade tracking or the ACES Systems Model 550 TraX
TM
, or Model 540 Series Optical
Trackers.
Before using the Check Track function on the analyzer, you must first install physical
equipment such as cables and sensors. To setup equipment, do the following:

16-2 - Check Track 16
1. Place the analyzer in the location it will be used. Install and connect the one-per-rev
source to the TACH channel of choice. (You must use a single pickup or optical tach for
the once-per-rev signal.)
2. Connect the integrated cable of the Model 550 TraX
TM
directly to the AUX/COM input
port located on the top end of the analyzer. If using the Model 540-2, connect the tracker
to the analyzers AUX/COM input port located on the top end of the analyzer.

If using a strobe light, connect the strobe interface cable to the analyzers STROBE
input port. Connect the strobe to the interface. Set the strobe to the slave mode or turn the
internal oscillator off. Connect the interface to the ships 28-volt power source. If
aircraft power is 12V you must transform it to 28V to use the strobe with the
analyzer. Install tip targets or place reflective tape on the blade tips per manufacturer's
directions.
NOTE
Using the strobe may cause the ON/OFF function of the anal yzer to be disabled. If
you cannot turn the anal yzer off using the [ON/OFF] key, di sconnect the strobe, then
turn the anal yzer off.
After all equipment is installed, return to the analyzer. Then, to use the Check Track
function on the analyzer, do the following:
NOTE
The Track Device selection will determine the fields necessary for that device. Not all fields are
required for every device and therefore some fields may be omitted from the display.
1. Select Check Track from the Main Menu banner screen. The Check Blade Track
banner screen appears as shown in the figure below.

Viper 4040 User Manual
16 Check Track 16-3

2. Use the [] key to toggle between the two selections in the Track Device field,
TraX, Strobe or Tracker. As shown in the figures above, the lower portion of the
Check Blade Track banner screen then changes depending on the type of track device
you selected.
3. Use the [] key to move down to the Tach Type field. Using the [] key, toggle
between the available selections to select the tach type you are using to generate the
once-per-rev signal.
4. Use the [] key to move to the Tach Channel field. Using the [] key, toggle between
the available selections to select the tach channel you connected your tachometer to.
5. Use the [] key to move down to the No. of Blades field. Using the [] key, select the
number of blades on the rotor you are checking.
6. Use the [] key to move down to the Relative to Blade field. This selection will
determine the reference blade for tracking displays. Selecting AVG will present rotor
blade positions relative to the average of all blades. Selecting a specific blade number
will present all other blade positions relative to the blade number selected. Use the []
key to select the reference blade.
7. Move to the Track Units field using the [] key. Select the track units from either
inches or mm by using the [] key to toggle between the available selections. This will
set the scale for the track-recording screen.
8. Use the [] key to move down to the Blade RPM field. Use the keypad to enter the
expected main rotor RPM.
9. From the Blade RPM field, use the [] key to move down to the No. of Rotations
field. The field will accept numbers between 20 and 99. It is strongly recommended to
use 30 rotations under normal conditions. The number of rotations may need to be
increased as light conditions decrease. This will give the analyzer enough data to provide
accurate track results. Using the keypad, enter the number of rotations you wish to use

16-4 - Check Track 16
when acquiring blade data. (Refer to Chapter 3, Using the VIPER if you are unfamiliar
with using the keypad.)
NOTE
The Inches to Tip field will ALWAYS be defined in inches. This field is independent of any
units defined elsewhere in the configuration.
10. Use the [] key to move down to the Inches To Blade Tip field. Using the keypad,
enter the distance, in inches, between the point where the tracker will be used, to the
blade tip in the location where the interrupter is over the magnetic pickup. (Or the
reflective tape in front of the PhotoTach when used as the one-per-revolution source.)
11. Use the [] key to move down to the Rotor Diameter field. Enter the diameter of the
Main Rotor into this field using the analyzers keypad. (Refer to the Model 550 TraX
TM

operational supplement, P/N 75-900-4043 for additional details as necessary.)
12. Use the [] key to move down to the unlabeled units field. Use the [] key to select the
measurement units you would like to use for the Main Rotor Diameter ONLY. Track
elevation, lead/lag units, and adjustment units are all set in separate locations. (Refer to
the Model 550 TraX
TM
operational supplement, P/N 75-900-4043 for additional details as
necessary.)
13. Use the [] key to move down to the Lead/Lag Units field. Use the [] key to select
the measurement units you would like to use for the Lead/Lag ONLY. Track elevation,
rotor diameter, and adjustment units are all set in separate locations. (Refer to the Model
550 TraX
TM
operational supplement, P/N 75-900-4043 for additional details as
necessary.)
14. Use the [] key to move down to the Blade 1 Offset field. Use the analyzers keypad to
enter a number between (-)180 and 180 indicating the angular distance from the location
of the TraX
TM
to the location of the Target Blade at the time of the Tach event. (Refer to
the Model 550 TraX
TM
operational supplement, P/N 75-900-4043 for additional details as
necessary.)
15. Use the [] key to move down to the In. from Mast CL field. Use this field to enter the
distance between the centerline of the mast and the mounted location of the TraX. This is
the linear distance measured in the same plane as the TraX is mounted. Valid entries are
from 1 inch to 999 inches. (Refer to the Model 550 TraX
TM
operational supplement, P/N
75-900-4043 for additional details as necessary.)
16. Use the [] key to move down to the Trkr Inclination field. Use the Inclinometer to
measure the installed angle and enter it in this field. Valid entries are from 30 thru 90
degrees. (Refer to the Model 550 TraX
TM
operational supplement, P/N 75-900-4043 for
additional details as necessary.)
17. When all fields are completed to your satisfaction, press [ENTER].
18. The process, after setting up the tracking parameters, changes depending on the type of
tracking device you are using.
Viper 4040 User Manual
16 Check Track 16-5

If using the TraX
TM
- When you press [ENTER] to accept the configuration above, the
TraX
TM
will automatically begin taking data. As long as the Tach and Ready lights
continue to flash, the unit is actively collecting data. When the Tach and Ready lights
extinguish, the Check Track Results screen will appear as shown in the sample
above.
The Check Track -Results screen presents the blade-tip-path information in both a
graphical and a numeric format. The final percentage display on the Data Gathered line
at the bottom of the screen is an indicator of the quality of data. The higher the
percentage, the better the data quality. When finished, press the [BACKUP] key to exit
back to the Main Menu banner screen. You may retake the track data by simply selecting
the Check Track function again from the Main Menu banner screen and performing
Steps 1 - 17 again.

If using a strobe - When the screen shown above appears, aim the strobe and press the
trigger to fire. The targets will appear as a stacked image. By using the [F3] key you can
spread the targets out from each other. Each time you press the [F3] key the targets

16-6 - Check Track 16
separate further. To return the targets to the stacked position, press the [F1] Reset key.
To rotate the group of targets to another position for ease of viewing, press the [F2]
Rotate key. When finished, press the [ENTER] key to exit back to the Main Menu
banner screen.

If using the Model 540-2 Optical Tracker - After arming the tracker by pressing
[ENTER], a message to Aim and Fire Tracker appears on the screen (shown above).
Aim the tracker and press the trigger to begin acquiring data. When acquisition is
finished, the Check Track Results banner screen (shown in the following figure)
appears.

The Check Track -Results screen presents the blade-tip-path information in both a
graphical and a numeric format. Leading results will be displayed numerically as
positive numbers and the blade icons will be to the left of the reference line. Track
results will display high blades as positive numbers and the blade icon will be above the
0 reference line. The Data Gathered line at the bottom of the screen is an indicator of
Viper 4040 User Manual
16 Check Track 16-7
the quality of data. The higher the number of gathered data packets, the better the data
quality. If the number is below 75% of the number defined in the No. of Rotations line
above, you may retake the track data by pressing [BACKUP], selecting the Check
Track function again from the Main Menu banner screen and performing steps 1- 17
again.


Chapter 17
Transfer Data with PC
(Revision 1, Aug 2007)
Transfer Data with PC is accessed from the analyzers Main Menu banner screen. A
description of each of the functions follows, along with the information required to complete
the menu screens within the function, and the steps necessary to perform the functions.

The Transfer Data With PC via RS-232 menu selection is used in conjunction with ACES
Systems AvTrend Silver software program. This software program is included with the
purchase of the Model 4040 Viper Analyzer. See the AvTrend program help files or user
manual for further information on using AvTrend.
The Transfer, Send Application function of AvTrend provides a link between your PC and
the analyzer so you can upgrade the analyzer software version without having to send the
analyzer back to the factory. Upgrade files can be emailed to you upon request, but are
normally downloaded from the ACES Systems web site www.acessystems.com. Check the
web site to determine if you have the latest software version.
AvTrend also enables you to upload jobs and setups to your PC. The data can be reviewed,
trended and stored in AvTrend. Setups can be built in AvTrend Silver and then transferred to
the Viper via a communication cable. As the setup is used in the analyzer, the stored
influence coefficient is updated with the completion of each balance job. That influence is

17-2 - Transfer Data with PC 17
transferred to the PC when data is downloaded. When the setup is transferred back to the
analyzer, the updated influence remains with it. Setups can also be downloaded directly from
the ACES Systems web site at www.acessystems.com, then uploaded to the analyzer
A user manual as well as help files accompanies the AvTrend software program. Refer to
those sources for detailed operating instructions.


Chapter 18
Miscellaneous Items
(Revision 3.01, Oct 2012)
18.1. Miscellaneous Items

The Miscellaneous Items banner menu screen contains several menu items, three of which
are used for identification of the analyzer. The other items are user-accessible and editable
items. All are described in the following sections.

18-2 Miscellaneous Items 18 Revision 3.01, Oct
2012
18.1.1. - Setup Sensors

The Setup Sensors option allows you to preprogram information about all the vibration
sensors you own or use. Once all sensors are preprogrammed, they can be recalled and
selected from an option list during a balance/analysis procedure, saving time during the
procedure by eliminating the need to reinput sensor data.
The Setup Sensors option also allows you to add, edit, and delete sensors from the
analyzers memory.
When the Edit function is selected, the screen changes to the Select banner screen.

On this screen you may choose to Edit the information for any of the listed sensors that are
unlocked simply by selecting that sensor from the list. The screen will then change to the
Viper 4040 User Manual
Revision 3.01, Oct 2012 18 Miscellaneous Items 18-3
Sensor Setup screen and show the complete information currently in memory for the
selected sensor.

18.1.1.1. Add or Edit Sensor
Names for some industry-standard sensors have already been preloaded into the analyzer at
the factory and appear with a small padlock to the left of the name. The default sensor list
cannot be edited or deleted. If your sensor name appears in the preprogrammed list, you may
not need to proceed further. If your sensor name does not appear, then you must select Edit
to add a new sensor name and specifications.
To preprogram a sensor in the analyzers memory, you will need the following sensor
specifications which should be available from the data sheet supplied with your sensor.
1. The sensors model or name that will be familiar to you and other users.
2. The sensors amplitude units sometimes called EU or engineering units. This will be
expressed in one of the following formats: gs (for equivalent gravities), IPS (Inches Per
Second), mm/sec (millimeters per second), cm/sec (centimeters per second), mils (1000
th

of an inch), microns (1,000,000
th
of a meter), ubars, Pascals, Volts, m/s/s (meters per
second per second), cm/s/s (centimeters per second per second), db (decibels), or Special.
3. The sensors sensitivity. This is normally expressed in mV per engineering unit, as
described above. For instance, if using the model 991D 1 accelerometer, its engineering
unit is in gs and it produces 20 mV for every g of force exerted on it, therefore its
sensitivity is 20 mV/g.
To add a sensor or to edit the specifications for an already programmed unlocked sensor, do
the following:
1. Select Miscellaneous Items from the Main Menu banner screen.

18-4 Miscellaneous Items 18 Revision 3.01, Oct
2012
2. Select Setup Sensors from the Miscellaneous Items banner screen menu.
3. Select Edit from the Manage Sensors banner screen menu.
NOTE
To edit an existing unlocked sensor in the list, select it at this point, and proceed with step 5. For
adding a new sensor, go to step 4. Preset sensors cannot be edited, only those entered by the user.
4. Press the [F1] key, which corresponds, to the function key window labeled New at the
bottom of the screen.
5. The Sensor Setup screen shown below will be displayed. Toggle between the fields using
the [] or [] key.

6. Enter a name for the sensor in the Name: field, using the keypad. The field will accept
up to twenty, alphanumeric characters.
7. The Amplitude Units: field is a toggle selection field. Use the [] or [] key to toggle
between the selections until the appropriate units are displayed. The choices are gs; (for
equivalent gravities), IPS (Inches Per Second), mm/sec (millimeters per second), cm/sec
(centimeters per second), mils (1000th of an inch), microns (1,000,000th of a meter),
ubars (bars, 0.1 Pascal), Pascals (100,000 bars), Volts, m/s/s (meters per second per
second), cm/s/s (centimeters per second per second), db (decibels) or Special (custom
configuration).
8. The Probe Sensitivity field is a numeric data field. It is used to enter the millivolt (mV)
output of the sensor. This information can be found on the Sensors Specification Sheet
from the manufacturer. Valid entries are from 0.001 to 3000.0 mV.
9. The Reverse Polarity is a toggle selection field. The two selections are Yes and
No. This is a special function that will only apply to a very few sensors available. The
selection should be toggled to No for the majority of cases. The ACES 991V sensor
Viper 4040 User Manual
Revision 3.01, Oct 2012 18 Miscellaneous Items 18-5
uses the reverse polarity and is set to Yes. If you do not know the polarity
requirements of the sensor, call ACES Systems and ask for Customer Support.
10. The Input Type: is a toggle selection field. The two selections are Single Ended and
Differential. This information is obtained directly from the Sensors Specification
Sheet, Single Ended being the most common. If you do not know the polarity
requirements of the sensor, call ACES Systems and ask for Customer Support.
11. When all fields are completed as required, press [ENTER] to accept your settings and
exit the screen.
18.1.1.2. - Delete Sensor
Delete is a selection available on the Manage Sensors banner screen menu.
Select Delete from the Manage Sensors banner screen menu. Next select a sensor to delete
from the list that appears. Only unlocked sensors will appear in this list. The analyzer will
display a message that asks Are you sure? Press [F1] to confirm Yes, press [F5] for No
and to return to the Manage Setups screen.
18.1.2. - Set Date and Time
The Set Date and Time selection allows you to set the desired date and time in the analyzer.
These settings are entered directly using the analyzer keypad.

To set the date and time, do the following:

18-6 Miscellaneous Items 18 Revision 3.01, Oct
2012

1. Select Miscellaneous Items from the Main Menu banner screen.
2. Select Set Date /Time from the Miscellaneous Items banner screen menu.
3. Enter the time in a 24-hour format as follows in the Time field.
Hour - Valid range is 1 through 24, followed by a . (Decimal)
Minute - Valid range is 0 through 59, followed by a . (Decimal)
Seconds - Valid range is 0 through 60
4. Use the [] to move to the Date Format field. You may specify the date format you
wish to use by using the [] key to toggle the selection to the format you wish to use.
Available formats are: MM/DD/YYYY, DD/MM/YYYY and YYYY/MM/DD, where
YYYY =Year, MM =Month and DD =Day.
5. Use the [] key to move to the Month field and enter the month. Valid range is 01
through 12.
6. Use the [] key to move to the Day field and enter the say. Valid range is 01
through 31.
7. Use the [] key to move to the Year field and enter the Year. Valid range is 1998
through 9999. Press [ENTER] to accept the entries and exit the screen.
Viper 4040 User Manual
Revision 3.01, Oct 2012 18 Miscellaneous Items 18-7
18.1.3. Set Power-Off Timeout

To set the Power-Off Timeout, do the following:
1. Select Miscellaneous Items from the Main Menu banner screen and press [ENTER].
2. Select Set Power-Off Timeout from the Miscellaneous Items banner screen menu and
press [ENTER]. The Set Power-Off Timeout screen will appear as shown below.

3. Use the [] key to select Yes or No to answer the question Enable power-off
timeout?. Use the [] key to exit the field.
4. Exiting the above field with Yes selected will cause the Timeout length (minutes)
line to appear. Select a number of minutes between 5 and 60; this is the length of time
the analyzer power will remain on before automatically shutting off. Press [ENTER] to
exit this screen and return to the Miscellaneous Items menu.

18-8 Miscellaneous Items 18 Revision 3.01, Oct
2012
18.1.4. Set Job Count Limit

You can limit the number of jobs the analyzer will store for each type of job. For example, if
you institute a 10-job limit, the analyzer will store a maximum of 10 propeller balance jobs,
10 Main Rotor Balance J obs, 10 Vibration Survey J obs, 10 Transient Vibration Survey jobs,
etc. all at the same time.
To enable or disable this feature select Set J ob Count Limit from the Miscellaneous Items
menu and press [ENTER]. Then, from the J ob Count Limit screen set Enable job count
Limit? to Yes to enable and No to disable.
If you have enabled this feature you will be able to select the number of jobs the analyzer
retains. Valid entries in the Max jobs of each type: field are integers between 10 and 50.
Viper 4040 User Manual
Revision 3.01, Oct 2012 18 Miscellaneous Items 18-9
18.1.5. Check Battery

The Check Battery function allows the user to check the remaining battery life prior to
beginning a job. The current state of the battery is presented in a percentage of full charge
remaining. This check is for planning purposes only but should give you sufficient
information to determine f you have enough battery capacity remaining to conduct a normal
job. A fully charged, new battery should normally supply constant power to the analyzer
using two vibration sensors and one optical tachometer for approximately 10 hours. This time
will vary dependent on the number of sensors and tachometers and their power requirements.
Therefore, for planning purposes, an indication of 50% should be sufficient charge remaining
for 5 hours of operation.
To check the battery life, do the following:
1. Select Miscellaneous Items from the Main Menu banner screen.
2. Select Check Battery from the Miscellaneous Items banner screen menu.
3. The analyzer will display the percentage of full battery charge remaining.
NOTE
We recommend the battery be charged on a regular schedule and that a job not be started with
less than 50% of full charge remaining. See Chapter 2, Analyzer Description for instructions
on charging the battery.

18-10 Miscellaneous Items 18 Revision 3.01, Oct
2012
18.1.6. - Analyzer Information

The Analyzer Information banner screen contains information about the analyzer and its
owner. The information is entered into each individual analyzer at the factory at the time of
purchase.

This information is significant for two reasons. If your analyzer is ever stolen or lost, it can
easily be identified by the information contained on this screen. The information cannot be
deleted or altered and remains intact regardless of the availability of power to the analyzer.
Also, if the analyzer is used in a business, this information can is used as advertisement and
future reference to your customers as each printout contains a header based on the
information from this screen. The analyzer information can only be entered or changed by
technicians at the ACES Systems facility. Check to insure all information on this screen is
correct. If changes are required, contact ACES Systems at the phone number listed at the
front of this manual.
Viper 4040 User Manual
Revision 3.01, Oct 2012 18 Miscellaneous Items 18-
11
To access the Analyzer Information banner screen, do the following:
1. Select Miscellaneous Items from the Main Menu banner screen. Select Analyzer
Information from the Miscellaneous Items banner screen menu.

In addition to owner information, this screen displays the following information:

Serial # - The serial number of the analyzer.

License: - The license number determines which Main Menu items are accessible to this
analyzer. The license number is specific to the serial number of the analyzer and can
only be issued by ACES Systems.

Prior Seq - Indicates whether you have purchased a limited-use license.

ROM Ver Indicates the version of Read Only Memory currently installed in your
analyzer. This may also be referred to as the BOOT ROM.

ROM Date: - Indicates the date of the currently installed ROM Version.

APP Ver Indicates the version of the currently installed application software running in
your analyzer (The application version is upgraded by you, the user via ACES Systems
WinFlash Software.).

APP Date Indicates the date of the currently installed application software.

Calibration Date: - Indicated the date and time that the last calibration was performed on
the analyzer. This date and time can only be changed by ACES Systems personnel.

Available Working Memory: - Indicates an approximate value of memory available to the
analyzer for storing setups and jobs.
At the bottom of the screen, the [F2] key correlates to License on the screen. By pressing
the [F2] key you will be taken to the License Edit screen shown below. You will enter the
license number, typically found inside the lid of the analyzer, into the analyzer from this
screen. Use the [] key to move from field to field. When all fields are filled in, press
[ENTER] to store the new configuration. When the analyzer is turned [OFF] then back [ON],
any new menu items will become visible.

18-12 Miscellaneous Items 18 Revision 3.01, Oct
2012

18.1.7. Database Information

The Database Information selection will produce the Database Information banner
screen. The screen is divided into two sections to accurately reflect the status of the two
memory areas found in the Model 4040 Viper.

The top half of the screen displays information about the RAM Database. This database
stores most of the information recorded during Propeller Balance, Fan/Turbine Balance, Main
and Tail Rotor Balance, and Vibration Survey J obs. The total number of objects stored and
read successfully will be displayed. The total free memory (in bytes) and the total amount of
stored data (in bytes) will be displayed. The Last Modified date and time will be listed as
the last line of the RAM Database section.

The bottom portion of the screen displays the amount of Transient Storage that is currently
full. This data comes from the Transient Vibration Survey function and may fill at a different
rate than the data stored in the RAM Database. When the Full indication approaches 100%
Viper 4040 User Manual
Revision 3.01, Oct 2012 18 Miscellaneous Items 18-
13
Full, you must delete some of the Transient Vibration Survey J obs to allow for proper data
storage.

In either case, the RAM Database or the Transient Storage, you will be prompted during the
job or before the job if enough memory is not available to store the current job. This is an
information (read only) screen and its contents cannot be altered by the user from within this
screen. Press the [F5] Continue key or the [BACKUP] key to exit this screen.

18.1.8. Erase Entire Database
The Erase Entire Database menu item is a fast method of removing all stored data, setups,
and jobs that currently reside in the analyzers memory. After selecting this option and
pressing the Enter key, the analyzer will show a message asking you to verify that this is what
you intend to do. Pressing the [F1] Yes key or the [F5] No key verifies your intent.
18.1.9. USB Information
The USB Information key has no function even though USB transfers are possible.
18.1.10. Erase Orphaned Transient Spectra
The Erase Orphaned Transient Spectra function checks the flash file system (FFS) for any
spectra that belong to any transient vibration survey that no longer exists. The transient
vibration survey may have been intentionally erased or deleted by several available options in
the analyzer.

For instance, if a transient survey in the RAM database becomes corrupt the analyzer will
detect this during the next boot and present an information screen to notify you of the corrupt
data. It will then provide the option to delete all corrupt data by pressing a function key. The

18-14 Miscellaneous Items 18 Revision 3.01, Oct
2012
software process that rebuilds the RAM database following the deletion of the corrupt data
doesn't know what kind of corrupt object was deleted, because that information, being
corrupt, is unreliable. As a result, any spectra taken for that job get left behind in the flash
file system (FFS), where they occupy memory space, but are not accessible or useful in any
way.

Orphaned Spectra should be a rare occurrence. This function is made available to correct
memory problems that may exist during those occasions. There is no need to run this
function routinely unless memory errors occur and you are asked to run it during a
troubleshooting exercise with a customer support representative of ACES. If you do not use
the Transient Vibration Survey feature, this menu item is not a usable feature.
18.1.11. Bus Test
The Bus Test feature of the Miscellaneous Items menu is a troubleshooting tool for boot
related errors. There is no reason to run this test unless you are experiencing numerous boot
errors or you do it as directed by an ACES support representative in the course of
troubleshooting.
18.1.12. EMS Comm Test
This feature will allow you to perform an EMS communications test to test your cable
connections with the 1752B J EDA equipment. Specific diagnostic messages will help you
troubleshoot connectivity issues.
18.1.13. Show Welcome Screen
This option will display the welcome screen giving you a quick method to access the Boot
and App versions of the analyzer operating software. Press [ENTER] to leave the welcome
screen and return to the Miscellaneous Items menu.
18.1.14. Enable Memory Leak Tests
This function is made available to troubleshoot memory problems that may exist during
usage. There is no need to run this function routinely unless memory errors occur and you
are asked to run it during a troubleshooting exercise with a customer support representative of
ACES.


Chapter 19
Equipment and Accessory Setup and
Troubleshooting
(Revision 3, Aug 2007)
The information in this chapter is provided to assist you in avoiding some of the common
pitfalls associated with setting up and using the various accessories, cables and sensors
required for performing routine balance or vibration survey jobs with the Viper 4040.
19.1. - Battery Charger and Battery
The following troubleshooting paragraphs apply only to the Nickel Cadmium (NiCd) battery
installed as original equipment in analyzers having a 01xxx serial number.
CAUTION
The charger is built for indoor use only. Dont expose the charger to the elements.
WARNING
Power requirements must be determined on an individual basis. Operating the Viper
with the battery charger connected can affect the accuracy of the acquired readings.
The analyzer was not intended to be operated during the charging process.
Always replace the cap on the BATT CHG port of the analyzer. The unprotected
pins may short out on surrounding material and cause damage to the analyzer or
battery.
Battery Specifications

The Viper 4040 battery pack is a custom built 12V NiCd pack. The specifications of
the battery pack are:

Nominal 12V pack voltage.
Fully charged voltage 14V.
3000mAh nominal capacity

19-2 Equipment and Accessory Setup and Troubleshooting 19 Revision 3, Aug 2007
The custom pack is composed of 10 size C 1.2V cells.

BATTERY LIFE/DISCHARGE

When the battery pack is fully charged, the battery voltage is approximately 14V,
which is considered above the 100% charge level. When the analyzer is used, the
battery voltage will quickly drop (within the first 20-30 minutes of use) to 12.4V,
which is approximately 60% indicated charge level. At that point the voltage will
stabilize near 12.3V to 12.2V, with a slight decrease with use, until the full capacity is
reached, at which point the voltage will drop VERY quickly. When the battery
voltage reaches the 8% charge level, which is 11.8V, the battery voltage is beginning
to decrease VERY rapidly. This is a standard discharge characteristic of ALL NiCd
batteries. A typical discharge curve is presented below to illustrate this behavior.

Under typical usage conditions, using two channels, an optical tachometer and the
backlight ON, the analyzer should maintain an operational charge for approximately
4.5 hours. If the backlight is turned off or otherwise not used, this time increases to
near 7 hours.
Typical Battery Discharge Curve (C/5 Rate)
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
0 50 100 150 200 250 300
Operating Time (minutes)
B
a
t
t
e
r
y

V
o
l
t
a
g
e

(
V
)
Viper 4040 User Manual
Revision 3, Aug 2007 19 Equipment and Accessory Setup and Troubleshooting 19-3
CHARGING

The most important guideline for charging is that no charger should be left connected
to the analyzer for an indefinite amount of time. The charger can safely be used
overnight (12-14 hours), but leaving it connected for longer periods can lead to
overcharging, over heating, and reduced capacity effects. A good rule of thumb is to
charge only when needed and then for overnight time periods. If you practice this
method, the battery pack should last 5 years. If the charger is connected indefinitely
(for days until the unit is needed), the battery pack will probably be damaged and
require replacement after only 6 months.

The reason for this is that the charger uses a constant-voltage charge technique and is
not true trickle-charger. The charger does reach a quasi trickle-charge state, which
is a slow charge, but the battery eventually reaches a point where it cannot accept any
additional charge. At that point, heat buildup and electrolyte breakdown begins
resulting in permanent and irreversible damage to the battery pack.

Some common charging problems are leaving the battery connected to the charger for
too long of a time period (overcharging) and repeated shallow cycling of the battery
(memory effect). Both of these charging problems result in reduced battery capacity,
but in most cases are reversible problems.

OVERCHARGING

If the battery is left on the charger for an extended period of time, overcharging can
occur. This occurs when either the charge rate exceeds the ability of the battery pack
to recombine oxygen gas and limit pressure buildup or when it generates more heat
than the battery can safely dissipate. Overcharging can damage the battery and
SIGNIFICANTLY reduce the capacity. Some studies suggest a capacity of up to
30%! This effectively reduces the typical 4.5hrs of battery life to a little over 3 hours.

Overcharging is a REVERSIBLE problem, in that a few full charge and discharge
cycles will restore normal voltage and expected capacity. This means that the
analyzer should be used, or setup on a desk in a measurement mode, until the battery
is drained and the unit shuts itself off. The charger should then be connected for 12-
14 hours and then disconnected. The unit should then be used or run again until the
battery is completely drained. Full discharge of the battery does not have to be
standard operating procedure (done every time the unit is used), but should be done
periodically to keep the battery pack properly conditioned to obtain the full
capacity.

VOLTAGE DEPRESSION/MEMORY EFFECT

Voltage depression or Memory Effect is a common complaint about NiCd batteries.
If a battery is short cycled repetitively, partially discharged and then recharged the
voltage and delivered capacity will gradually decrease. If the battery is then fully

19-4 Equipment and Accessory Setup and Troubleshooting 19 Revision 3, Aug 2007
discharged, the discharge voltage is reduced compared to the original full discharge.
This basically means that the original 4 hours of life, now reaches the re-charge/cutoff
voltage after 3.5 hours. This makes the battery appear to remember the lower
capacity of the shallow discharge. This phenomenon is REVERSIBLE. The battery
can be restored to full capacity with a few full discharge-charge-reconditioning cycles
as described above in the OVERCHARGING section.

The memory problem is typically induced when the battery charged following short
usage periods of one-to-two hours. When this cycle is repeated several times, the
process effectively conditions the battery to react at 40-50% charge range as if it were
the effective full capacity. Subsequent use of the unit results in the voltage reaching
the shutoff level much sooner.

TYPICAL USE

The battery pack will perform best when it is used in full charge/full discharge cycles.
This means connecting the analyzer to the charger for 10-14 hours, then
disconnecting it and using the analyzer until the battery capacity is 0% indicated
charge. Since this is not a typical use pattern, the customer should ensure that
periodic complete discharges are performed. You may discharge the unit by simply
turning it on, turning on the backlight and allowing it to sit until it shuts off
automatically. This will keep the battery pack conditioned and prolong life and
capacity.
NOTE
You must set the Power-Off Timeout option to NO in order to discharge the battery
using this method. See Chapter 18, MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS in this manual for
making this setting.

TROUBLESHOOTING

If you experience problems with battery life, make sure that everyone who uses the
analyzer understands the procedures for caring for battery care.

If the overcharging and memory effects are not severe and electrolyte damage has not
occurred, you may be able to recover full battery functions by performing several full
discharge/charge cycles. Use the following steps:

1. Setup a Transient or Monitor Overall job to measure all 4 analog and all 4 tach
inputs and turn the backlight on (there does not have to be an actual inputs on any
of the channels).
2. Leave the unit running on a desktop or bench until the unit turns itself off.
Viper 4040 User Manual
Revision 3, Aug 2007 19 Equipment and Accessory Setup and Troubleshooting 19-5
NOTE
You must set the Power-Off Timeout option to NO in order to discharge the battery
using this method. See chapter 18, MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS in this manual for
making this setting.

3. Connect the unit to the charger for NO MORE than 14 hours.
4. Repeat the above steps at least once, ideally 2 times to fully cycle the battery.

If this process does not restore full battery capacity, the batter pack has been damaged
and must be replaced.


TIPS/SUMMARY

Ensure you have and are using the proper charger.
Non ACES Supplied chargers are not recommended due operational limits and
possible damage that may be incurred.
The analyzer will drop rapidly from 100% charge to around 70% and stabilize
there with a much slower rate of decrease over the rest of the discharge cycle.
Dont be alarmed by the initial sudden drop in the % charge indication.
If the use of the backlight is not necessary, battery life can be greatly extended (up
to 2.5 hours in a typical configuration) if it is left in the OFF position.
No charger should be left connected to the unit for more than an overnight charge
period (12-14 hours).
Periodic full discharge/charge cycles will properly condition the battery and
maintain full life and capacity.
Partial discharges followed by full charges should be avoided, if possible, to
prevent a memory effect.
Overcharging and memory effects can often be resolved/repaired by completing
several (2 or 3) full discharge/recharge cycles. If the problem is not resolved
using these cycles, the battery has been damaged and must be replaced.
19.2. - Cables
Cables can be damaged if pinched in doors and windows. Always check for pinches, cuts,
and abrasions prior to using the cable. Discard, replace or repair cables as necessary if
damage is discovered. Exercise care when making connections.
Bent or damaged pins may cause problems with normal operation. Check all connectors for
evidence of damage. An optional automatic cable check device is available from ACES
Systems.
Route cables away from all hot areas and electrical equipment. If the cable is used while it is
lying on the ground, you may experience radio interference. Secure the cable to the aircraft

19-6 Equipment and Accessory Setup and Troubleshooting 19 Revision 3, Aug 2007
fuselage (off the ground) with duct tape to correct this interference. Duct tape or wire ties are
excellent for securing the cables.
19.3 - LASETACH
WARNING
Never look directly into the laser aperture. Damage to the eye can occur.
Dont use the LASETACH when the weather conditions include precipitation. A single
drop of water on the aperture lens can dissipate or block the laser beam. When humidity and
temperature conditions meet certain levels, fog may develop in the intake of the some jet
engines due to the low pressure being produced there by engine operation. If this occurs, the
fog may be dense enough to effectively block the laser beam from reaching the reflective
target. Under these circumstances, you may have to incorporate an alternate tachometer
source or wait for conditions to become more favorable.
Never use any reflective target tape other than that recommended in the manual (3M Tape,
Model 7610 or ACES Systems P/N 10-400-0176). The incorrect type of reflective tape can
render the LASETACH ineffective in high-speed applications. An angle of 5 to 10 degrees
from the perpendicular of the LASETACH/reflective tape is best.
If the shape of the laser beam becomes oblong or egg shaped, this may indicate a scratched or
damaged lens. If this is associated with erratic or unstable tachometer readings, return the
Lasetach to ACES Systems for repair.
19.4. - Phototach
The Phototach is very rugged. It is water resistant, but water on the lens may render it
ineffective. Always check the lens for cleanliness and to be sure it is free of damage such as
cracks and scratches.
The optimum range of the Phototach is 12 to 18 inches. It may work at closer or more distant
ranges, although it may not be as reliable. In some high-speed applications, the amount of
tape passing through the Phototach beam may need to be increased to insure a good trigger.
If the indicated speed (in the analyzer function) becomes erratic or unstable at higher speeds,
increase the length (or width as the case may be) of tape so that the tape remains in the beam
for a longer period of time during each rotation. See paragraph 19.6.1 below for more details.
19.5. Propeller Protractor
The protractor is made of hard plastic. If folded or crimped it will bend and remain bent. To
straighten it, lay it on a flat surface and heat it with a hair dryer on a high setting. Discontinue
the heat and leave the protractor in its flat position on the level surface to cool.
Viper 4040 User Manual
Revision 3, Aug 2007 19 Equipment and Accessory Setup and Troubleshooting 19-7
19.6. - Reflective Tape (3M Tape, Type 7610)
Always thoroughly clean the area where the tape is to be applied. Using scissors or some
other cutting tool, round off corners of the tape and be sure all edges are pressed down.
Rounded corners help to prevent tape from peeling up during use. Remove any bubbles in the
tape by pressing them toward the edge of the tape to prevent lifting due to the airfoil effect
during high speed runs. If used on a very high speed application, you may use a very thin coat
of super glue or clear nail polish on the edges of the tape to prevent the tape from peeling
back due to the force of high velocity air along the edges of the tape.
19.6.1. - Reflective Tape Width Requirements
If problems are experienced using the Phototach (this does not apply to the Lasetach) while
balancing high-speed props with the reflective tape further out on the blade, refer to the
following chart for tape placement adjustments.
1. First, measure the distance from the center of the propeller shaft to the location you
intend to place the reflective tape.
2. In the chart below, select from the RPM column the first speed greater than the speed at
which you intend to balance.
3. From this RPM number, proceed across the chart to the right until you come to the first
number larger than the distance measured in Step 1 above.
4. From this point, follow the column up to the top to the minimum tape width required for
your application.
As an example, use the following parameters: the distance from the propeller shaft to the
intended tape location measures 25 inches and the balance speed is 2300 RPM. Select
2400 from the RPM column since this is the first speed greater than your intended
balance speed of 2300. From this number, follow the row across to 26.5, which is the first
number higher than your intended tape location of 25 inches. From 26.5 follow the
column straight up to the top--2 inches. This is the width of tape required for accurate
readings at the intended distance and RPM level. (If your reflective tape is only 1-inch
wide, place two 1-inch strips of tape side by side to create 2 inches.)

Minimum Tape Required
RPM 1 2 3 4
1000 31.8 63.7 95.5 127.3
1200 26.5 53.1 79.6 106.1
1400 22.7 45.5 68.2 90.9
1600 19.9 39.8 59.7 79.6
1800 17.7 35.4 53.1 70.7
2000 15.9 31.8 47.7 63.7
2200 14.5 28.9 43.4 57.9
2400 13.3 26.5 39.8 53.1
2600 12.2 24.5 36.7 49
2800 11.4 22.7 34.1 42.4

19-8 Equipment and Accessory Setup and Troubleshooting 19 Revision 3, Aug 2007
19.7 - Vibration Sensor
Do not drop the sensor. Although built for rugged use, most accelerometers and velocity
sensors are susceptible to internal damage when dropped, especially on hard surfaces such as
concrete ramps.
Do not mount a sensor on a hot section of the engine until you are certain it will withstand the
maximum amount of head being generated in that area. A sensor must be designed for high
temperature use to be used in this type of environment. The extreme heat may permanently
damage the sensor. There are no repair capabilities for most modern sensors.
When connecting cables to the sensor, make sure the cable is not forced against the cowling
at the point where it is connected to the sensor. This condition may introduce resonant
vibrations, generated by the cowling, into the sensor via the cable and connector. This
induced vibration will complicate or render the balance/vibration survey invalid.
Be sure to include your sensor with the analyzer when returning it in for calibration. The
sensor will also be checked as part of the calibration procedure.
19.8. Optical Tachometer
See Section 19.3 LASETACH or Section 19.4 PhotoTach for tips that also apply to optical
tachometers.
19.9. Reinitializing the Analyzer
With the analyzer turned [OFF], push and hold the [5] key. While holding the [5] key down,
turn the analyzer on by momentarily pushing the [ON/OFF] key. After the analyzer screen
appears, you may release the [5] key and allow the analyzer to continue with the boot
process. This may correct some malfunctions associated with corrupt data in the analyzer.
After the boot up process is complete, you will see a message on the screen asking You
performed a hard reset. Do you also want to wipe out all information (setups, jobs, etc.) in
the database? You must select either YES by pressing the [F1] key, or NO by pressing the
[F5] key at this point to continue. Typically you should select [F5] NO. If any corrupt data is
detected in the database, the analyzer will automatically delete it and provide an information
message on screen to indicate this. If the corrupt data was in a setup, you may have to re-
enter the setup or reload it from a setup file using AvTrend. Start a new job with the analyzer
to insure the problem has been rectified. If this procedure fails to correct the encountered
problem, call ACES Support.

Viper 4040 User Manual
Revision 3, Aug 2007 19 Equipment and Accessory Setup and Troubleshooting 19-9
19.10. Troubleshooting Ground Loop Issues
If ground loop problems are suspected, the offending connection can usually be tracked down
by disconnecting analyzer connections one at a time to see if the problem goes away.
Non-ACES cables may induce ground loops if shields/grounds are terminated incorrectly.
Shields should be terminated at ONE END OF THE CABLE ONLY! Terminating shields at
2 locations will induce ground loops and noise into the system.
Case-grounded sensors should be avoided as they connect sensor case to the engine and/or
aircraft ground, which may be at several VOLTS different ground potential than analyzer
ground. If case grounded sensors must be used, they should be used with an isolating
mounting pad.
Differential input configuration should be used for most tach/speed connections. This
provides a non-ground referenced sensing point that is very high impedance, effectively
isolating the analyzer from the tach/speed source (such as a mag pickup or coil, etc).
Single-ended input configuration should typically be used for most vibration sensor inputs.
Single-ended is required to provide a good ground reference/return for the analog signal.
Some sensors are differential, but external ACES charge amplifiers convert the sensor output
differential charge to single-ended (ground-referenced) voltage.


Chapter 20
Reading Spectrum
and Scales
(Revision 2, Oct 2012)
The information in this chapter is provided to assist you in reading the graphical displays of
the various types of data that can be acquired using the Viper 4040 Analyzer.
20.1 - Reading the X and Y Plotted Vibration Spectrum

A graphic spectrum display allows the user to investigate all aspects of a rotating component
related to vibration. In the figure above, the primary indicators are the plotted peaks that
represent component vibrations.
The scale of the X axis, along the lower horizontal edge, displays the frequency of interest
in Hertz (Hz), which is cycles per second, or in Revolutions per minute (RPM), as shown in
the figure. The frequency scale is a means of locating a component operating at a known
number of cycles per second (Hz) or minute (RPM).

20-2 Reading Spectrum and Scales 20
The scale of the Y axis, along the left vertical edge, displays the amplitude or strength of
the components expended energy in the specified engineering units which in the figure
above are presented as IPS, or Inches Per Second, of movement.
20.2 - Reading the Converging Vibration Indicator and
Scale.

The converging vibration indicator and scale, as shown in the illustration above, appears in
several instances when using the analyzer. The Propeller Balance, Rotor Track and Balance,
Fan Trim Balance, and IPS and Clock functions all use the converging vibration scale.
The scale is graduated along the right vertical side of the indicator from 0 at the bottom to the
upper end of the scale which is determined by the FSR setting. The vertical indicator bar
which begins at the bottom and continues upward in the center of the window indicates the
current average amplitude by its upper end, relative to the adjacent scale. A thin horizontal
line (see arrow 2 in the figure above) indicates the latest collected (non-averaged) amplitude.
The lower error bar (see arrow 1 in the figure above) and the upper error bar (see arrow 3 in
the figure above) will converge on the average indicator as errors are averaged out of the
indication. Also notice that to the right of the indicator, the Error is reported as a numeric
value. The value is an indication of the quality of the collected data to this point. When
amplitudes are high, this error will average down to, or near 0.00 very quickly. As the
amplitude is decreased due to the balancing process, the percent value will be slower to
average down toward 0.00. This is not a fault or defect in the analyzer, but only an indication
of the averaged data quality relative to the current vibration being produced by the
component.
When collecting data with this indicator displayed, you should continue taking data until the
upper and lower error bars converge on the average indicator. The reported error will also
continue to decrease as the bars converge. Allow the unit to collect data as long as the error
continues to decrease. This will insure you have the most accurate data possible. Remember
that the percent error will be slower to reduce as the balance is improved. If you believe wind
Viper 4040 User Manual
20 Reading Spectrum and Scales 20 3
gust, aircraft movement or other external influences have caused the indications to be
corrupted, press the [F1] key for Reset. This will clear the averaged data and begin a new
averaging. When satisfied that the data is acceptable, press [ENTER] to stop the data
collection and accept the averaging.
Use the [F3] +/- Pol. key to reverse the polarity of the Tach Signal. If the Current RPM is
erratic at a stable engine speed, press this key in an attempt to stabilize the reading. This
option may be necessary when some of the Tooth settings; Shfd Tth, Hi Tth, Lo Tth, Mssg
Tth, AjSh Tth; are selected on some engines.
The top line of this screen can display three different status messages. The messages are:
Waiting for Data This message is displayed until in-range RPM, IPS, and Phase Angle
readings are recorded by the analyzer. The only way to exit the screen while this message is
displayed is to use the [BACKUP] key.
Acquiring Data This message is displayed during data acquisition. As long as the data
remains in-range, the analyzer will add each new sample to the running average. The only
way to exit the screen while this message is displayed is to use the [BACKUP] key.
Complete! Press ENTER This message will appear when a minimum number of consistent
samples have been collected. Allow the unit to collect data as long as the error continues to
decrease. This will insure you have the most accurate data possible. Use the [ENTER] key
to exit this screen and store the reading.
The text below the Current heading indicates the RPM, IPS, and Phase Angle from the
latest collect vibration sample. These values will change as the individual readings are
collected. The RPM will be the currently recorded speed value. For Run 1 the RPM
heading itself will blink HIGH or LOW if the current RPM is more than +/- 200 RPM
from the RPM defined in a Propeller Balance setup. For Run 1 in Main Rotor Track and
Balance or Tail Rotor Balance, the HIGH/LOW warning will appear if the value is +/- 50%
of the RPM value defined in the setup. For Run 2, the HIGH/LOW warning will appear if the
value is +/- 50 RPM from the value recorded during Run 1.


Chapter 21
Printing
(Revision 3, Oct 2012)
The Model 4040 Viper Analyzer does not allow printing directly from the analyzer. To print
jobs, download to AvTrend and print them using AvTrend. This provides much more
flexibility and detail. Specific instructions can be found in the AvTrend Silver Users Manual,
ACES P/N 75-900-4042.


Chapter 22
Specifications
Viper 4040
(Revision 3, Oct 2012)
ACCURACY Vibration Amplitude +/-5%, 0-190 IPS with 20 mV per IPS sensor
Frequency Range 0 -30K Hz per channel
Tachometer Inputs +/- 0.01%, 150-32,000 RPM Phase resolution of 1
degree with accuracy of +/- 3 degrees repeatable to 1 degree.
MICROPROCESSORS 5
MEMORY 32 MB
POWER SUPPLY Type Rechargeable Nickel Cadmium (NiCd) Battery OR
Rechargeable Nickel Metal Hydride (NiMH) Battery
Operation Time Approximately 8 Hours NiCd
Approximately 10 Hours - NiMH
Voltage 12 V DC Battery or 14-28 V DC ships power
Charging Time Fast charge approximately 4 hours, Trickle charge 10-12
hours
PHYSICAL Height 9.75"
Width 10.5"
Depth 5"
Weight ~7.5 lbs.
Operating Temperature 0 to +50 C
AC INPUT The data acquisition system is capable of measuring AC values to +/- 1.55
volts.
UNCONDITIONED
TACHOMETER INPUT
Tachometer signal processing electronics are capable of adjusting the full-
scale input range to handle any available sensor for measuring speed.
Adjustment of the tachometer conditioning electronics is performed
automatically and requires no user intervention. The tachometer circuitry can
detect speeds up to 32,000 RPM. The tachometer circuitry can detect input
voltages up to 30 Volts Peak.
SENSOR TYPES The analyzer will accept any vibration signal input (acceleration, velocity, or
displacement.) The input is then displayed as collected or integrated to any
other vibration unit. The vibration input will accept any voltage - generating
sensor (must have external charge converter when in charge mode) and will
supply power to the sensor when required.
ANALYSIS RANGE Anti-aliasing filters are used with a Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) to accurately
transform data from the time to the frequency domain. The analyzer will
perform FFT resolutions of 100,200,400,800, 1600, 3200, and 6400 lines.

You might also like